JP7089286B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

There are gaming machines that can accept settings related to gaming while waiting for customers.

JP-A-2018-079386A

In such a gaming machine, the visibility of the display content to be notified to the player may be deteriorated, and effective notification may not be possible.

In one aspect, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in the effect of notifying a player of display contents.

In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine as shown below is provided. The gaming machine includes a display means and a control means. The control means causes the display means to display a customer waiting effect display in the customer waiting state and a setting change operation display in the reception state of the setting change operation related to the game. The control means can repeatedly display the customer waiting effect display with a period including the first period for displaying the first information and the second period for displaying the second information as one cycle, and the customer waiting effect can be displayed. In the display, while the setting change operation can be accepted, in the first period, the setting change operation display is not displayed on the display means before the setting change operation is accepted, and the setting is set after the setting change operation is accepted. The change operation display is superimposed on the first information to make the first information difficult to see and displayed on the display means, and in the second period, the setting change operation display is used as the display means before the setting change operation is accepted. After receiving the setting change operation without displaying it, the setting change operation display is superimposed on the second information to make the second information difficult to see and displayed on the display means, and the setting change displayed in the first period. The operation display can be displayed over the first period and the second period.

According to one aspect, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the notification effect of the displayed content to the player.

It is a perspective view which shows an example of the gaming machine of 1st Embodiment. It is a front view which shows an example of the game board of 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the control system of the gaming machine of 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the structure of the staging control device of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the collective display device of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows the flowchart of the main process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows the flowchart of the main process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 3) which shows the flowchart of the main process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 4) which shows the flowchart of the main process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 5) which shows the flowchart of the main process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the main processing in the staging control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the staging composition of the customer waiting effect of the gaming machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows the modification of the effect composition of the customer waiting effect of the gaming machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows the modification of the effect composition of the customer waiting effect of the gaming machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of switching of the display state of a setting display in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) explaining the modification of the change of the display state of the setting display in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) explaining the modification of the change of the display state of the setting display in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 3) explaining the modification of the change of the display state of the setting display in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 4) explaining the modification of the change of the display state of the setting display in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows an example of the display screen of the display device in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows an example of the display screen of the display device in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 3) which shows an example of the display screen of the display device in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 4) which shows an example of the display screen of the display device in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 5) which shows an example of the display screen of the display device in 1st Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of the initialization of the setting of the gaming machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of the display device in the modification 1 of the 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of the display device in the modification 2 of the 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of the display device in the modification 3 of the 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows an example of the gaming machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view which shows an example of the game board of 2nd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the control system of the gaming machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the structure of the staging control device of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the collective display device of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows the flowchart of the main process of the game control device of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows the flowchart of the main processing of the game control apparatus of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure (the 3) which shows the flowchart of the main process of the game control apparatus of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure (the 4) which shows the flowchart of the main process of the game control apparatus of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure (the 5) which shows the flowchart of the main processing of the game control apparatus of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the main processing in the staging control apparatus of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the overview of the display device of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol arrangement provided on the outer peripheral surface of the reel of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the structure of the reel unit of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the discrepancy between the reel position in control and the actual reel position in the display device of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the reel position monitoring process of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the position correction reservation process of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the position correction control process of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the correction without relative correction and the correction with relative correction of the second embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the correctable timing selection condition of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the reel initialization processing of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the result notification of the initialization operation of the reel initialization process of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the modification of the abnormal operation notification of the reel initialization processing of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the reel abnormality monitoring processing in the variation display of the modification 1 of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the reel abnormality monitoring processing in the variation display of the variation 2 of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the reel abnormality return monitoring process of the modification 3 of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows an example of the gaming machine of 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view which shows an example of the game board of 3rd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the control system of the gaming machine of 3rd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the structure of the staging control device of 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view which shows an example of the light emitting device of 3rd Embodiment. It is a side sectional view and the exploded perspective view which shows an example of the light emitting device of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the LED substrate which comprises the light emitting device of 3rd Embodiment, and 1st sheet. It is a figure which shows an example of the 2nd sheet and the 3rd sheet constituting the light emitting device of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation and the display state of the light emitting device of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the other display state of the light emitting device of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the other display state of the light emitting device of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the light emission control processing in the staging control apparatus of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display pattern table of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the color wheel. It is a front view which shows the light emitting device of the modification 1 of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the 1st sheet and the 2nd sheet constituting the light emitting device of the modification 1 of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation and the display state of the light emitting device of the modification 1 of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the other display state of the light emitting device of the modification 1 of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the other display state of the light emitting device of the modification 1 of the 3rd Embodiment. 3 is a side sectional view and an exploded perspective view showing an example of a light emitting device according to a modification 2 of the third embodiment. It is a front view which shows an example of the game board of 4th Embodiment. It is the top view and the side sectional view which shows an example of the light emitting device of 4th Embodiment. It is a side sectional view which shows an example of the light emitting device and the peripheral structure of 4th Embodiment. It is a side sectional view which shows an example of the light emitting device and the peripheral structure of the modification 1 of the 4th Embodiment. It is a side sectional view which shows an example of the light emitting device and the peripheral structure of the modification 2 of the 4th Embodiment. It is a side sectional view which shows an example of the light emitting device and the peripheral structure of the modification 3 of the 4th Embodiment. It is a side sectional view which shows an example of the light emitting device and the peripheral structure of the modification 4 of the 4th Embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows an example of the gaming machine of 5th Embodiment. It is a front view which shows an example of the game board of 5th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the control system of the gaming machine of 5th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the structure of the staging control device of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the game control which the game control device of 5th Embodiment controls execution. It is a figure which shows an example of the collective display device of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows the flowchart of the main process of the game control device of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows the flowchart of the main process of the game control device of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure (the 3) which shows the flowchart of the main process of the game control device of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure (the 4) which shows the flowchart of the main process of the game control device of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure (the 5) which shows the flowchart of the main process of the game control device of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the main processing in the staging control apparatus of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the variable display screen which used the decorative symbol in the display device of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (the 1) of the staging display screen in hit of the 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (the 2) of the staging display screen in the hit of the 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the staging display screen in the normal electric support state of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the control of the distribution device provided in the Fuden of the 5th Embodiment, and the game property which the control result gives. It is a figure which shows an example of the control of the distribution device provided in the Fuden of the modification 1 of the 5th Embodiment, and the game property which the control result gives. It is a figure which shows an example of the control of the distribution device provided in the Fuden of the modification 2 of the 5th Embodiment, and the game property which the control result gives. It is a figure which shows an example of the control of the distribution device provided in the Fuden of the modification 3 of the 5th Embodiment, and the game property which the control result gives. It is a figure which shows an example of the distribution apparatus provided in the Fuden of the modification 4 of the 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect display screen in the normal electric support state of the modification 5 of the 5th Embodiment.

Hereinafter, embodiments will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
[First Embodiment]
First, the first embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing an example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is an outer frame (support frame).
It is assembled to 11 so that it can be opened and closed. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is housed in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, a glass frame (transparent member holding frame) 15 provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 that covers the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

In addition, lamps, LEDs, etc. are built into the left and right sides of the glass frame 15 for decoration and production, and notification when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a payout abnormality occurs, the lamp, LED, etc. are displayed as an abnormality notification color (for example). Frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (blinking) in red) and sound (blinking)
For example, a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits a sound effect) is provided. moreover,
A speaker (lower speaker) 19b is also provided at the lower part of the front frame 12. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the contents of the abnormality are notified by voice from the speakers 19a and 19b. note that,
A lamp for notifying the payout abnormality may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

Further, in the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper plate (storage plate) 21 for supplying a game ball to a hitting ball launching device (not shown) and a game ball paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the game machine 10 are provided. An outlet 22 for the upper plate to be discharged, a lower plate (receiver) 23 for storing the game balls discharged when the upper plate 21 is full, an operation unit 24 of the hitting ball launching device, and the like are provided. Furthermore, the upper plate 2
An option setting unit (push button) 25 for setting various options by the player is provided on the upper edge portion of 1. A plurality of selection button switches 25a are provided around the upper surface of the option setting unit 25, and a determination button switch 25b is provided in the center of the upper surface of the option setting unit 25. The option setting unit 25 functions as an effect setting unit in which the player sets the effect mode. In this case, the selection button switch 25a functions as an effect button switch for selecting the effect mode, and the decision button switch 25b functions as a decision button switch for determining the effect mode. Further, on the lower right side of the front frame 12, the front frame 1
A keyhole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the 2 or the glass frame 15 is provided.

When the selection button switch 25a functions as an effect button switch, the gaming machine 1
0 can perform an effect in which the player's operation is intervened based on the player's operation received from the selection button switch 25a and the decision button switch 25b. for example,
The effect of intervening the operation of the player is an effect in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) in the display device (variable display device) 41 (see FIG. 2), and the game machine 10 is on the display device 41. It is possible to operate the character to be displayed and to stop the identification information in the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41.

Further, on the right side of the option setting unit 25, there is a ball lending button 27 that is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and an operation for ejecting a prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. A discharge button 28, a balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided. In the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the player rotates the operation unit 24, the hitting ball launching device transfers the gaming ball supplied from the upper plate 21 to the gaming area 32 on the front surface of the gaming board 30. Fire towards (see Figure 2). Further, by operating the selection button switch 25a and the decision button switch 25b, the player can, for example, set the volume radiated from the speakers 19a and 19b and set the brightness of the game board 30. ..

Next, the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view showing an example of the game board of the first embodiment.
On the surface of the game board 30, a substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is formed. The game area 32 is a resin side case 3 provided at each of the four corners of the game board 30.
It is surrounded by 3 and a guide rail 31. In the game area 32, a center case (game effect component) 40 provided with a display device (variable display device) 41 is arranged substantially in the center. The display device 41 is attached to a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position deeper than the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 is formed so as to surround the periphery of the display area of the display device 41, project forward from the display surface of the display device 41, and make it difficult for the game ball to jump from the surrounding game area 32.

The display device 41 is composed of, for example, a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) and a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube). In the area (display area) where the image of the display screen can be displayed, information related to the game such as a plurality of identification information (special symbol), a character that directs the special figure variation display game, and a background image that enhances the effect of the effect is displayed. .. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variablely displayed (variable display), and a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game is performed. In addition, on the display screen, an image for directing based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, etc.)
Fanfare display image, ending display image, etc.) are displayed.

Further, the upper part of the center case 40 is provided with a board staging device 44 that plays a game by operating. The board effect device 44 has a display device 4 from the state shown in FIG.
It is possible to operate toward the center of 1.

On the right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a normal symbol start gate (normal map start gate) 34 that gives a start condition for the normal map variation display game is provided. The game ball that has won the prize in the normal figure start gate 34 (the game ball that passes through the normal figure start gate 34) is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3).

Further, on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, there are two general winning openings 3
5 is arranged, and one general winning opening 35 is arranged on the lower right side of the center case 40 and on the right side of the special variable winning device 38 described later. The game balls that have won in these general winning openings 35 are detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 3).

Further, below the center case 40 in the game area 32, there is a start winning opening 36 forming a first starting winning opening (starting winning area) that gives a start condition for the first special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game). (Starting port 1) is provided. The game ball that has won a prize in the start winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3).

Further, below the starting winning opening 36, an out opening 30a for collecting game balls that did not win in the winning opening or the like is provided.
In addition, it is located below the starting gate 34 in the normal drawing, and on the right side of the center case 40,
A normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting winning area) that gives a start condition for the second special figure variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) is provided. The normal variable winning device 37 (starting port 2) is provided with a movable member 37b that can be opened and converted into a state in which a game ball can easily flow in by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side tilts to the right. 37b is always in a closed closed state (a state disadvantageous to the player) in which the game ball cannot flow in because it is almost vertical.
Then, when the result of the normal figure fluctuation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, the normal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) as a driving device rotates so that the upper end side tilts to the right and normally fluctuates. The winning device 37 can be changed to an open state (a state advantageous for the player) in which the game ball easily flows into the winning device 37. The game ball that has won the ordinary variable winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3). It should be noted that the normally variable winning device 37 may be able to win a prize even in the closed state, and may be harder to win in the closed state than in the open state. The ordinary variable winning device 37 corresponds to an ordinary electric accessory (Public electric).

A flow path 91 through which the game ball can flow down is formed on the right side of the normal variable winning device 37, and the game ball that has not won the normal variable winning device 37 flows downward through the flow path 91. A guide portion 93 is provided below the flow path 91. The guiding portion 93 has an inclined surface whose upper surface 94 descends to the left, and the upper surface 94 catches the game ball flowing downward and guides the game ball to the left where the special variable winning device 38 described later is present. ..

Further, in the lower right of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a special variable winning device (large winning opening) 38 that can be converted into a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which the game ball is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game is arranged. It is set up. The special variable winning device 38 has an opening / closing member (opening / closing door) 3
It has 8c, and the opening / closing member 3 depends on the result of the special figure fluctuation display game as an auxiliary game.
From the closed state in which the 8c closes the large winning opening (a closed state that is disadvantageous to the player), the opening / closing member 38c retracts to an open state that can accept the game ball flowing down the game area 32 (a state that is advantageous to the player). Convert. That is, the special variable winning device 38 is opened and closed by the opening / closing member 38c driven by the large winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 3) as a driving device.
A large winning opening) is provided, and during the big hit game state (first special game state) based on the results of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, and the small hit game state (small hit game state) based on the result of the special figure 2 variable display game. During the second special game state), the large winning opening is changed from the closed state to the open state to facilitate the inflow of the game ball into the large winning opening, and the player is given a predetermined game value (prize ball). Is to be given. Inside the large winning opening (winning area), a large winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 3) is provided as a detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the large winning opening. ..

Further, the special variable winning device 38 includes a guiding flow path for guiding the winning game ball in the winning opening, and a V flow path formed by branching from the guiding flow path. The special variable winning device 38 is provided with a V door at a position that becomes an inflow portion of the V flow path. The V door slides in the front-rear direction by the specific area solenoid 38d (see FIG. 3) to prevent the inflow of the game ball into the V flow path, and the V door retracts backward to prevent the game ball from flowing into the V flow path. It can be changed to a permissible state that allows inflow. Further, the special variable winning device 38 is provided with a specific area switch 38e (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball flowing into the V flow path.

In the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, the probability state after the end of the special gaming state is not determined by the jackpot symbol, but the gaming ball flows into the V flow path in the special gaming state and the specific area switch. Based on the fact that it is detected by 38e, it is set to be in a high probability state.

Further, the special variable winning device 38 may be provided with a plurality (for example, two) of large winning opening switches 38a. Further, the special variable winning device 38 is not limited to one, and may be provided by two, and when there are a plurality of large winning openings, the large winning opening switch 38a is about one or two for each. , X pieces (see FIG. 3) may be provided as a whole.

Further, a warp opening (warp entrance) 39a is provided on the left side portion of the center case 40. The game ball that has flowed into the warp flow path from the warp port 39a rolls on the stage in the center case 40, and a part of the game ball is guided to the warp exit 39b. The warp exit 39b is located directly above the starting winning opening 36, and the game ball guided to the warp exit 39b is the starting winning opening 36.
It will be easier to win a prize.

In the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, of the gaming areas 32 in which the gaming balls flow down, the left area of the center case 40 is the left gaming area, and the right area of the center case 40 is the right gaming area. It is said that. Then, the player adjusts the firing force and launches the game ball to the left game area (so-called left-handed) to start the starting winning opening 36 and the general winning opening 35 (general winning opening on the right side of the special variable winning device 38). You can aim to win a prize (excluding 35), and by launching a game ball to the right game area (so-called right-handed), the normal figure start gate 34 and the normal variable winning device 37,
It is possible to aim for a prize in a special variable prize device 38 or the like.

Further, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, the lower right of the game board 30), the first special figure fluctuation display game, the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the normal figure start gate 34, which form the special figure fluctuation display game, are reached. A batch display device 50 that displays various information and displays a game with a variable display of a general map triggered by a prize.
Is provided.

The batch display device 50 includes a round display unit 51 composed of LEDs and the like, a special figure 1 hold display unit 52, a special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, a special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, and a normal symbol display unit. It includes 55, a normal drawing hold display unit 56, and a status display unit 57 (see FIG. 5). Details of the batch display device 50 will be described later.

Next, the control system of the gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an example of the control system of the gaming machine of the first embodiment.
The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100, and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that collectively controls a game, and is a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. CPU (Central Processing Unit) unit 110 having an input port, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, and the like, and a CPU.
It is composed of a data bus 140 or the like that connects the unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130.

The CPU unit 110 includes a gaming microcomputer 111 called an amusement chip (IC (Integrated Circuit)) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and serves as a reference for an operating clock, a timer interrupt, and a random number generation circuit of the gaming microcomputer 111. Oscillator circuit that generates the clock
It has a crystal oscillator) 113 and the like. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 are DCs (Di) generated by the power supply device 400.
rect Current) 32V, DC12V, DC5V, etc. are supplied with a predetermined level of DC voltage to enable operation.

The power supply device 400 generates an AC (DC 32V) DC voltage from a 24V AC power supply (AC).
Alternating Current) -DC 12V, DC 5V from DC converter or DC 32V voltage
Ordinary power supply unit 4 having a DC-DC converter or the like that generates a lower level DC voltage such as
It has a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies power supply voltage to the RAM (Random Access Memory) inside the game microcomputer 111 in the event of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and causes and recovers the power failure in the game control device 100. It is provided with a control signal generation unit 430 and the like that generate and output control signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal to be notified.

In the first embodiment, the power supply unit 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are on a separate board or integrated with the game control device 100, that is, , May be configured to be provided on the main board. Game board 30
And the game control device 100 is to be replaced when the model is changed. Therefore, as in the first embodiment, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are mounted on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board. By providing the above, it is possible to exclude the target of replacement and reduce the cost.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 (
In particular, the data supplied to the built-in RAM) and stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or power cutoff. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it drops to 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. This R
When the AM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, a process for forcibly initializing the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200. Is done. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is the game microcomputer 1.
It is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by 11. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a setting value change switch 126 and a setting key switch 127. The set value change switch 126 is, for example, a push switch and detects a pressing operation. The setting key switch 127 inserts a setting key to enable switching between an ON state and an OFF state. The game control device 100 can change the settings related to the game performance, and the settings stored in the RAM are retained even during a power failure or after the power is cut off. For example, the game control device 100 makes it possible to change the hit probabilities of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game according to the setting of 6 stages.

The game control device 100 transitions to a setting change mode in which the setting of the game machine 10 can be changed by turning on the power while the setting key switch 127 is ON and the RAM initialization switch 112 is ON. For example, the game control device 100 makes it possible to cyclically change the settings 1 to 6 by detecting the pressing operation of the setting value change switch 126 while displaying the setting contents on the probability setting value display device 136 in the setting change mode. The probability set value display device 136 is a display device capable of displaying the set value, and is, for example, a one-digit 7-segment LE.
It is D and is mounted on the substrate.

Further, the game control device 100 transitions to the setting confirmation mode in which the setting confirmation of the gaming machine 10 can be performed by turning on the power while the setting key switch 127 is ON and the RAM initialization switch 112 is OFF. .. For example, the game control device 100 displays the setting contents on the probability setting value display device 136 in the setting confirmation mode.

The game microcomputer 111 is a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A.
, Read-only ROM (Read Only Memory) 111B and RA that can be read and written at any time
It is equipped with M111C.

The ROM 111B non-volatilely stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control, and the RAM 111C is a work area of the CPU 111A or a storage area of various signals and random numbers during game control. It is used as. ROM111B or R
As AM111C, an electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable ROM) may be used.

Further, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect content, the presence / absence of the occurrence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a variation pattern random number 1, a variation pattern random number 2, and a variation pattern random number 3 stored as a start memory in the CPU 111A.
Is a table for determining the fluctuation pattern with reference to. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a missed fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is missed, a jackpot fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Further, these pattern tables include tables for determining the latter half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.).
, A table for determining the first half fluctuation pattern, which is a fluctuation pattern before reaching the reach state (first half fluctuation group table, first half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes an advantageous gaming state (special gaming state) for the player when the special result mode is adopted, a part of the plurality of display results has not yet been derived and displayed. Derived A display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the conditions for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state deviates from the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses to the stage before the display result is derived and displayed. Refers to a display mode that does not exist. Further, for example, a state in which variation display is performed by a plurality of variation display areas (so-called full rotation reach) while maintaining a state in which special result modes are aligned is also included in the reach state. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It refers to a display state when at least a part of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition of the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas of the display device. When the variable display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle after display and the result mode is displayed, the left and right variable display areas satisfy the conditions for the special result mode (for example). The state in which the variable display is stopped due to the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the fluctuation display of all the fluctuation display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition of the special result mode in any two of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display regions is satisfied (for example, the same). The state in which the identification information is used, except for the special result mode) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variable-displayed from this reach state.

The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and as reach effects in which the possibility of deriving a special result mode is different (expected value is different), normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), and so on. Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), Special 3
Reach (SP3 reach) and premier reach are set. The expected value increases in the order of "no reach"<"normalreach"<"special 1 reach"<"special 2 reach"<"special 3 reach"<"premierreach". Further, this reach state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived (when it becomes a big hit) in the special figure variable display game. That is, it may be included in the variable display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived (when it is out of order) in the special figure variable display game. Therefore, the state in which the reach state occurs is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, or generates and outputs a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. 10 Control the entire system. Further, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a jackpot random number for determining a hit in a special figure variation display game, a jackpot symbol random number for determining a jackpot symbol, and a variation pattern in a special figure variation display game (various types). Random number generation circuit for generating variation pattern random numbers for determining (including the execution time of the variation display game in reach and variation display without reach), hit random numbers for determining the hit of the normal figure variation display game, etc. And the oscillation signal from the oscillation circuit 113 (original clock signal)
Based on this, it is provided with a clock generator that generates a clock that gives a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 ms (ms)) to the CPU 111A and an update timing of a random number generation circuit.

Further, the CPU 111A is the ROM 111B in the process related to the special figure variation display game.
Acquire any one of the fluctuation pattern tables stored in. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result (hit (big hit or small hit) or miss) of the special figure fluctuation display game and the probability state (normal probability state or high probability) of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current game state. A variable pattern table is selected from a plurality of variable pattern tables based on the state), the operating state (time saving operating state) of the normal variable winning device 37 as the current gaming state, the number of start memories, and the like. To get. Here, CP
The U111A serves as a variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when the special figure variation display game is executed.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, ROM, RAM, input interface, output interface, and the like, and is a payout motor of a payout unit provided in the game machine 10 in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100. Is driven, and control is performed to pay out the prize ball. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball lending request signal from the card unit of the ball lending machine attached to the gaming machine 10.
Control to pay out the loan.

The input unit 120 of the game microcomputer 111 has a start port 1 switch 36 in the start winning port 36.
a, Starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, gate switch 34a in the normal starting gate 34, winning opening switch 35a, large winning opening switch 38 in the special variable winning device 38
a. It is connected to the specific area switch 38e of the special variable winning device 38, and a negative logic signal such as high level 11V and low level 7V supplied from these switches is input and 0.
An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 that converts a V-5V positive logic signal is provided. The detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62 that detects the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine 10 is also input to the proximity I / F 121. Further, the proximity I / F 121 has an input range of 7V-11.
By setting it to V, it is possible to detect an abnormal state such as the lead wire of a sensor or proximity switch being improperly shorted, the sensor or switch being disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire being cut off and floating. It is configured to output an abnormality detection signal.

Explaining the winning opening switch 35a, in FIG. 3, the winning opening switch 35a is 1.
Although shown by the blocks, in reality, a plurality of (n) winning opening switches 35a (three in the present embodiment) are provided on the game board 30, and the respective signals are close to each other by different signal lines. I
It is input to / F121. Further, in FIG. 3, the large winning opening switch 38a is shown by one block, but in reality, a plurality of (x) large winning opening switches 38a (3 in the present embodiment).
Pieces) are provided on the game board 30. And these multiple big winning opening switches 38a,
They are connected by different signal lines, or, for example, a switch and a game control device 10.
It is connected to the game control device 100 by a method called a wired OR on a relay board (not shown) existing between 0 (main board). The panel radio wave sensor 62 and the magnetic sensor 61 described later may also be connected by a plurality of different signal lines, or may be similarly connected to the game control device 100 by a method called wired or.

The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Proximity I / F
Of the outputs of 121, the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, the large winning port switch 38a, and the specific area switch 3
The detection signal of 8e is input to the second input port 123. It should be noted that the signal outputs of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a, which are the starting port switches of FIG. 1, are output (proximity I / F12).
The output from 1) is shown by one signal line in FIG. 3, but there are actually two.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124. Further, the third input port 124 has a detection signal of a magnetic sensor 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the game machine 10, and a glass frame open detection switch provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10. 63 detection signal, detection signal of main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 of the game machine 10, detection signal of setting value change switch 126, detection signal of setting key switch 127, payout control A touch switch signal (a signal based on the input of the touch switch provided on the operation unit 24) from the device 200 is input.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the game control device 100 to the test firing test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123.

As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12V in addition to the voltage such as 5V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It has become.

For the data held by the second input port 123, the gaming microcomputer 111 asserts the chip enable signal CE (Chip Enable) (effective level), which is not shown, by decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123. It can be read by changing to). The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, the input unit 120 has a detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 and a payout control device 20.
Frame radio wave invalid signal from 0 (signal output based on the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 detecting radio waves), payout busy signal (whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept commands) (Signal indicating a payout abnormality), Payout abnormality status signal (status signal indicating a payout abnormality)
, Shoot ball out switch signal (signal indicating shortage of game balls before payout), overflow switch signal (game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 in a predetermined amount or more (they are full))
1st input port 122 that takes in the out-ball detection switch signal (the signal that is output when the out-ball is detected) and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Is provided.

The out ball detection switch signal is a signal output from the out sensor each time the out sensor (not shown) detects one out ball of the gaming machine 10. For example, the out ball detection switch signal is provided in the discharge flow path (not shown) between the discharge port (not shown) for discharging the game ball (out ball) from the game machine 10 and the out port 30a. The out-ball detection switch signal is a gaming performance (eg, 60,000 out-balls) per predetermined operation (eg, 60,000 out-balls).
It is used for the calculation of the base), and the calculated game performance is displayed on the performance display device 135. The out-ball detection switch signal may be input to the effect control device 300.
In that case, the out-ball detection switch signal may be used for determining the operating state, which is a trigger for switching to the game effect or the customer waiting screen display. For example, the performance display device 135 is a 4-digit 7-segment LED, and can display the gaming performance in decimal or hexadecimal.

Further, the gaming machine 10 may be provided with a vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration so that the detection signal of the vibration sensor switch is input to the first input port 122 or the third input port 124.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the game microcomputer 111 and the like, and the Schmidt buffer 125 is provided with these inputs. It has a function to remove noise from the signal. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 that receive signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET whose noise has been removed by the Schmidt buffer 125 is
It is directly input to the reset terminal provided on the game microcomputer 111 and supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RESET is output directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test firing test device. It is configured to do. again,
The reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RESET is not supplied to the first to third input ports 122, 123, 124 of the input unit 120. The data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset in order to prevent the system from malfunctioning, but the input unit 120 is set immediately before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from each port is discarded by resetting the gaming microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged in a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. The serial communication from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 is a one-way communication in which a signal cannot be input to the game control device 100 from the effect control device 300 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140, and data for notifying the special symbol information of the variable display game to the test firing test device of the accreditation body (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the jackpot, and the like are transmitted via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass production product) installed in a game store. The detection signal of a switch such as a start port switch that does not need to be processed, which is output from the proximity I / F 121, is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, a detection signal that cannot be supplied to the test firing test device as it is, such as the magnetic sensor 61 and the panel radio wave sensor 62, is once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, the gaming machine plays a game. It is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test firing test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 as an error signal indicating that the state cannot be controlled.
The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not go through the buffer, and the like. ing. The port on the relay board 70 has a game microcomputer 11
The chip enable signal CE (not shown) output from 1 is also supplied, and the signal of the port selectively controlled by the chip enable signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with opening / closing data of the large winning opening solenoid 38b connected to the data bus 140 and opening / closing the opening / closing member 38c of the special variable winning device 38 (large winning opening), and the V door of the special variable winning device 38. A first output port 134a for outputting open / close data of the specific area solenoid 38d to be opened / closed, open / close data of the normal electric solenoid 37c for opening / closing the movable member 37b of the normal variation winning device 37, and display data of the performance display device 135 is provided. Has been done.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a second output port 134b for outputting the display data of the probability setting value display device 136. Further, the output unit 130 has a third output port 134c for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the batch display device 50, and the batch display device 50. 4th output port 1 for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED of
34d is provided.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with information about the gaming machine 10, such as jackpot information, from the external information terminal board 71.
A fifth output port 134e for outputting to is provided. The external information terminal board 71 has
It is equipped with a photo relay and can be connected to, for example, an external device (information collection terminal, game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.) installed in a game store, and information about the game machine 10 is transmitted to the external device via the photo relay. Can be supplied to. A part of the information supplied to the external device is output from the fourth output port 134d. Further, a firing permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 134e to the payout control device 200 via the Schmidt buffer 132.

Further, the output unit 130 is a first driver that generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal by receiving open / close data signals of the large winning port solenoid 38b, the specific area solenoid 38d, and the peripheral electric solenoid 37c output from the first output port 134a. (Drive circuit) 138a, batch output from the second driver 138b and fourth output port 134d that output the on / off drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the batch display device 50 output from the third output port 134c. External information signals supplied to external devices such as management devices from the third driver 138c, the fifth output port 134e, and the fourth output port 134d that output the on / off drive signal of the digit line on the current draw side of the display device 50 are external. A fourth driver 138d that outputs to the information terminal board 71 and a fifth driver 138e that receives the display data signal of the performance display device 135 output from the first output port 134a and generates and outputs a drive signal of the performance display device 135 are provided. Has been done.

To the first driver 138a, DC 32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. Further, DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment line of the batch display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit wire is for pulling out the digit wire corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A dynamic drive system in which a current is passed through the anode terminal of the LED via the segment wire by the second driver 138b that outputs 12V, and a current is drawn from the cathode terminal via the segment wire by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in, and the LEDs are turned on. The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71, supplies the external information signal with a level of 12V, so that DC12V is supplied. The buffer 133, the first output port 134a, the first driver 138a, etc.
It may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board. Further, the performance display device 135, or the fifth driver 138e and the performance display device 135 may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the external board (not shown) side instead of the main board. ..

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to an external inspection device 490. Photocoupler 139
Is configured to be capable of bilateral communication so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can send and receive data to and from the inspection device 490 by serial communication. The transmission and reception of such data is
Since it is performed by using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the first to third input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Next, the configuration of the staging control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of the staging control device according to the first embodiment.
The staging control device 300 is an amusement chip (IC) similar to the gaming microcomputer 111.
), And VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for displaying video on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. , Sound source LSI31 that controls the sound output to reproduce various melody, sound effects, etc. from the speakers 19a and 19b.
4 is provided.

The main control microcomputer 311 is a P that stores programs executed by the CPU and various data.
A PROM 321 consisting of a ROM (programmable read-only memory), a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and a FeRAM that can hold stored contents even when power is not supplied in the event of a power failure (FeRAM).
Ferroelectric RAM) 323 and RTC (real-time clock) 338, which is a timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day of the week, time, etc.), are connected. A RAM 311a that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. Further, a WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands (effect commands) from the game microcomputer 111, determines the effect content, instructs the VDP 312 about the content of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 of the playback sound, and decorates the lamp. Lighting, drive control of motors and solenoids,
Performs processing such as managing the production time.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging / reducing an image. Further, the VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM 326 used for developing and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325.
Is connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By sending and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be sent in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

A vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30 from the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311.
C, a synchronization signal STS that gives the data transmission timing is input. In addition, VDP312
Waits to notify the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing to the VRAM. A signal WAIT or the like is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by an LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) method. From VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, video data and horizontal synchronization signal HSY
The NC and the vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input, and the image generated by the VDP 312 is displayed on the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313.

An audio ROM 327 in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 314.
The main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are connected via the address / data bus 340. Further, the interrupt signal I is transmitted from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311.
NT is to be input. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and is generated by the sound source LSI 314. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 100. An effect control command signal (effect command) such as a decorative special figure hold number command, a decorative special figure command, a variation command, a stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 via this command I / F331. ). Game microcomputer 111 of game control device 100
Operates at DC 5V, and the main control microcomputer 311 of the staging control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V. Therefore, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function.

Further, the staging control device 300 is a board decoration LE that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40).
D control circuit 332, frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the glass frame 15, game board 30 (center case 40). A board effect movable body control circuit 334 for driving and controlling a board effect device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41) is provided. These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340. Even if the glass frame 15 is provided with a frame effect device provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for effect), and is provided with a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device. good.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes a selection button switch 25a and a decision button switch 25b of the option setting unit 25 provided on the glass frame 15, and an effect switch that detects the initial position of the motor in the board effect device 44. A function of detecting the on / off state of 47 (effect motor switch) and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and the effect control device 300.
A switch input circuit 336 having a function of detecting the state of the volume control switch 335 and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 is the staging control device 300 having the above configuration.
DC32V for driving a motor or solenoid, a display device 41 consisting of a liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving a motor or LED, in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the motor or electronic components controlled by the DC voltage. DC5 which is the power supply voltage of command I / F331
In addition to V, it is configured to generate a voltage of DC15V for driving a motor, LED, and speaker. Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, DC 3.3V is based on DC 5V.
And a DC-DC converter for generating DC 1.2V is provided in the staging control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in the reset state. In addition, VDP312 (VDPREST signal) and sound source LSI314 are output from the main control microcomputer 311.
It is supplied to the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) and the control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) that drive and control lamps, motors, and the like, and these are reset. Further, a cooling FAN 45 for cooling various parts of the gaming machine 10 is connected to the staging control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the power of the staging control device 300 is turned on. Further, the circuit board constituting the staging control device 300 corresponds to a sub control board (also referred to as a sub board).

Next, the game control performed in these control circuits will be described.
In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, the normal start gate 3 is used.
Based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in 4, the random value for hit determination of the normal figure is extracted and compared with the judgment value stored in the ROM 111B, and the normal figure fluctuation display game is performed. Performs the process of determining the hit or miss. Then, a process is performed in which the identification symbol (identification information) is variablely displayed for a predetermined time on the normal symbol display unit 55 of the batch display device 50, and then the normal symbol variation display game to be stopped and displayed is displayed. When the result of this normal figure fluctuation display game is a hit, a special result mode corresponding to each of the first hit stop symbol to the third hit stop symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display unit 55, and the normal electric solenoid 37c is displayed. Is operated, and the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37 is controlled to be opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds) as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). If the result of the normal map variation display game is out of sync, the normal map symbol display unit 55 is controlled to display the result mode of the out of alignment.

Further, the start winning prize (starting memory) is memorized based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning opening 36, and based on this starting memory, the first special figure variation display game The random value for big hit determination is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and the process of determining the hit / miss of the first special figure variation display game is performed. Further, the starting memory is memorized based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variable winning device 37, and based on this starting memory, the jackpot determination of the second special figure variation display game is performed. The random value is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and the process of determining the hit / miss of the second special figure variation display game is performed.

Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command, effect command) including the determination results of the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game to the effect control device 300. do. Then, after displaying the identification symbol (identification information) on the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 and the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 of the batch display device 50 for a predetermined time, a process of displaying a special symbol variation display game to be stopped and displayed. To do. That is, the game control device 100 is a start winning area (starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37) of a game ball flowing down the game area 32.
It serves as a game control means for controlling the progress of a variable display game based on a prize.

Further, the effect control device 300 performs a process of displaying the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game on the display device 41 based on the control signal from the game control device 100. Further, the effect control device 300 performs processing such as setting the effect state, outputting sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, and controlling light emission of various LEDs based on the control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as an effect control means for controlling the effect related to the game (variable display game, etc.).

Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit or a small hit, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 displays a special result mode or a small hit result mode on the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 or the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54. Is displayed, and a process of generating a special game state or a small hit game state (that is, a process of executing a special game or a small hit game) is performed. In the process of generating a special gaming state due to the result of the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game being a big hit, the CPU 111A is, for example, a special variation winning device 38 by a large winning opening solenoid 38b. The opening / closing member 38c of the game is opened, and control is performed to allow the game ball to flow into the large winning opening. In this special gaming state, the CPU 111A is subject to either a condition that a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls wins in the large winning opening, or a predetermined opening time elapses from the opening of the large winning opening. One round is to open the big winning opening until it is achieved, and this is continued (repeated) a predetermined number of rounds, and control (cycle game) is performed. In addition, a small hit game state is generated due to the result of the first special figure variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) or the second special figure variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) being a small hit. In the process, the CPU 111A controls, for example, to open the opening / closing member 38c of the special variable winning device 38 by the large winning opening solenoid 38b so that the game ball can flow into the large winning opening.

The opening / closing operation pattern (opening / closing operation mode) of the large winning opening performed in these small hit game states is, for example, an operation of keeping the opening / closing member in the open state for 200 msec four times at 1500 msec intervals. As described above, the game control device 100 serves as a large winning opening opening / closing control means for controlling the opening / closing of the large winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of order, the CPU 111A controls to display the result mode of the out of place on the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 and the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 of the batch display device 50.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the end of the special game state based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. This high probability state is
The probability of a hit result in the special figure fluctuation display game is higher than that of the normal probability state.
Further, regardless of the high probability state based on the result mode of either the first special figure fluctuation display game or the second special figure fluctuation display game, the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure Both variable display games are in a high probability state.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a time saving state (specific game state, high probability state in the normal figure) as a game state after the end of the special game state based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In this time-saving state, the probability of hitting the result of the normal map fluctuation display game (normal figure probability) should be a high probability (normal figure high probability state) higher than 0, which is the normal probability (normal figure low probability state). Is possible. As a result, the opening time of the normal variable winning device 37 per unit time is controlled to be longer than that in the case where the normal variable winning device 37 is in the low probability state of the normal figure. Here, in the normal variable winning device 37 in the present embodiment, the normal figure probability is set to "0" so as not to open the movable member 37b in the normal gaming state.

Further, in the time saving state, the execution time of the normal map fluctuation display game (normal map fluctuation time) is, for example, 500 msec, and the normal map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is, for example, 600 msec. When the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened as a result of the normal fluctuation display game, the opening time (normal power opening time) and the number of times of opening (for example) of the first hit stop symbol
500msec x 1 time), 2nd hit stop symbol opening time (normal power opening time) and number of times of opening (for example, 1700msec x 2 times), 3rd hit stop symbol opening time (normal power opening time) and opening Number of times (
For example, it can be set to 1700 ms x 3 times).

It should be noted that the execution time, the normal figure stop time, the normal electric opening number of times, and the normal electric opening time of the normal figure fluctuation display game are appropriately set so as to control the normal fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 to be in a time-saving operation state. For example, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the execution time (normal map fluctuation time) of the above-mentioned normal map fluctuation display game to be a second variable display time shorter than the first variable display time. (For example, 10000 msec is 1000 msec). Further, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the normal map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map fluctuation display game to be the second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 msec). 70
4 ms). Further, in the time saving state, when the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened as a result of the normal fluctuation display game, the opening time (normal power opening time) is set to the normal state (normal figure low probability state). It is possible to control the second opening time to be longer than the first opening time (for example, 100 msec is 1352 msec). Further, in the time saving state, the number of times the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened (the number of times the normal electric power is opened) is larger than the number of times the first opening (for example, twice) for the result of one hit of the normal fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the number of times (for example, 4 times) to the second opening number. In addition, in the time saving state, the probability of hitting the result of the normal map fluctuation display game (normal figure probability) is the normal probability when the normal operation state (normal figure low probability state, for example, 1 /).
It is possible to have a higher probability (general figure high probability state, for example, 250/251) than 251).

In the time saving state, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened by changing any one or more of the normal fluctuation time, the normal stop time, the number of times the normal power is opened, the normal power opening time, and the normal power probability. Try to extend the conversion time longer than usual. It is also possible to set multiple types of time saving states that change different things. Further, in the case of a hit, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first open mode and the second open mode may be different. Further, the high probability state and the time saving state can be generated independently, both can be generated at the same time, or only one can be generated. In addition, the time saving state is the normal power support state (during normal power support or electric support).
It can also be called.

Next, the configuration of the batch display device will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an example of the batch display device of the first embodiment. The batch display device 50 includes a 7-segment LED_d1 and a 7-segment LED_d2, and 16 LEs from the LED_d3 to the LED_d18.
Equipped with D. The batch display device 50 has a 7-segment LED_d1 and a 7-segment LED_d.
2. Various statuses are displayed depending on the lighting mode of LED_d3 to LED_d18.

The batch display device 50 distributes various status display functions from the 7-segment LED_d1 and the 7-segment LED_d2, and from the LED_d3 to the LED_d18, so that the round display unit 51, the special figure 1 hold display unit 52, and the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53. A special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, a normal symbol symbol display unit 55, a normal figure hold display unit 56, a status display unit 57, and a special figure 2 hold display unit 58 are provided. The round display unit 51 has four LEDs, LEDs_d3 to LED_d6.
The number of rounds in the special figure game is displayed according to the lighting mode of. The special figure 1 hold display unit 52 displays the number of holds in the special figure 1 game according to the lighting mode of the two LEDs of LED_d11 and LED_d12. The special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 has eight Ls of the 7-segment LED_d1.
The symbol in the special figure 1 game is displayed according to the lighting mode of the ED (7 segment LEDs and 1 dot LED). The special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 displays the symbol in the special figure 2 game by the lighting mode of eight LEDs (seven segment LEDs and one dot LED) of the seven-segment LED_d2. The normal symbol display unit 55 displays a symbol in the normal symbol game according to the lighting mode of the three LEDs of LED_d8, LED_d10, and LED_d18. The normal figure hold display unit 56 displays the number of hold in the normal figure game according to the lighting mode of the two LEDs, LED_d15 and LED_d16. The status display unit 57 includes LED_d7 and LE.
The gaming state in the special figure game is displayed by the lighting mode of the three LEDs of D_d9 and LED_d17. The special figure 2 hold display unit 58 displays the number of holds in the special figure 2 game according to the lighting mode of the two LEDs of LED_d13 and LED_d14.

Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the game microcomputer 111 mainly includes a main process and a timer interrupt process performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 ms).

[Main processing]
First, the main processing of the game control device of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 to 10. FIG. 6 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of the main process of the first embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of the main process of the first embodiment.
FIG. 8 is a diagram (No. 3) showing a flowchart of the main process of the first embodiment. Figure 9
Is a diagram (No. 4) showing a flowchart of the main process of the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram (No. 5) showing a flowchart of the main process of the first embodiment.

The main process is started by the control unit (gaming microcomputer 111) when the power is turned on. In this main process, first, a process for disabling interrupts (step S1) is performed, and then a stack pointer setting process for setting a stack pointer, which is the start address of an area for saving values such as registers when an interrupt occurs. (Step S2) is performed. Next, register bank 0 is specified (step S3), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S4). RAM 11
The range of the address of 1C is 0000h to 01FFh, and the upper level is 00h or 01h. In step S4, 00h, which is on the head side of the address range of the RAM 111C, is set.

Next, the firing stop signal is output and the firing permission signal is set to the prohibited state (step S5).
.. The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing stop signal, and the firing of the game ball is prohibited.

After that, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) is read into the first register (for example, the B register) (step S6), and then the state of the input port 3 (third input port 124) is read into the second register (for example, the B register). Read into the C register) (step S7).

Here, the predetermined bit of the first register is masked and the other bits are cleared (step S8). For example, only the second bit of the B register corresponding to the detection signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 is held, and the 0th bit, the 1st bit, and the 3rd bit to the 7th bit are cleared. Then, the predetermined bit of the second register is masked and the other bits are cleared (step S9). For example, only the 4th bit of the C register corresponding to the detection signal from the setting key switch 127 is held, and the 0th to 3rd bits and the 5th to 7th bits are cleared.

The information in the first register is integrated into the second register, and the information held by the second register is stored in RAM1.
It is retained as reference information that does not rely on 11C (step S10). For example, the logical sum of the B register and the C register is stored in the C register, and the C register is held as a status reference register.

For example, the value "00000000B" of the state reference register (C register) is "0" after the 0th bit and the 1st bit, the 3rd bit and the 5th bit to the 7th bit are cleared, and the second bit is. It indicates that it is “0” corresponding to the detection signal on from the RAM initialization switch 112, and that the fourth bit is “0” corresponding to the detection signal on from the setting key switch 127. That is, the value "0000000000B" of the status reference register indicates a setting change state in which the RAM initialization switch 112 is ON (ON) and the setting key switch 127 is ON (ON).

Further, the value "00010000B" of the status reference register is the 0th bit and the 1st bit.
The 3rd bit and the 5th to 7th bits are cleared to be "0", and the 2nd bit is RA.
It indicates that it is “0” corresponding to the detection signal on from the M initialization switch 112, and that the fourth bit is “1” corresponding to the detection signal off from the setting key switch 127. That is,
The value "00010000B" of the status reference register indicates a RAM initialization state in which the RAM initialization switch 112 is ON (ON) and the setting key switch 127 is OFF (OFF).

Further, the value "00000100B" of the status reference register is the 0th bit and the 1st bit.
The 3rd bit and the 5th to 7th bits are cleared to be "0", and the 2nd bit is RA.
It indicates that it is “1” corresponding to the detection signal off from the M initialization switch 112, and that the fourth bit is “0” corresponding to the detection signal on from the setting key switch 127. That is,
The value "00000100B" of the status reference register indicates a setting confirmation state in which the RAM initialization switch 112 is OFF (OFF) and the setting key switch 127 is ON (ON).

Further, the value "000010100B" of the status reference register is the 0th bit and the 1st bit.
The 3rd bit and the 5th to 7th bits are cleared to be "0", and the 2nd bit is RA.
It indicates that it is “1” corresponding to the detection signal off from the M initialization switch 112, and that the fourth bit is “1” corresponding to the detection signal off from the setting key switch 127. That is,
The value "000010100B" of the status reference register indicates a power recovery (power failure recovery) state in which the RAM initialization switch 112 is OFF (OFF) and the setting key switch 127 is OFF (OFF).

As a result, the detection signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 and the detection signal from the setting key switch 127 are held in the C register. Since the storage position (second bit) of the detection signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 in the B register and the storage position (fourth bit) of the detection signal from the setting key switch 127 in the C register are different, the B register and C are different. Even by the logical sum of the registers, the detection signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 and the detection signal from the setting key switch 127 are stored without being lost.

After that, a process of setting the power-on delay timer is performed (step S11). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, a slave control means (for example, a payout control device 200, an effect control device 300, etc.) that performs various controls according to an instruction from the game control device 100 that is the main control means, etc. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for the program of the slave control device) to start normally is set. As a result, the game control device 10 is tentatively turned on when the power is turned on.
It is possible to prevent the subordinate control means from missing the command by sending the command to the subordinate control means before 0 rises first and the slave control means starts up. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a standby means for setting a predetermined waiting time for delaying the activation of the main control means and waiting for the activation of the slave control means when the power is turned on.

Also, when timing the power-on delay timer, the validity of the data held in the RAM area is determined (
It is performed using a storage area (RAM area or register that is not subject to validity judgment) that is not subject to checksum calculation). As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of a RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area for calculation, so that it is possible to prevent the control at the time of turning on the power from becoming complicated.

The detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 is stored in the second register (C register), but the detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 is stored before the start of the standby time. You can reliably save the operation. That is, if the state of the RAM initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the RAM initialization switch 112 can be operated after the standby time has elapsed, or the RAM initialization switch can be operated from the power-on to the standby time. It is necessary to continue to operate 112. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by performing the operation immediately after turning on the power without performing such annoying operations, and the initialization operation performed at the time of turning on the power. Can be prevented from being unacceptable.

Further, the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is stored in the second register (C register), but by storing it before the start of the standby time, the operation of the setting key switch 127 can be performed. It can be detected reliably. That is, the setting key switch 12 after the waiting time has elapsed.
When the state of 7 is read, the setting key switch 127 is waited for the elapse of the waiting time.
It is necessary to operate the setting key switch 127 from the power-on to the elapse of the standby time. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by performing the operation immediately after turning on the power without performing such annoying operations, and the setting change operation performed at the time of turning on the power or It is possible to prevent the situation where the setting confirmation operation is not accepted.

Next, a process for setting a power-on delay timer (for example, about 3 seconds) (step S11).
), And the process of timing the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power outage during the standby time ()
Steps S12 to S16) are performed. First, the number of times (for example, twice) to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus is set (step S12), and whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on or not is set. A determination is made (step S13).

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S13; Y), it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks set in step S12 (step S1).
4). Then, when the power failure monitoring signal is not continuously turned on for the number of checks (step S14; N), the process returns to the determination of whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S13). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks (step S14;
Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the power of the gaming machine 10 is waited to be cut off. In this way, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal continues to be received for a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent false detection of a power failure due to noise or the like, and appropriately deal with problems when the power is turned on. be able to.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to deal with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the start of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM 111C is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power cutoff are retained.
When a power failure occurs here, it is not necessary to perform backup processing or the like. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM 111C, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S13; N), that is, when a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated to "-1" (step S15), and the timer value is "0". (Step S16). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step S16; N), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks for the power failure monitoring signal (step S12). Also, the value of the timer is "0".
(Step S16; Y), that is, when the waiting time has ended, the RAM 11
Allow read / write RWM (Read Write Memory) access such as 1C or EEPROM (step S17), and output off-data to all output ports (set to no output).
(Step S18).

Next, the serial port (the port that is pre-installed in the game microcomputer 111,
Set (used for communication with the staging control device 300 and the payout control device 200) (step S19).
).

In step S20, a process of activating a CTC circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed.

In step S21, a process of setting the RAM error flag is performed. It should be noted that the set of the RAM abnormality flag is provisional and may be updated in the process of inspecting the RAM abnormality which is executed later.

In step S22, it is determined whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah). If the value of the power failure inspection area 1 is normal (step S22; Y), it is determined whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step). S23), power failure inspection area 2
If the value of is normal (step S23; Y), the checksum calculation process (step S24) for calculating the checksum of the predetermined area in the RWM is performed.

In the checksum calculation process, the sum of the data in the game control work area and the data in the status display work area may be calculated as a checksum, or the data in the game control work area and the status display work may be calculated. The checksum may be calculated separately from the data of the area, or the checksum may be calculated only from the data of the game control work area. The game control work area is a work area used for game control in the storage area in the RWM. The status display work area is a work area used for status display in the storage area in the RWM.

Next, it is determined whether or not the checksum calculated in step S24 and the checksum when the power is turned off match (step S25), and when it is determined that the checksums match (normal) (step S25; Y) clears the RAM abnormality flag tentatively set in step S21 (step S26).

When it is determined that the checksums do not match (is not normal) (step S25;
In N), by passing step S26 and shifting to step S27, the RAM abnormality flag tentatively set in step S21 becomes deterministic. Even if it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step S22; N or step S23; N), it is tentatively set in step S21 by passing step S26 and moving to step S27. The RAM error flag is deterministic.

In step S27, the setting key switch 12 refers to the second register (C register).
It is determined whether or not the detection signal of 7 is on and the detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 is on. If the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is on and the detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 is on, the process proceeds to step S33, the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is on, and the detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 is on. If not on, step S
Proceed to 28.

Since the game control device 100 holds the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 and the detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 in the second register (C register), the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 and the RAM initialization The detection signal of the switch 112 can be determined at the same time. Further, the game control device 100 has a detection signal of the setting key switch 127 and RAM.
Since the detection signal of the initialization switch 112 is held in the second register (C register),
The detection signal of the setting key switch 127 and the detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 before the validity determination of the RAM can be determined.

In step S28, the control unit determines whether or not the RAM abnormality flag is on. The control unit proceeds to step S30 when the RAM error flag is on (that is, when the RAM error flag is set), and when the RAM error flag is not on (that is, RAM).
If the abnormality flag is cleared), the process proceeds to step S29.

In step S29, the control unit determines whether or not the setting change mode flag is on. The control unit proceeds to step S48 when the setting change mode flag is on, and proceeds to step S30 when the setting change mode flag is not on.

Steps S30 to S32 are processes executed when the RAM is abnormal or when the power is shut off during the setting and the RAM is restarted without being cleared. Step S3
At 0, the control unit transmits a command for notifying the main abnormality error to the effect control device 300.
As a result, the effect control device 300 performs the effect control corresponding to the command of the main abnormality error notification. For example, the staging control device 300 receives a command for notifying a main abnormality error, displays a message informing the restart with RAM clear on the display device 41, or outputs sound from the speakers 19a and 19b. Further, the effect control device 300 receives the command for notifying the main abnormality error, and notifies the main abnormality error by the frame decoration device 18, the board decoration device 46, and the board effect device 44.

In step S31, the control unit displays the 7-segment display data when the game is stopped by the performance display device 135.
Output to. At this time, the control unit can display the status corresponding to the main abnormality error on the performance display device 135. Further, the control unit outputs the 7-segment display data when the game is stopped to the probability setting value display device 136. At this time, the control unit can display a numerical value or a character that is not in the probability set value on the probability set value display device 136. The control unit is L when the game is stopped.
The 7-segment display data including the ED display data may be output to the batch display device 50. At this time, the control unit may turn off or turn on all the batch display devices 50.

In step S32, the control unit outputs the on-data of the security signal to the external information terminal board 71.
Output from. At this time, the control unit turns off the output data of other signals output from the external information terminal board 71. The control unit repeatedly executes steps S31 and S32 and waits for the power to be cut off. That is, the gaming machine 10 outputs a security signal from the external information terminal board 71 until the power is cut off. Further, the gaming machine 10 waits until the power is cut off.
No signal other than the security signal is output from the external information terminal board 71.

The control unit does not prohibit RAM access in the repeated execution of steps S31 and S32 until the power is cut off. As a result, the gaming machine 10 has NMI (No.
n-Maskable Interrupt) The return address can be stored in RAM when it occurs, reducing the risk of program runaway. In this way, the control unit waits for the power to be cut off in step S31.
And the stored contents of the RAM during repeated execution of step S32 are not protected by prohibiting RAM access, but since clearing the RAM at the time of restart is a condition for starting the game control, the risk that the stored contents of the RAM are not protected is limited. There is. That is, the gaming machine 10 obtains the effect of reducing the risk of program runaway while limiting the risk that the stored contents of the RAM are not protected. Further, the control unit does not prohibit RAM access in the repeated execution of step S31 and step S32 until the power is cut off, so that the control unit does not prohibit RAM access, so that step S31 and step S32
In, the subroutine can be called to improve the program efficiency.

Steps S33 to S36 are processes related to setting change preparation, and step S
At 27, the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is turned on and the RAM initialization switch 11
This is a process executed when the detection signal of 2 is on.

In step S33, the control unit determines whether or not the RAM abnormality flag is on. The control unit proceeds to step S34 when the RAM error flag is on, and proceeds to step S35 when the RAM error flag is not on.

In step S34, the control unit clears the set value because the RAM error flag is on. The setting value may be cleared by setting an invalid value as the setting value, or by setting the most disadvantageous value for the player from the viewpoint of fraud countermeasures.

In step S35, the control unit performs a process of setting the setting change mode flag. The setting change mode flag is a flag indicating whether or not the game machine 10 is changing the setting. The setting change mode flag is set when the setting is being changed, and the setting change mode is in progress when the setting is not being changed. The flag is cleared (reset).

In step S36, the control unit transmits the command for which the setting is being changed to the effect control device 300. As a result, the effect control device 300 performs the effect control corresponding to the command whose setting is being changed. For example, the staging control device 300 receives a command during the setting change and displays a message indicating that the setting is being changed on the display device 41, or the speakers 19a, 1
Sound is output from 9b. Further, the effect control device 300 receives the command during the setting change, and notifies the frame decoration device 18, the board decoration device 46, and the board effect device 44 that the setting is being changed.

Step S37 is a process executed after the setting change preparation (step S33 to step S36) or after the setting confirmation preparation (step S49, step S50). In step S37, the control unit sets the security signal control timer to 128 ms. As a result, the gaming machine 10 outputs a security signal at least until the security signal control timer is timed up.

Steps S38 to S40 are processes related to waiting for the end of setting change or waiting for the end of setting confirmation. By setting the output of the security signal in step S37, the gaming machine 10 makes it possible to grasp from the outside the execution of the process related to the setting change end waiting or the setting confirmation end waiting.

After enabling the interrupt (step S38), the control unit refers to the second register (C register) and determines whether or not the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is off (step S).
39). The control unit is in step S5 when the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is off.
The process proceeds to step 5, and if the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is not off, the process proceeds to step S40.

In step S40, the control unit determines whether or not a power failure has occurred. The control unit is
The occurrence of a power failure can be determined by continuously detecting the power failure monitoring signal for a predetermined time. The control unit proceeds to step S41 when a power failure occurs, and step S when a power failure does not occur.
Proceed to 39. That is, the control unit waits for the setting key to be turned off until the power failure occurs, with the interrupt enabled in step S38.

When the control unit determines that a power failure has occurred, the process for disabling interrupts (step S4).
1) Perform the process of outputting off-data to all output ports (step S42).
After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step S43).
), The power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step S44).
Further, a checksum calculation process (step S45) for calculating the checksum when the power of the RWM is turned off, and a process for saving the calculated checksum in the checksum area (step S46).
), Then the process of prohibiting access to the RAM (step S47) is performed, and then the power of the gaming machine is waited for to be cut off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is turned off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power is cut off is correctly backed up. It can be determined at the time of re-input.

Step S48 is executed when it is determined in step S29 that the setting change mode flag is on. In step S48, the control unit refers to the second register (C register) and determines whether or not the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is on. The control unit
If the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is on, the process proceeds to step S49, and if the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is not on, the process proceeds to step S51.

Step S49 and step S50 are processes related to preparation for setting confirmation. Step S4
In 9, the control unit performs a process of setting a flag in the setting confirmation mode. The setting confirmation mode flag is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming machine 10 is confirming the setting. The setting confirmation mode flag is set when the setting is being confirmed, and the setting confirmation mode is in progress when the setting is not being confirmed. The flag is cleared (reset). In step S50, the control unit transmits the command for which the setting is being confirmed to the staging control device 300. As a result, the staging control device 300 performs staging control corresponding to the command being confirmed for setting. For example, the staging control device 300 receives a command during setting confirmation, displays a message indicating that the setting is being confirmed on the display device 41, or outputs sound from the speakers 19a and 19b. In addition, the staging control device 3
00 receives the command during the setting confirmation, and notifies that the setting is being confirmed by the frame decoration device 18, the board decoration device 46, and the board effect device 44. After this, the control unit proceeds to step S37.

On the other hand, when the control unit determines in step S48 that the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is not on, the control unit executes step S51. In step S51, the control unit refers to the second register (C register) and determines whether or not the detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 is on. The control unit proceeds to step S52 when the detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 is on, and proceeds to step S58 when the detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 is not on. That is, the gaming machine 10 proceeds to execute the process related to RAM initialization (RAM clear) by the activation detection accompanied by the pressing operation of the RAM initialization switch 112, and R
The process proceeds to the execution of the process related to the power failure recovery by the activation detection without pressing the AM initialization switch 112.

Next, the process related to RAM initialization performed in step S52 and subsequent steps will be described. R
In the process related to AM initialization, the control unit clears the RAM area other than the set value to 0 (zero clear) (step S52), and saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (step S52).
Step S53). For example, the control unit sets the RAM clear start address 2 as the start address at the time of RAM clear, and clears the target area (game control work) in the storage area (area not including the access prohibited area) of the RWM (for example, RAM111C). Clear the data in the area) to zero.

Since the setting change mode flag and the setting confirmation mode flag are included in the data in the clear target area, they are cleared by zero clearing the data in the clear target area.

In step S54, the control unit transmits a command at the time of RAM initialization to the effect control device 300. As a result, the effect control device 300 performs effect control corresponding to the command at the time of RAM initialization. For example, the effect control device 300 receives a command at the time of RAM initialization, displays a message informing that the RAM has been initialized on the display device 41, or outputs sound from the speakers 19a and 19b. Further, the staging control device 300 receives the command for initializing the RAM, and indicates that the RAM has been initialized by the frame decoration device 18 or the board decoration device 4.
6. Notify by the board effect device 44.

Further, when the control unit detects that the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is off after executing the process related to the setting change end waiting or the setting confirmation end waiting (step S38 to step S40), the control unit performs step S55. Run. After disabling interrupts (step S55), the control unit transmits a command to end the notification to the effect control device 300 (step S).
56).

As a result, the effect control device 300 ends the notification that the setting is being changed, which is started by receiving the command during the setting change, or the notification that the setting is being confirmed, which is started by receiving the command being confirmed. ..

Next, the control unit refers to the setting change mode flag and determines whether or not the setting change mode is in progress (step S57). When the control unit is in the setting change mode, step S5
Proceed to step 2 to execute the process related to RAM initialization. On the other hand, when the setting change mode is not in progress, the control unit proceeds to step S58 and executes a process related to power failure recovery.

In step S58, the control unit executes a power failure recovery process. The power failure recovery process saves the initial value at the time of power failure recovery in the area to be initialized, determines whether or not the special figure game is in high probability by referring to the special figure status, and the special figure game is in high probability. In the case of, the process of saving the on-information in the high-probability notification flag area and saving the on-data of the high-probability notification LED in the segment area is included.

The area to be initialized in the power failure recovery process is a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, a setting change mode flag, a setting confirmation mode flag, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. In the power failure recovery process, the busy signal status area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept the command, is also cleared, and the state of the payout busy signal is confirmed. It is considered to be an indefinite state indicating that it has not been done. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area that stores the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and the state of the touch switch signal is set to an indefinite state indicating that the state has not been determined.

Next, the control unit transmits a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the special figure game processing number to the staging control board (staging control device 300) (step S59), and proceeds to step S60. In step S59, the model designation command, the special figure 1 hold number command, the special figure 2 hold number command,
Send multiple commands such as probability information command, probability setting value information command, and screen specification command. Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, information on the number of times of production and information on the number of times of high probability are transmitted. The screen-specified command is that the control states of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are both normally being processed (during fluctuation, during jackpot (first special game state)).
If it is in a small hit (a state that is neither of the second special game states), it is a command to instruct the display of the customer waiting demo screen, and in other cases, it is a command to display the recovery screen. It is a command to do.

In step S60, the control unit performs a process of starting and setting the random number generation circuit. After that, the values of the predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of turning on the power are extracted, and the corresponding initial value random numbers (big hit symbol initial value random number, small hit symbol initial value random number, hit initial) are extracted. After saving in a predetermined area of the RWM as the initial value (start value) of the value random number and the winning symbol initial value random number (step S61), the interrupt is permitted (step S62).

Subsequently, the control unit performs an initial value random number update process (step S63) for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers. This initial value random number update process is a process of updating (incrementing) each initial value random number by, for example, "+1". In this way, the gaming machine 10 makes it possible to increase the randomness of the random numbers by continuously updating the initial value random numbers as long as time permits in the main process.

Here, the control unit temporarily disables interrupts (step S64), executes the performance display editing process (step S65), and permits interrupts after executing the performance display editing process (step S66). The performance display editing process is a process related to base calculation and display. Since the processing load of the performance display editing process is relatively high, the control unit prohibits interrupts to derive the processing result more quickly. As a result, the gaming machine 10 guarantees the derivation of the processing result of the performance display editing process by the time the gaming state is updated by the timer interrupt.

In step S67, the control unit determines whether or not a power failure has occurred. The control unit is
The occurrence of a power failure can be determined by continuously detecting the power failure monitoring signal for a predetermined time. The control unit proceeds to step S41 when a power failure occurs, and step S when a power failure does not occur.
Proceed to 63.

That is, the control unit repeatedly executes the processes from step S63 to step S67 unless a power failure occurs. Specifically, when a power failure has not occurred, the control unit repeatedly performs initial value random number update processing, performance display editing processing, and power failure monitoring signal check (loop processing).

Then, an interrupt is permitted before the initial value random number update process (step S63) (step S).
66) As a result, if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process will be executed with priority, and the timer interrupt will be waited for by the initial value random number update process, which will put pressure on the interrupt process. Can be avoided.

Similarly, the interrupt is disabled before the performance display editing process (step S65) (step S6).
4) As a result, the performance display editing process is executed in preference to the timer interrupt.
It is possible to avoid pressure on the performance display editing process.

From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) that comprehensively controls the game, and the subordinate control means (payout control device 200, that performs various controls according to the instructions from the main control means).
In a gaming machine provided with an effect control device (300, etc.), the main control means waits for setting a predetermined standby time for delaying the start of the main control means and waiting for the start of the slave control means when the power is turned on. A means (game control device 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined standby time are provided.

Further, a power supply device 400 for supplying electric power to various devices is provided, the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) is provided. , It is determined that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) includes a RAM 111C capable of storing data and a RAM 111C.
An initialization operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112) that can be operated from the outside, and an initialization means (game control device 100) that initializes the data stored in the RAM 111C based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. And, the operation state of the initialization operation unit is read before the start of the waiting time.

The game control device 100 has a function (second initialization process) of distinguishing between the initialization process (first initialization process) at the time of data abnormality and the initialization process (second initialization process) at the time of initialization operation. (1) Initialization means, 2nd initialization means), so that the optimum and lean initialization processing according to the situation can be realized.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) includes a RAM 111C capable of storing data and a RAM 111C.
Setting operation unit that can be operated from the outside (setting value change switch 126, setting key switch 12)
7) and a setting changing means (game control device 100) for changing the setting value stored in the RAM 111C based on the operation of the setting operation unit are provided to enable the setting change and the setting display unit (setting display unit). The setting (set value) can be confirmed by providing the probability set value display device 136). Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is a RAM after the lapse of the standby time.
This means that access to 111C is permitted.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) prohibits access to the RAM (RAM111C) (step S47) and waits for the execution of all the processes to be stopped.
The loop after step S47) and the RAM error standby process (loop in steps S31 and S32) that waits for the execution of all processes to be stopped while permitting access to the RAM (RAM111C) (step S17). Make it feasible.

Here, the standby process when a power failure occurs and the standby process when a RAM is abnormal will be described. The power failure standby process is a loop process that is executed after the access to the RAM is prohibited in step S47 of the main process and waits for the execution of all the processes to be stopped. Further, since the standby process at the time of power failure is executed after the interrupt is prohibited in step S41 of the main process, an interrupt (timer interrupt) that is not an NMI interrupt is prohibited. The standby process when a power failure occurs is NMI.
About interrupts NMI interrupts can occur because interrupts cannot be disabled. However, since the standby process when a power failure occurs is a process executed when a power failure occurs, there is little risk that an NMI interrupt will occur during the execution of the process. Further, the standby process when a power failure occurs is a standby process that does not accompany abnormality notification. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can allocate the electric power up to the power cutoff to the power failure processing. The gaming machine 10 prohibits access to the RAM during the standby process when a power failure occurs, thereby reducing the risk that the stored contents of the RAM will change due to an unstable voltage.

The RAM error standby process is a loop process that is executed after the access to the RAM (RWM) is permitted in step S17 of the main process, and waits for the execution of all the processes to be stopped.
Further, since the RAM error standby process is executed after the interrupt is prohibited in step S1 of the main process, an interrupt that is not an NMI interrupt (timer interrupt) is prohibited. Note that the standby process when a power failure occurs is N because interrupts cannot be disabled for NMI interrupts.
MI interrupts can occur. Since the RAM error standby process is a process of waiting for the power to be cut off, the risk of an NMI interrupt occurring during the execution of the process is greater than that of the power failure standby process.
However, in the RAM error standby process, the return address can be stored in the RAM because access to the RAM is permitted even if an NMI interrupt occurs, and the risk of program runaway due to the occurrence of an NMI interrupt is small. Further, since the gaming machine 10 transmits the main abnormality error notification command to the effect control device 300 in step S30, the effect control device 300 performs the abnormality notification in parallel during the execution of the RAM abnormality standby process. Can be done. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can be expected to be restarted promptly.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt processing of the game control device 100 will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 1
1 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing according to the first embodiment. This timer interrupt process is performed in the above-mentioned main process from the time when the interrupt is enabled until the interrupt is disabled (step S38 to step S41, step S38 to step S55, step S66 to step S64, step S66). To step S41)
This is the interrupt processing that occurs in. The timer interrupt process is a process executed by the CPU 111A.

The timer interrupt process is started by inputting a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator to the CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and the timer interrupt process is started.

When the timer interrupt processing is started, first, register bank 1 is specified (step S7).
1). Switching to the register bank 1 is equivalent to performing a register save process of transferring the value held in a predetermined register (for example, the register used in the main process) to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, the D register) (step S72). In step S72, the same processing as in step S4 in the main processing is performed, but the register banks are different.

Next, input from various sensors and switches, input of signals, that is, input processing (step S73) for reading the state of each input port is performed. In step S74, the control unit refers to the setting change mode flag and the setting confirmation mode flag, and determines whether or not the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is in progress. The control unit proceeds to step S75 when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is in progress, executes the setting change / confirmation process, and ends the timer interrupt process. The setting change / confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG.
On the other hand, the control unit proceeds to step S76 when neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is in progress.

In step S76, the control unit executes an output process for controlling the drive of an actuator such as a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 38b, universal solenoid 37c) based on the output data set in various processes.

When the firing stop signal is output in step S5 in the main processing, the firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permitted state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, the signal is not processed. In addition, the launch permission signal is the game control device 1.
A first signal indicating the state of launch permission seen from 00, and a second signal (launch permission signal) indicating the state of launch permission seen from the payout control device 200 are also generated in the payout control device 200 and fired. It is output to the control device. That is, two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device.
If both are permitted to fire, the game ball is configured to be ready to fire.

Next, the control unit issues a command set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 20.
Issue command transmission process (step S77) to output to 0, random number update process 1 (step S7)
8), the random number update process 2 (step S79) is executed. Here, the random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number, which are the targets of the initial value random number update process. .. In addition, the random number update process 2 is
It is a process of updating the fluctuation pattern random number for determining the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display game of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2. In addition to the random number update process 1 or the random number update process 1, the random number update process 2 may stop the random number update during the setting change or change the update cycle.

Next, the control unit includes a start port 1 switch 36a, a start port 2 switch 37a, a gate switch 34a in the normal drawing, a winning port switch 35a, a large winning port switch 38a, and a specific area switch 38.
The winning opening switch / state monitoring process (step S80) for monitoring whether or not there is a normal signal input from e and monitoring for errors (whether or not the front frame or the glass frame is opened, etc.) is performed. In addition, a start port switch monitoring process (step S81) for monitoring the winning of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is performed. In the start port switch monitoring process, if the game ball is won in the start winning opening 36 forming the first starting winning opening or the normal variable winning device 37 forming the second starting winning opening, various random numbers (big hit random numbers, etc.) Is extracted, and the game result is determined in advance based on the prize at the stage before the start of the special figure variation display game. The game result is determined in advance.

Next, the control unit performs a special figure 1 game process (step S82) for processing the special figure 1 variable display game, a special figure 2 game process (step S83) for performing a process related to the special figure 2 variable display game, and a normal figure variation. General figure game processing (step S) that performs processing related to the display game
84) is executed.

Next, a segment LED (for example, a special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 of the batch display device 50) provided on the game machine 10 and displaying various information related to the display of the special figure variation display game and the game is LE.
Segment LED editing process (step S85) that drives D) to display the desired content.
), Magnet fraud monitoring process (step S86) that checks the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61 and determines whether there is an abnormality, and process that checks the detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 62 and determines whether there is an abnormality. Perform the radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S87). Then, an external information editing process (step S88) and a performance display device control process (step S89) for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer are performed, and the timer interrupt process is terminated.

Here, in the first embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting interrupt) and the process of restoring the register bank designation (that is, the process of designating register bank 0) are interrupts. It is automatically performed at the time of return (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Depending on the CPU used, there are also gaming machines that need to be instructed to execute a process of restoring the interrupt disabled state or a process of restoring the register bank designation.

[Main processing]
Next, the main process of the staging control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the main process in the staging control device of the first embodiment.

The main process is a process executed by the control unit (CPU311) of the staging control device 300 when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is started.
[Step D11] The control unit disables interrupts.

[Step D12] The control unit performs initial settings of the CPU 311.
[Step D13] The control unit performs the initial setting of VDP312.
[Step D14] The control unit permits interrupts.

[Step D15] The control unit permits the generation of display data. That is, the control unit is V
Allows the display circuit in the DP 312 (not shown) to access the VRAM (not shown) in the VDP 312 and generate display data.

[Step D16] The control unit sets a random number seed. This is a process of setting a pseudo-random number generation sequence using, for example, a sland function. Here, the control unit may use a fixed value such as 0 (zero) as an argument given to the sland function, or use a value created based on the ID value of the CPU or the like so as to be different for each gaming machine. You may.

[Step D17] The control unit is the RWM (for example, RAM 322) of the staging control device 300.
The initial value at the time of power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (for example, the effect flag area (the storage area used as various flags described later in the control process of the effect control device 300)).

[Step D18] The control unit clears the WDT (watchdog timer).
[Step D19] The control unit executes the effect button input process. The effect button input process is a process for editing when the effect buttons (selection button switch 25a and enter button switch 25b) are operated when they are enabled. Since the effect button does not turn on and off at high speed, the control unit may perform the process of detecting the input of the effect button in the effect button input process or in a short-cycle timer interrupt (not shown). good.

[Step D20] The control unit executes the hall / player setting mode process. Hall / player setting mode processing includes setting the changeable range of LED and display device 41 such as brightness and volume, and setting the changeable range.
This is a process for accepting operations such as changing the brightness and volume of the LED and the display device 41 by the player.

[Step D21] The control unit executes a random number update process. Random number update processing is, for example, r
This is a process of updating the pseudo-random number at least once in each control cycle of the main process using the and function. Since the random function generates a random number based on the specified generation sequence each time the recalculation is performed, the control unit can obtain the random number only by executing the random function. A counter that increments by "1", such as the main board (game control device 100), may be used as a random number.

[Step D22] The control unit executes a received command check process. The received command check process is a process of analyzing a command received from the game control device 100 in units of a predetermined number.

[Step D23] The control unit executes the effect display editing process. The staging display editing process is V
This is a process for setting various commands and their parameters for instructing the DP 312 of the drawing contents on the display device 41. For example, the control unit sets commands in a table shape in the effect display editing process.

[Step D24] The control unit executes the drawing command preparation end setting. The drawing command preparation end setting is a process for setting that all commands for the VDP 312 set in the effect display editing process have been prepared.

[Step D25] The control unit determines whether or not it is the frame switching timing, proceeds to step D26 if it is the frame switching timing, and waits for the frame switching timing if it is not the frame switching timing. Here, the frame switching timing is a V blank interrupt (
It is a timing that arrives at a time interval corresponding to a processing cycle (for example, 1/30 second ≈ 33.333 ms) created based on a cycle (for example, 1/60 second) of a V-sync interrupt. The V blank interrupt is generated every time the VDP 312 completes one scan of the entire screen for drawing. As described above, the generation cycle of this V blank interrupt is, for example, 1/60 second. In the case of this embodiment, when the same drawing is repeated twice and a V blank interrupt occurs twice, frame switching is performed, and the frame switching timing cycle is twice the cycle of the V blank interrupt (for example, 1/60 second). (For example, 1/30 second ≒ 33.33 ms
)become. However, the present invention is not limited to this mode, and the frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed. For example, frame switching (image update) may be performed at a cycle of 1/30 second or more, or less than 1/30 second. Frame switching may be performed at intervals.

By the frame switching timing determination processing, the subsequent processing (steps D26 to D30, and subsequent steps D18 to D24) is executed at this frame switching timing for each processing cycle. The time management that needs to be synchronized with the effect content is performed in this frame unit (that is, the processing cycle unit). When the processing cycle is 1/30 second, for example, 3 frames have 100 ms. This is the same as the main board (game control device) managing the time value in units of 4 ms of the timer interrupt cycle.

[Step D26] The control unit follows the command set in step D23 to VDP3.
Instruct 12 to draw the screen. For example, the control unit sequentially transmits commands set in a table shape and instructs VDP 312 to draw a screen.

[Step D27] The control unit executes the sound control process. The sound control process is a process related to volume control of the sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b).

[Step D28] The control unit executes the decoration control process. The decoration control process is a process for controlling various LEDs and the like such as the board decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18.
[Step D29] The control unit executes the movable body control process. The movable body control process is a process for controlling a movable body (for example, a board effect device 44) including various motors and SOLs (solenoids).

[Step D30] The control unit executes the launch information control process. The launch information control process sets launch-related information based on the launch status flag, and also produces a special map rotation state (the number of special map fluctuations per game for a predetermined amount of money (that is, a predetermined number of balls to be rented)). It is a process to perform mode correction of.

[Step D31] The control unit executes the information disclosure process. The information disclosure process is a process of disclosing performance information regarding game performance to a player.
The control unit returns to step D18 after executing step D31, and thereafter, step D1.
The processing of steps 8 to D31 is repeatedly executed. That is, steps D18 to D
The loop process (31) is repeatedly executed in the above process cycle after the effect control device 300 is started.
In some cases, it is called main loop processing).

The control unit executes the processes of steps D27 to D29 in the main loop process in order to match the effect of the screen, and signals and data (particularly various LEDs and motors) generated or set by these control processes are used. The process of actually outputting the drive control signal, etc. to the port is performed in a short-cycle timer interrupt (not shown). However, when an IC specialized for controlling various devices is used, there is a case where a signal or the like is not output by a timer interrupt only by instructing by serial communication or the like.

Next, the customer waiting effect performed by the gaming machine 10 in the customer waiting state (state in which the customer waiting demo screen is displayed) will be described with reference to FIG. When the hold storage (holding start memory) becomes "0" in the game state (the state in which the control state is normally being processed), the gaming machine 10 gradually fades out the volume of the effect of the immediately preceding variable display game. After the volume fade-out is completed (after a predetermined time has elapsed), the control state is shifted to the customer waiting state. The customer waiting state is a state in which the player waits for the start of the game, and the setting related to the game can be changed (the setting change can be accepted). As a setting related to the game, there are effects such as volume and brightness.

FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of an effect configuration of a customer waiting effect of a gaming machine according to the first embodiment. The effect configuration of the customer waiting effect shown in FIG. 13 shows the effect configuration for one cycle. The customer waiting effect of one cycle is composed of five sections from the first section (first period) to the fifth section (fifth period) set so as not to overlap. That is, after finishing the effect of the fifth section, the gaming machine 10 starts the next cycle (starts the effect of the first section again). In the following, the first cycle and the second cycle
Although it is described as assuming that the same production configuration is used after the cycle, it may be different. for example,
After the second cycle, the second to fifth sections may be produced.

The first section is a section for displaying (notifying) a symbol. In the display of the symbol, the priority of display (notification) (importance of notification) is set low. Therefore, in the first section where the symbol is displayed, the setting display (guidance display) that displays (guidance) the set value being set and the method of changing the set value is the default state (non-operation state, non-setting state, non-acceptance). It is configured to be displayed in the status) and the operation status (acceptance status of the setting change operation). A screen example of the setting display and the display screen for displaying the design will be described later with reference to FIG. 21.

The second section is a section for displaying the model name. The display of the model name is set with a high display priority. Therefore, in the second section where the model name is displayed, the setting display is hidden in the default state so that the visibility of the model name display can be ensured (the reduction of the notification effect can be suppressed), and the setting display is changed in the operation state (setting change). It is configured to display the setting display (when the operation (operation of the option setting unit 25) is performed). A screen example of the display screen for displaying the model name will be described later with reference to FIG. 22.

The third section is a section for displaying a customer waiting movie. As a movie waiting for customers, for example, there is a movie that explains a game. The display of the waiting movie is set to have a high display priority. Therefore, in the third section where the customer waiting movie is displayed, the setting display is hidden in the default state so that the visibility of the customer waiting movie display can be ensured, and the setting display is performed in the operation state (setting change operation acceptance state). Is configured to be displayed. A screen example of a display screen for displaying a customer waiting movie will be described later with reference to FIG. 23.

The fourth section is a section for displaying the manufacturer logo (company name). The display of the manufacturer logo is
The display priority is set high. Therefore, in the fourth section where the maker logo is displayed, the setting display is hidden in the default state and the setting display is displayed in the operating state so that the visibility of the maker logo display can be ensured. A screen example of the display screen for displaying the maker logo will be described later with reference to FIG. 24.

The fifth section is a section for displaying a warning. The alert is a display that alerts the player to a predetermined degree, and is expressed by a message, a pictogram, an animation, or the like. For example, the content of the alert includes prevention of getting stuck and prevention of forgetting to remove the prepaid card.
The display of the alert is set to have a high display priority. Therefore, in the fifth section where the alert is displayed, the setting display is hidden in the default state and the setting display is displayed in the operation state so that the visibility of the alert display can be ensured. A screen example of a display screen for displaying an alert will be described later with reference to FIG. 25.

The above is an example of the staging composition of the customer waiting staging. In this way, the gaming machine 10 hides the setting display by default when the display content has a high display priority, and displays the setting display by default only when the display content has a low display priority. ing. According to this, the gaming machine 10
Can ensure visibility of display contents with high display priority (can suppress reduction of notification effect)
..

Further, the gaming machine 10 configures a customer waiting effect for one cycle so that the section in which the setting display is displayed in the default state (the section in which the setting display is not displayed) is continuous within the cycle. According to this, the gaming machine 1
When 0 is set, it is possible to prevent the display from becoming complicated due to frequent switching between display and non-display of the setting display.

The above-mentioned staging configuration is an example and is not limited to this. For example, the display priority of each section may be set to be different from the above configuration example, a section for displaying display contents other than the above may be provided, or the order of each section may be changed and set. Alternatively, some sections may be excluded. The number of sections is not limited to "5" and may be "2" or more.

Here, a modified example of the effect configuration of the customer waiting effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15. FIG. 14
Is a diagram showing a modified example of the effect configuration of the customer waiting effect of the gaming machine in the first embodiment (No. 1).
Is. FIG. 15 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a modified example of the effect configuration of the customer waiting effect of the gaming machine in the first embodiment.

The effect configuration of the customer waiting effect shown in FIG. 14 (1) shows a modified example of the effect configuration for one cycle. 1
The customer waiting effect of the cycle is composed of four sections from the first section to the fourth section. That is, after finishing the effect of the fourth section, the gaming machine 10 starts the next cycle (starts the effect of the first section again).

The first section is a section for displaying a symbol. The display of the symbol is set to have a low display priority. Therefore, in the first section where the symbol is displayed, the setting display is configured to be displayed in the default state and the operation state.

The second section is a section for displaying a customer waiting movie. The display of the waiting movie is set to have a low display priority. Therefore, in the second section where the customer waiting movie is displayed, the setting display is configured to be displayed in the default state and the operation state.

The third section is a section for displaying the model name. The display of the model name is set with a high display priority. Therefore, in the third section where the model name is displayed, the setting display is hidden in the default state and the setting display is displayed in the operating state so that the visibility of the model name display can be ensured.

The fourth section is a section for displaying the maker logo. The display of the maker logo is set with a high display priority. Therefore, in the fourth section where the maker logo is displayed, the setting display is hidden in the default state and the setting display is displayed in the operating state so that the visibility of the maker logo display can be ensured.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 hides the setting display by default when the display content has a high display priority, and displays the setting display by default only when the display content has a low display priority. ing. According to this, the gaming machine 10 can secure the visibility of the display content having a high display priority.

Further, the gaming machine 10 configures a customer waiting effect for one cycle so that the section in which the setting display is displayed in the default state (the section in which the setting display is not displayed) is continuous within the cycle. According to this, the gaming machine 1
When 0 is set, it is possible to prevent the display from becoming complicated due to frequent switching between display and non-display of the setting display.

The effect configuration of the customer waiting effect shown in FIG. 14 (2) shows a modified example of the effect configuration for one cycle. 1
The customer waiting effect of the cycle is composed of five sections from the first section to the fifth section. That is, when the gaming machine 10 finishes the effect of the fifth section, the next cycle is started (the effect of the first section is started again).

The first section is a section for displaying a symbol. The display of the symbol is set to have a low display priority. Therefore, in the first section where the symbol is displayed, the setting display is configured to be displayed in the default state and the operation state.

The second section is a section where the maker logo is displayed. The display of the maker logo is set with a low display priority. Therefore, in the second section where the maker logo is displayed, the setting display is configured to be displayed in the default state and the operation state.

The third section is a section for displaying a customer waiting movie. The display of the waiting movie is set to have a low display priority. Therefore, in the third section where the customer waiting movie is displayed, the setting display is configured to be displayed in the default state.

The fourth section is a section for displaying the model name. The display of the model name is set with a high display priority. Therefore, in the fourth section where the model name is displayed, the setting display is hidden in the default state and the setting display is displayed in the operating state so that the visibility of the model name display can be ensured.

The fifth section is a section for displaying a warning. The display of the alert is set to have a high display priority. Therefore, in the fifth section where the alert is displayed, the setting display is hidden in the default state and the setting display is displayed in the operation state so that the visibility of the alert display can be ensured.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 hides the setting display by default when the display content has a high display priority, and displays the setting display by default only when the display content has a low display priority. ing. According to this, the gaming machine 10 can secure the visibility of the display content having a high display priority.

Further, the gaming machine 10 configures a customer waiting effect for one cycle so that the section in which the setting display is displayed in the default state (the section in which the setting display is not displayed) is continuous within the cycle. According to this, the gaming machine 1
When 0 is set, it is possible to prevent the display from becoming complicated due to frequent switching between display and non-display of the setting display.

The staging configuration of the customer waiting effect shown in FIG. 15 (1) is composed of four sections from the first section to the fourth section. That is, after finishing the effect of the fourth section, the gaming machine 10 starts the next cycle (starts the effect of the first section again).

The first section is a section for displaying a symbol. The display of the symbol is set to have a low display priority. Therefore, in the first section where the symbol is displayed, the setting display is configured to be displayed in the default state and the operation state.

The second section is a section for displaying the model name. The display of the model name is set with a high display priority. Therefore, in the second section where the model name is displayed, the setting display is hidden in the default state and the setting display is displayed in the operating state so that the visibility of the model name display can be ensured.

The third section is a section in which the maker logo is displayed. The display of the maker logo is set with a high display priority. Therefore, in the third section where the maker logo is displayed, the setting display is hidden in the default state and the setting display is displayed in the operation state so that the visibility of the maker logo display can be ensured.

The fourth section is a section for displaying a customer waiting movie. The display of the waiting movie is set to have a low display priority. Therefore, in the fourth section where the customer waiting movie is displayed, the setting display is configured to be displayed in the default state and the operation state.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 hides the setting display by default when the display content has a high display priority, and displays the setting display by default only when the display content has a low display priority. ing. According to this, the gaming machine 10 can secure the visibility of the display content having a high display priority.

Further, the gaming machine 10 is configured so that the section in which the setting display constituting the customer waiting effect is displayed in the default state (the section not displayed) is continuous when the customer waiting effect is repeatedly performed. According to this, the gaming machine 10 can prevent the display / non-display of the setting display from being frequently switched and the display from becoming complicated.

The staging configuration of the customer waiting effect shown in FIG. 15 (2) is composed of four sections from the first section to the fourth section. That is, after finishing the effect of the fourth section, the gaming machine 10 starts the next cycle (starts the effect of the first section again).

The first section is a section for displaying a symbol. The display of the symbol is set to have a low display priority. Therefore, in the first section where the symbol is displayed, the setting display is configured to be displayed in the default state and the operation state.

The second section is a section for displaying a customer waiting movie. The display of the waiting movie is set to have a low display priority. Therefore, in the second section where the customer waiting movie is displayed, the setting display is configured to be displayed in the default state and the operation state.

The third section is a section for displaying the model name. The display of the model name is set with a high display priority. Therefore, in the third section where the model name is displayed, the setting display is hidden in the default state and the setting display is displayed in the operating state so that the visibility of the model name display can be ensured.

The fourth section is a section for displaying the maker logo. The display of the manufacturer logo is set to have the highest display priority. Therefore, in the 4th section where the manufacturer logo is displayed,
The setting display is configured to be hidden in the default state and the operation state so that the visibility of the maker logo display can be ensured. Even in this section, the gaming machine 10 can accept setting changes in the operating state. For example, in this section, the gaming machine 10
Makes it possible to grasp the changed contents by notifying the changed contents by the setting change operation by the change sound (the sound for notifying the changed contents).

As described above, when the display priority of the gaming machine 10 is "high" and "highest", the setting display is hidden by default, and the display priority is "low". The setting display is displayed by default only in the case, and further, when the display priority is "highest", the setting display is hidden even in the operation state. According to this, the gaming machine 10 can secure the visibility of the display content having a high display priority.

Further, in the gaming machine 10, the setting display is displayed in the default state and the operating state (first section, the second section), the section displayed only in the operating state (third section), and in the default state and the operating state. One cycle of customer waiting effect is configured so that the sections that are not displayed (fourth section) are continuous within the cycle. According to this, the gaming machine 10 can prevent the display / non-display of the setting display from being frequently switched and the display from becoming complicated.

Next, switching of the display state of the setting display (switching between the default state and the operation state) when the setting change operation (setting change) is performed in the customer waiting state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a diagram illustrating an example of switching the display state of the setting display in the first embodiment.

FIG. 16 shows a display state when a setting change operation (operation of the option setting unit 25) is detected in the middle of the second section and the end of the setting change operation (operation of the option setting unit 25) is detected in the third section. An example of switching is shown.

When the gaming machine 10 detects a setting change operation in the middle of the second section, the gaming machine 10 switches the display state of the setting display from the default state (non-operation state) to the operation state. After that, the gaming machine 10 is the third
When the end of the setting change operation is detected in the section, the display state of the setting display is continued as the operation state until the end of the cycle in which the end of the setting change operation is detected (fifth section), and then the display state of the setting display is displayed from the next cycle. To return from the operation state to the default state (end the operation state).

The above is an example of switching the display state of the setting display when the setting change operation is performed by the player. In this way, even if the gaming machine 10 detects the end of the setting change operation in the middle of the cycle (for example, in the third section), the display state is set to the operation state until the end of the cycle, so that the setting display can be displayed. It is possible to prevent the display from becoming complicated due to frequent switching between display and non-display.

The gaming machine 10 may detect that the setting change operation is completed when the player accepts a predetermined operation using the option setting unit 25, or there is no operation for a predetermined time from the last operation. In this case, it may be detected that the setting change operation is completed. The gaming machine 10 is
From the next cycle, the display state of the setting display is returned from the operation state to the default state (the operation state is terminated), but this is not limited to this. For example, the gaming machine 10 may return the display state of the setting display from the operation state to the default state from the section (second section) that is hidden in the default state of the next cycle.

The switching between the default state and the non-operation state is an example and is not limited to this.
Here, a modified example of switching the display state of the setting display when the setting change operation is performed by the player will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 20.

FIG. 17 is a diagram (No. 1) for explaining a modified example of switching the display state of the setting display in the first embodiment. FIG. 18 is a diagram (No. 2) for explaining a modified example of switching the display state of the setting display in the first embodiment. FIG. 19 is a diagram (No. 3) for explaining a modified example of switching the display state of the setting display in the first embodiment. FIG. 20 is a diagram (No. 4) for explaining a modified example of switching the display state of the setting display in the first embodiment.

FIG. 17 shows a modified example of switching the display state when the setting change operation is detected in the middle of the second section and the end of the setting change operation is detected in the third section.
When the gaming machine 10 detects a setting change operation in the middle of the second section, the gaming machine 10 switches the display state of the setting display from the default state to the operation state. After that, when the gaming machine 10 detects the end of the setting change operation in the third section, the game machine 10 immediately returns the display state of the setting display from the operation state to the default state.

In this way, when the gaming machine 10 detects the end of the setting change operation in the middle of the cycle (for example, the third section), the display state of the setting display is returned to the default state at that time, thereby giving priority to the display. It is possible to prevent the visibility of high-degree display contents from deteriorating.

FIG. 18 shows a modified example of switching the display state when the setting change operation is detected in the middle of the second section and the end of the setting change operation is detected in the third section.
When the gaming machine 10 detects a setting change operation in the middle of the second section, the gaming machine 10 switches the display state of the setting display from the default state to the operation state. After that, when the gaming machine 10 detects the end of the setting change operation in the third section, after a predetermined grace period set in advance has passed (giving a grace period for resetting), the display state of the setting display is defaulted from the operation state. Return to the state. The grace period may span the current cycle and the next cycle. The grace period may be in time units (for example, 5 seconds) or in section units (for example, until the end of one section this time, or until the end of one section next time, etc.).

In this way, when the gaming machine 10 detects the end of the setting change operation in the middle of the cycle (for example, the third section), the display state of the setting display is returned to the default state after a certain grace period. It is possible to prevent the display from becoming complicated due to frequent switching between display and non-display of the setting display. Further, the gaming machine 10 can prevent the visibility of the high-priority display content from being lowered by returning the display state of the setting display to the default state without waiting until the end of the cycle.

FIG. 19 shows a modified example of switching the display state when the setting change operation is detected in the middle of the second section and the end of the setting change operation is detected in the third section.
When the gaming machine 10 detects a setting change operation in the middle of the second section, the gaming machine 10 switches the display state of the setting display from the default state to the operation state. After that, when the gaming machine 10 detects the end of the setting change operation in the third section, the display state of the setting display is changed from the section next to the third section (fourth section) in which the end of the setting change operation is detected. To return to the default state from.

In this way, when the gaming machine 10 detects the end of the setting change operation in the middle of the cycle (for example, the third section), the game machine 10 defaults the display state of the setting display in the next section where the end of the setting change operation is detected. By returning to the state, it is possible to suppress the switching of display / non-display of the setting display in the middle of the section and prevent the display from becoming complicated. Further, the gaming machine 10 can prevent the visibility of the high-priority display content from being lowered by returning the display state of the setting display to the default state without waiting until the end of the cycle.

FIG. 20 shows a modified example of switching the display state when the setting change operation is detected in the middle of the second section and the end of the setting change operation is detected in the third section.
When the gaming machine 10 detects a setting change operation in the middle of the second section, the gaming machine 10 switches the display state of the setting display from the default state to the operation state. After that, when the gaming machine 10 detects the end of the setting change operation in the third section, after a predetermined grace period set in advance, the gaming machine 10 passes the next section (fourth section) of the section (fourth section) at the end of the grace period. (5 sections) returns the display state of the setting display from the operation state to the default state.

In this way, when the gaming machine 10 detects the end of the setting change operation in the middle of the cycle (for example, the third section), the display state of the setting display is returned to the default state after a certain grace period. It is possible to prevent the display from becoming complicated due to frequent switching between display and non-display of the setting display. Further, the gaming machine 10 returns the display state of the setting display to the display state corresponding to the default state in the next section after the grace period ends, so that the setting display can be displayed in the middle of the section.
It is possible to suppress the occurrence of hidden switching and prevent the display from becoming complicated. Further, the gaming machine 10 can prevent the visibility of the display content having a high display priority from being lowered by returning the display state of the setting display to the default state without waiting until the end of the cycle.

The gaming machine 10 changes the method of returning to the default state depending on whether the section (time point) at which the end of operation is detected is a section in which the setting display is displayed or hidden in the default state. May be good.

For example, when the section in which the operation end is detected is the first section (when the section in which the operation end is detected is the section in which the setting display is displayed in the default state), the gaming machine 10 immediately displays the setting display. Set when the state is returned to the default state and the section where the end of operation is detected is other than the first section (when the section where the end of operation is detected is the section where the setting display is hidden in the default state). The display state of the display may be returned to the default state at the end of the cycle.

Next, a screen example of each effect constituting the customer waiting effect will be described. First, a screen example of a display screen for displaying a symbol will be described with reference to FIG. 21. FIG. 21 is a diagram (No. 1) showing an example of the display screen of the display device according to the first embodiment.

The display screen 500 shown in FIG. 21 (1) is an example of a screen in which a symbol is displayed as a display content and the setting display is hidden.
The display screen 500 includes two sets of decorative symbols, a special figure 1 hold number display 503, a special figure 2 hold number display 504, a hold display 505, and a hold digestion display 506.

The two sets of decorative symbols include a large symbol group 501 as the first decorative symbol and a small symbol group 502 as the second decorative symbol. The large symbol group 501 is in charge of game production for the purpose of improving the interest. Therefore, the large symbol group 501 is displayed large in the substantially central portion of the display device 41. Large symbol group 501
Includes the left symbol 501L, the middle symbol 501C, and the right symbol 501R. The left symbol 501L, the middle symbol 501C, and the right symbol 501R of the display screen 500 are all stopped, indicating that the corresponding special symbol variation display game is in the symbol stopped state. Left symbol 501 on display screen 500
The symbol combination of L, the middle symbol 501C, and the right symbol 501R is the result of the previous variable display game. The symbol combination of the left symbol 501L, the middle symbol 501C, and the right symbol 501R may be replaced with a predetermined symbol combination.

In general, the large symbol group 501 starts to fluctuate in the order of the left symbol 501L, the right symbol 501R, and the middle symbol 501C, and stops (including temporary stop) in the order of the left symbol 501L, the right symbol 501R, and the middle symbol 501C. Therefore, in many cases, the large symbol group 501 forms a reach mode with the left symbol 501L and the right symbol 501R, and waits for the middle symbol 501C to stop to form a jackpot mode.

Symbols that make up the large symbol group 501 (left symbol 501L, middle symbol 501C, and right symbol 501R)
Is mainly due to the decorative design with high design.
The small symbol group 502 is in charge of notifying the variable display state for the purpose of improving the ease of grasping the game state of the player. Therefore, the small symbol group 502 is displayed small on the peripheral edge of the display device 41 so as to ensure visibility without interfering with the display effect of the large symbol group 501. The small symbol group 502 is
Includes left symbol, middle symbol and right symbol. The left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol in the small symbol group 502 of the display screen 500 are all stopped, indicating that the corresponding special symbol variation display game is in the symbol stopped state.

In general, the large symbol group 501 is displayed larger than the small symbol group 502, the degree of freedom of the display position is high, and the display mode can be greatly changed. On the contrary, the small symbol group 502 is
It is displayed smaller than the large symbol group 501, and the degree of freedom in the display position is low (for example, the position is fixed).

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can secure the visibility of the small symbol group 502 while ensuring the variety of display effects for the large symbol group 501, and facilitate the grasp of the gaming state of the player.

The special figure 1 hold number display 503 displays the hold storage number (starting memory number) of the special figure 1 game. For example, the hold memory of the special figure 1 game is generated by winning a prize in the starting winning opening 36. The special figure 2 hold number display 504 displays the hold storage number of the special figure 2 game. For example, the hold memory of the special figure 2 game is generated by winning a prize in the ordinary variable winning device 37.

Depending on the display mode, the hold display 505 can clearly indicate the number of hold storages (the number of hold start memories) of the special figure variation display game, and can notify the degree of expectation for the game result for each hold storage. The hold storage number displayed by the hold display 505 is either the hold storage number displayed by the special figure 1 hold number display 503, the hold storage number displayed by the special figure 2 hold number display 504, or the hold storage number displayed by the special figure 2 hold number display 504, depending on the game state. It corresponds to the total number of both.

The number of hold storages displayed by the hold display 505 is a value from "0" to "8", and the number of hold storages exceeding this value is excluded from the display target. In the gaming machine 10, even if the hold display 505 excludes a part or all of the hold memory from the display target, the special figure 1 hold number display 503 and the special figure 2 hold number display 504
It is possible to guarantee the accurate display of the number of pending storages.

The hold digestion display 506 can indicate that the special figure variable display game is in the variable display state and notify the degree of expectation for the game result depending on the display mode. That is, the gaming machine 10 can perform the hold notice effect by using the hold display 505 and the hold digestion display 506. The hold notice effect is an aspect of the look-ahead effect performed by using the hold display 505 and the hold digestion display 506.

Since the display screen 500 is in a customer waiting state (Special Figure 1 indicated by the special figure 1 hold number display 503).
Since the reserved memory number of the game is "0" and the reserved memory number of the special figure 2 game indicated by the special figure 2 reserved number display 504 is "0"), the reserved memory number indicated by the reserved display 505 is "0". ". Further, since the display screen 500 is in the customer waiting state, the hold digestion display 506 indicates that the special figure variation display game is stopped.

Further, the gaming machine 10 can have different modes of variation during the variation display for the large symbol group 501 and the small symbol group 502. For example, the gaming machine 10 can easily distinguish between the large symbol group 501 and the small symbol group 502 when the large symbol group 501 is vertically scrolled. Further, even if the game machine 10 may update the symbols asynchronously between the large symbol group 501 and the small symbol group 502, it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort given to the player.

The display screen 510 shown in FIG. 21 (2) is an example of a screen in which a symbol is displayed as a display content and a setting display is displayed.
The display screen 510 further includes a setting display 511 in the display content in addition to the display content displayed by the display screen 500. The setting display 511 displays the set value being set and the method of changing the set value. On the display screen 510, the setting display 511 is displayed on the front side of a symbol (large symbol group 501) or the like (display content of the display screen 500). Therefore, on the display screen 510, the visibility of the design or the like may be lower than when the setting display 511 is not displayed (display screen 500).

The setting display 511 includes a brightness setting guidance display 512 and 513, a brightness operation guidance display 514, and the like.
The volume setting guidance display 515 and 516 and the volume operation guidance display 517 are included.
The brightness setting guidance display 512 indicates that the brightness being set is level 4 by means of a lamp-shaped icon and a numerical value. The brightness setting guide display 513 indicates that the brightness being set is level 4 by the display mode (for example, color or brightness) of eight bar displays.

The brightness operation guide display 514 guides the brightness setting change operation by the option setting unit 25. The brightness operation guidance display 514 is a button switch located above and below the option setting unit 25 by differentiating the display mode of the button switches 25a located above and below from the display mode (for example, color and brightness) of the other button switches 25a. It guides that 25a is a brightness operation button.

The volume setting guidance display 515 informs that the volume being set is level 4 by a speaker-shaped icon and a numerical value. The volume setting guidance display 516 indicates that the volume being set is level 4 by the display mode (for example, color or brightness) of eight bar displays.

The volume operation guide display 517 guides the volume setting change operation by the option setting unit 25. The volume operation guidance display 517 is a button switch located on the left and right of the option setting unit 25 by different from the display mode of the button switches 25a located on the left and right and the display mode (for example, color and brightness) of the other button switches 25a. It informs that 25a is a volume control button.

The setting display 511 may be transparent or semi-transparent so that the back side can be visually recognized. Further, the gaming machine 10 does not provide the setting display 511 (without clearly indicating the area by the setting display 511), the brightness setting guide display 512, 513, the brightness operation guide display 514, and the volume setting guide display 515, 516. And the volume operation guidance display 517 may be displayed respectively.

Next, a screen example of a display screen for displaying the model name will be described with reference to FIG. 22. FIG. 22 is a diagram (No. 2) showing an example of the display screen of the display device according to the first embodiment.
The display screen 520 shown in FIG. 22 (1) is an example of a screen in which the model name is displayed as the display content and the setting display is hidden.

The display screen 520 includes the model name display 521 as the display content. The model name display 521 displays the model name. On the display screen 520, the model name display 521 displays "CR tiger tiger tiger".
The display screen 522 shown in FIG. 22 (2) is an example of a screen in which the model name is displayed as the display content and the setting display is displayed.

The display screen 522 includes the model name display 521 and the setting display 511 as display contents. Display screen 5
In 22, the setting display 511 is displayed on the front side of the model name display 521. Therefore, on the display screen 522, the visibility of the model name display 521 may be lower than that when the setting display 511 is not displayed (display screen 520).

Next, a screen example of a display screen for displaying a customer waiting movie will be described with reference to FIG. 23.
FIG. 23 is a diagram (No. 3) showing an example of the display screen of the display device according to the first embodiment.

The display screen 523 shown in FIG. 23 (1) is a screen example in which the customer waiting movie is displayed as the display content and the setting display is hidden.
The display screen 523 includes the customer waiting movie display 524 as the display content. The customer waiting movie display 524 displays the customer waiting movie. On the display screen 523, the customer waiting movie display 524 displays a movie (video) in which three rockets fly.

The display screen 525 shown in FIG. 23 (2) is an example of a screen in which a customer waiting movie is displayed as display content and a setting display is displayed.
The display screen 525 includes a customer waiting movie display 524 and a setting display 511 as display contents. On the display screen 525, the setting display 511 is displayed on the front side of the customer waiting movie display 524. Therefore, on the display screen 525, the visibility of the customer waiting movie display 524 may be lower than that when the setting display 511 is not displayed (display screen 523).

Next, a screen example of a display screen displaying the maker logo will be described with reference to FIG. 24. FIG. 24 is a diagram (No. 4) showing an example of the display screen of the display device according to the first embodiment.
The display screen 526 shown in FIG. 24 (1) is an example of a screen in which the maker logo is displayed as the display content and the setting display is hidden.

The display screen 526 includes the maker logo display 527 as the display content. Manufacturer logo display 52
7 displays the maker logo. On the display screen 526, the maker logo display 527 has the company name "tiger tiger tiger" and a tiger-like character (for example, a company mascot character).
Display the manufacturer logo (company logo) consisting of.

The display screen 528 shown in FIG. 24 (2) is an example of a screen in which the maker logo is displayed as the display content and the setting display is displayed.
The display screen 528 includes the maker logo display 527 and the setting display 511 as display contents. On the display screen 528, the setting display 511 is displayed on the front side of the maker logo display 527. Therefore, on the display screen 528, the visibility of the maker logo display 527 may be lower than that when the setting display 511 is not displayed (display screen 526).

Next, a screen example of the display screen for displaying the alert will be described with reference to FIG. 25. FIG. 25
Is a figure (No. 5) showing an example of the display screen of the display device according to the first embodiment.
The display screen 529 shown in FIG. 25 (1) displays a warning as a display content and also displays a warning.
This is an example of a screen in which the setting display is displayed.

The display screen 529 includes a warning display 530 in the display content. The alert display 530 is "
A tiger-like character and a warning character "Let's be careful about getting into it" are displayed.

The display screen 531 shown in FIG. 25 (2) displays a warning as a display content and also displays a warning.
This is an example of a screen in which the setting display is displayed.
The display screen 531 includes a warning display 530 and a setting display 511 as display contents. On the display screen 531 the setting display 511 is displayed on the front side of the caution display 530. Therefore, on the display screen 531 the visibility of the alert display 530 may be lower than that when the setting display 511 is not displayed (display screen 529).

It should be noted that the warning display (character portion) and the setting display 511 are not limited to be displayed so as to overlap each other. For example, the gaming machine 10 may display the setting display 511 so as not to overlap with the caution display (character portion). Alternatively, the gaming machine 10 may display a warning display (character portion) at a position that does not overlap with the setting display 511.

By the way, when the set value being set is an extreme value, it may take a lot of time and effort to set it to a value suitable for playing a game. In addition, a player who has started a game with the game machine 10 without knowing it may be dissatisfied with the setting.

Therefore, the gaming machine 10 periodically initializes the setting value being set (returns to the preset default value), so that the standard setting value is set for the player who newly operates the gaming machine 10. The game machine 10 is provided. Here, the flow of initialization of the set values (volume, brightness) is shown in FIG. 26.
Will be described using. FIG. 26 is a timing chart showing the flow of initialization of the settings of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment.

In the gaming machine 10, the brightness is set to "6" and the volume is set to "4" in the Nth cycle of the customer waiting state. When the gaming machine 10 ends the Nth cycle at the timing t1 and starts the N + 1th cycle,
The brightness is changed from "6" to the default value "3", and the volume is changed from "4" to the default value "3".
To change to.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 initializes the set value at the break of the cycle, so that the set value can be suppressed from changing in the middle of the production, and the feeling of strangeness can be reduced. The gaming machine 10 is not limited to the initialization at the break of the cycle, and may be initialized at the break of the section. Even in this case, the gaming machine 10 can prevent the set value from changing during the production, and can reduce the sense of discomfort.

The gaming machine 10 may be initialized every one cycle, or may be initialized every predetermined cycle (for example, three cycles). For example, it is possible to prevent the set value from being initialized when the player straddles the cycle during the operation of changing the setting by the player by performing the setting every predetermined cycle.

Further, the gaming machine 10 may be initialized when the customer waiting state has elapsed for one cycle or more with a set value other than the default value. This also makes it possible to prevent the set value from being initialized when the cycle is straddled during the operation of changing the setting by the player.

The above is the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment. The gaming machine 10 may be able to set a set value even during a game in addition to a customer waiting state. In this case, the gaming machine 10 hides the setting display in the default state (the state in which the setting change operation is not accepted) and the operation state (the state in which the setting change operation is not accepted).
The setting display may be displayed in the reception state of the setting change operation), the setting display may be displayed in the default state and the operation state, or the setting display may be hidden in the default state and the operation state.

Further, the gaming machine 10 may change the display / non-display method of the setting display depending on whether the variable display is in progress or the symbol is stopped. For example, the gaming machine 10 hides the setting display in the default state during the variable display, displays the setting display in the operating state, and displays the setting display in the default state and the operating state while the symbol is stopped.

Further, the gaming machine 10 has a dedicated setting sound (for example, "for example," when the volume setting value is changed.
The volume of the set value may be notified by a beep), or the volume of the set value may be notified by the BGM of the effect.

[Modification 1 of the first embodiment]
Next, a modification 1 of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 27. FIG. 27 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the display device according to the first modification of the first embodiment.

The display screen 532 shown in FIG. 27 (1) is a screen example in which the maker logo is displayed as the display content in the default display state of the setting display and the setting display is displayed.

The display screen 532 includes a maker logo display 527 and a setting display 511 as display contents.
On the display screen 532, the setting display 511 moves appropriately in the display screen. In this way, the gaming machine 1
In 0, the setting display 511 is appropriately moved so that the player can grasp the entire contents of the maker logo display 527 located on the back side of the setting display 511, so that deterioration of the visibility of the displayed contents can be suppressed.

The display screen 533 shown in FIG. 27 (2) is a screen example in which the maker logo is displayed as the display content in the display state of the setting display and the setting display is displayed. The display screen 533 shows a screen when the display state of the setting display is switched to the operation state in the state of the display screen 532.

The display screen 533 includes the maker logo display 527 and the setting display 511 as display contents.
On the display screen 533, the setting display 511 that has been appropriately moved on the display screen 532 is stopped. The stop position of the setting display 511 on the display screen 532 is, for example, the position of the setting display 511 at the timing of shifting from the default state to the operation state (timing when the setting change operation is detected). In this way, the gaming machine 10 can suppress the deterioration of the visibility of the setting display 511 during the setting by stopping the setting display 511 that has been appropriately moved in the operating state.

[Modification 2 of the first embodiment]
Next, the second modification of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 28. FIG. 28 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the display device according to the second modification of the first embodiment.

The display screen 534 shown in FIG. 28 (1) is an example of a screen in which the maker logo is displayed as the display content in the default display state of the setting display and the setting display is displayed. The display screen 534 includes the maker logo display 527 and the setting display 511 as display contents.

When the gaming machine 10 detects a volume setting change operation on the display screen 534, the game machine 10 displays the display screen 535.
Is displayed, and when the brightness setting change operation is detected, the display screen 536 is displayed.
The display screen 535 shown in FIG. 28 (2) is a screen example of a state in which a volume setting change operation is detected (volume operation state). The display screen 535 has a maker logo display 527 and a setting display 511a.
And are included in the displayed contents.

The setting display 511a includes a volume setting guidance display 515 and 516 and a volume operation guidance display 517. That is, the setting display 511a includes the brightness setting guidance display 512, 513, the brightness operation guidance display 514, and the volume setting guidance display 515, 516, which were displayed by the setting display 511.
Of the volume operation guidance display 517, only the display content related to the volume is displayed.

By displaying only the display content corresponding to the content of the setting change operation detected in this way on the setting display 511a, the gaming machine 10 can reduce the overlapped portion with the maker logo display 527. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can suppress the deterioration of the visibility of the maker logo display 527.

When the gaming machine 10 detects the brightness setting change operation on the display screen 535, the game machine 10 displays the display screen 536.
Is displayed, and when the end of the setting change operation is detected, the display screen 534 is displayed.
The display screen 536 shown in FIG. 28 (3) is a screen example of a state in which a brightness setting change operation is detected (brightness operation state). The display screen 536 has a maker logo display 527 and a setting display 511b.
And are included in the displayed contents.

The setting display 511b includes a brightness setting guide display 512, 513 and a brightness operation guide display 514. That is, the setting display 511b includes the brightness setting guidance display 512, 513, the brightness operation guidance display 514, and the volume setting guidance display 515, 516, which were displayed by the setting display 511.
Of the volume operation guidance display 517, only the display content related to the brightness is included.

By displaying only the display according to the content of the setting change operation detected in this way on the setting display 511b, the gaming machine 10 can reduce the overlapped portion with the maker logo display 527. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can suppress the deterioration of the visibility of the maker logo display 527.

When the gaming machine 10 detects a volume setting change operation on the display screen 536, the game machine 10 displays the display screen 535.
Is displayed, and when the end of the setting change operation is detected, the display screen 534 is displayed.
Although the explanation was given using an example in which the setting display is displayed in the default state, similarly, in the case where the setting display is in the default state and the setting display is hidden, the gaming machine 10 includes the content of the detected setting change operation. Only the corresponding display can be displayed.

[Modification 3 of the first embodiment]
Next, a modification 3 of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 29. FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the display device according to the third modification of the first embodiment.

The display screen 537 shown in FIG. 29 (1) is an example of a screen in which the model name is displayed as the display content in the default display state of the setting display and the setting display is hidden. The display screen 537 includes the model name display 521 as the display content. When the gaming machine 10 detects a setting change operation on the display screen 537, the game machine 10 displays the display screen 538.

The display screen 538 shown in FIG. 29 (2) is an example of a screen in which a setting change operation is detected on the display screen 537. The display screen 538 is a screen during transition from the default state to the operation state, and the set value is not changed on the screen.

The display screen 538 includes the model name display 521 and the setting display 511c as display contents. The setting display 511c is displayed on the back side of the model name display 521. In addition, the setting display 511c
Is displayed semi-transparently. Therefore, on the display screen 538, the model name display 521
The portion overlapping with the setting display 511c of is not completely blocked by the setting display 511c.

When the game machine 10 detects the setting change operation on the display screen 538, the display screen 539 is displayed, and when the end of the setting change operation is detected, the display screen 537 is displayed.
The display screen 539 shown in FIG. 29 (3) is an example of a screen in which a setting change operation is detected on the display screen 538. The display screen 539 is a screen in which the set value can be changed, and includes the model name display 521 and the setting display 511 as display contents. When the gaming machine 10 detects the end of the setting change operation, the game machine 10 displays the display screen 537.

In this way, the semi-transparent setting display 511c is displayed when the setting change operation is detected once, and then again.
By displaying the setting display 511 when the setting change operation is detected, the gaming machine 10 can prevent the visibility of the display content (model name) from being lowered due to an erroneous operation.

The gaming machine 10 displays the setting display 511c when the setting change operation is detected for the first time, and displays (settings) according to the content of the detected setting change operation when the setting change operation is detected for the second time. The display 511a and the setting display 511b) may be displayed.

The gaming machine 10 (including a modified example) of the first embodiment described above has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes a display means (display device 41) and a control means (game control device 100,
It is equipped with a staging control device 300). The control means is a customer waiting effect display in the customer waiting state, and
The display means is displayed with the setting change operation display (setting display 511) in the acceptance state of the setting change operation related to the game. The customer waiting effect display is a first period for displaying the first information (first section in FIG. 13) and a second period for displaying the second information (second section to fifth section in FIG. 13). And include. When the control means is in the customer waiting state and is not in the setting change operation acceptance state (when it is in the default state), the setting change operation display is displayed on the display means in the first period, and the setting change operation is performed in the second period. Do not display the display on the display means.

(2) The second information in (1) is information having a higher display priority than the first information.
(3) In the customer waiting state of (2), the customer waiting effect display is periodically performed.
(4) When the control means of (3) is in the reception state in the customer waiting effect display of the first cycle, the control means continues the reception state until the second cycle following the first cycle (FIG. 16). ..

(5) The control means of (4) causes the display means to display the setting display even in the second period in the reception state.
(6) The game-related setting change operation of (5) includes a volume and brightness setting change operation, and the control means displays only the volume setting change operation display when the setting change operation related to the volume setting is being accepted. When the setting change operation related to the brightness setting is being accepted, only the setting change operation display related to the brightness is displayed on the display means (FIG. 27).

(7) The gaming machine 10 includes a display means (display device 41) and a control means (game control device 100,
It is equipped with a staging control device 300). The control means is a customer waiting effect display in the customer waiting state, and
The display means is displayed with the setting change operation display (setting display 511) in the acceptance state of the setting change operation related to the game. The customer waiting effect display includes a first period (for example, the first section in FIG. 14 and the first section in FIG. 15) for displaying the first information of the first attribute (information having a low priority) and the first. The second period for displaying the second information of the attribute of (for example, the second section of FIG. 14 and the fourth section of FIG. 15) and the third information of the second attribute (high priority information). A third period to display (eg, a third section in FIG. 14, a second section in FIG. 15) and a fourth period to display the fourth information of the second attribute (eg, the fourth section in FIG. 14). , The third section of FIG. 15). When the customer waiting effect display is repeatedly displayed, the control means causes the display means to continuously display the first period and the second period, and continuously displays the third period and the fourth period on the display means. When the customer is waiting and the setting change operation is not accepted (default state), the setting change operation display is displayed during the period (first period, second period) for displaying the information of the first attribute. Is displayed on the display means, and the setting change operation display is not displayed on the display means during the period (third period, fourth period) in which the information of the second attribute is displayed.

(8) The gaming machine 10 includes a display means (display device 41) and a control means (game control device 100,
It is equipped with a staging control device 300). The control means are a customer waiting effect display that is repeatedly performed in the customer waiting state, and a setting change operation display in the reception state of the setting change operation related to the game (
The setting display 511) is displayed on the display means. The customer waiting effect display is a first period for displaying the first information (first section in FIG. 13) and a second period for displaying the second information (second section to fifth section in FIG. 13). And include. When the control means is in the customer waiting state and is not in the setting change operation acceptance state (when it is in the default state), the setting change operation display is displayed on the display means in the first period, and the setting change operation is performed in the second period. The display is not displayed on the display means, and when the setting change operation is started, the reception status of the setting change operation is started, and when the setting change operation is completed, the customer wait at the end of the setting change operation is executed next to the customer waiting effect display. When the effect display starts, the acceptance status of the setting change operation ends (returns to the default status).

(9) The gaming machine 10 includes a display means (display device 41) and a control means (game control device 100,
It is equipped with a staging control device 300). The control means are a customer waiting effect display that is repeatedly performed in the customer waiting state, and a setting change operation display in the reception state of the setting change operation related to the game (
The setting display 511) is displayed on the display means. The customer waiting effect display is a first period for displaying the first information (first section in FIG. 13) and a second period for displaying the second information (second section to fifth section in FIG. 13). And include. When the control means is in the customer waiting state and is not in the reception state of the setting change operation (when it is the default state), the setting change operation display is displayed on the display means in the first period, and the setting change operation is performed in the second period. The display is not displayed on the display means, and when the setting change operation is started, the reception status of the setting change operation is started, and when the setting change operation is completed, the customer wait at the end of the setting change operation is executed next to the customer waiting effect display. At the start of the second period in the effect display, the acceptance state of the setting change operation is terminated (returning to the default state).

(10) The gaming machine 10 includes a display means (display device 41) and a control means (game control device 100).
, The staging control device 300). The control means causes the display means to display a customer waiting effect display in the customer waiting state and a setting change operation display (setting display 511) in the reception state of the setting change operation related to the game. The customer waiting effect display is the first period for displaying the first information and the second.
Includes a second period for displaying information about. When the control means is in the customer waiting state and is in the setting change acceptance state, the setting change operation display is displayed on the display means in the first period, and the setting change operation display is displayed on the display means in the second period. Instead, when the setting change operation is accepted in the second period in which the customer is waiting and the setting change operation is accepted, the change content due to the setting change operation is notified by the change sound.

The above processing function can be realized by a computer. In that case, a program describing the processing contents of the functions that the gaming machine of the embodiment should have is provided. By executing the program on a computer, the above processing function is realized on the computer. The program describing the processing content can be recorded on a computer-readable recording medium. Computer-readable recording media include magnetic storage devices,
There are optical disks, optical magnetic recording media, semiconductor memories, and the like. The magnetic storage device includes a hard disk device (HDD), a flexible disk (FD), a magnetic tape, and the like. Optical discs include DVD (Digital Versatile Disk), DVD-RAM, and CD (Compact Disk) -RO.
There are M / RW (ReWritable) and the like. MO (Magneto-Optical disk) is used as the magneto-optical recording medium.
And so on.

When distributing a program, for example, a DVD or C on which the program is recorded.
Portable recording media such as D-ROMs are sold. It is also possible to store the program in the storage device of the server computer and transfer the program from the server computer to another computer via the network.

The computer that executes the program stores, for example, the program recorded on the portable recording medium or the program transferred from the server computer in its own storage device. Then, the computer reads the program from its own storage device and executes the processing according to the program. The computer can also read the program directly from the portable recording medium and execute the processing according to the program. Further, the computer can sequentially execute the processing according to the received program each time the program is transferred from the server computer connected via the network.

Further, at least a part of the above processing functions is performed by DSP (Digital Signal Processor), A.
SIC (Application Specific Integrated Circuit), PLD (Programmable Logic De)
It can also be realized by an electronic circuit such as vice).

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the disclosed embodiment as a gaming machine, and is not limited to, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, and the like. It is applicable to all gaming machines that use the game balls of the above, and slot machines that are gaming machines that use medals.

It should also be considered that the disclosed embodiments are exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. Further, each configuration of the above-described embodiment and modification may be applied in combination. The scope of the invention is indicated by the claims rather than the description above.
It is intended to include all changes within the meaning and scope of the claims.

Next, the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described.
It should be noted that the gaming machine 10 having a form different from that of the first embodiment will be described again with reference numerals for parts having the same configuration as that of the first embodiment.
Hereinafter, embodiments will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
[Second Embodiment]
First, the second embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 30 is a perspective view showing an example of the gaming machine of the second embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is an outer frame (support frame).
It is assembled to 11 so that it can be opened and closed. The game board 30 (see FIG. 31) is housed in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, a glass frame (transparent member holding frame) 15 provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 that covers the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

In addition, lamps, LEDs, etc. are built into the left and right sides of the glass frame 15 for decoration and production, and notification when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a payout abnormality occurs, the lamp, LED, etc. are displayed as an abnormality notification color (for example). Frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (blinking) in red) and sound (blinking)
For example, a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits a sound effect) is provided. moreover,
A speaker (lower speaker) 19b is also provided in the lower part of the front frame 12. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the contents of the abnormality are notified by voice from the speakers 19a and 19b. note that,
A lamp for notifying the payout abnormality may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

Further, in the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper plate (storage plate) 21 for supplying a game ball to a hitting ball launching device (not shown) and a game ball paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the game machine 10 are provided. An outlet 22 for the upper plate to be discharged, a lower plate (receiver) 23 for storing the game balls discharged when the upper plate 21 is full, an operation unit 24 of the hitting ball launching device, and the like are provided. Furthermore, the upper plate 2
An option setting unit (push button) 25 for setting various options by the player is provided on the upper edge portion of 1. A plurality of selection button switches 25a are provided around the upper surface of the option setting unit 25, and a determination button switch 25b is provided in the center of the upper surface of the option setting unit 25. The option setting unit 25 functions as an effect setting unit in which the player sets the effect mode. In this case, the selection button switch 25a functions as an effect button switch for selecting the effect mode, and the decision button switch 25b functions as a decision button switch for determining the effect mode. Further, on the lower right side of the front frame 12, the front frame 1
A keyhole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the 2 or the glass frame 15 is provided.

When the selection button switch 25a functions as an effect button switch, the gaming machine 1
0 can perform an effect in which the player's operation is intervened based on the player's operation received from the selection button switch 25a and the decision button switch 25b. for example,
The effect of intervening the operation of the player includes an effect in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) in the display device (variable display device) 41 (see FIG. 31), and the game machine 10 is displayed on the display device 41. It is possible to operate the character to be displayed and to stop the identification information in the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41.

Further, on the right side of the option setting unit 25, there is a ball lending button 27 that is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and an operation for ejecting a prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. A discharge button 28, a balance display unit (not shown) that displays the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided. In the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, when the player rotates the operation unit 24, the hitting ball launching device transfers the gaming ball supplied from the upper plate 21 to the gaming area 32 on the front surface of the gaming board 30. Fire towards (see Figure 31). Further, by operating the selection button switch 25a and the decision button switch 25b, the player can, for example, set the volume radiated from the speakers 19a and 19b and set the brightness of the game board 30. ..

Next, the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. 31. FIG. 31 is a front view showing an example of the game board of the second embodiment.
On the surface of the game board 30, a substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is formed. The game area 32 is a resin side case 3 provided at each of the four corners of the game board 30.
It is surrounded by 3 and a guide rail 31. In the game area 32, a center case (game effect component) 40 provided with a display device (variable display device) 41 is arranged substantially in the center. The display device 41 is attached to a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position deeper than the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 is formed so as to surround the periphery of the display area of the display device 41, project forward from the display surface of the display device 41, and make it difficult for the game ball to jump from the surrounding game area 32.

The display device 41 is composed of, for example, a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) and a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube). In the area (display area) where the image on the display screen can be displayed, information related to the game such as a plurality of identification information (special symbol), a character that directs the special figure variation display game, and a background image that enhances the effect of the effect is displayed. .. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variablely displayed (variable display), and a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game is performed. In addition, on the display screen, an image for directing based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, etc.)
Fanfare display image, ending display image, etc.) are displayed.

Further, the upper part of the center case 40 is provided with a board staging device 44 that plays a game by operating. The board effect device 44 can be operated from the state shown in FIG. 31 toward the center of the display device 41.

On the right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a normal symbol start gate (normal map start gate) 34 that gives a start condition for the normal map variation display game is provided. The game ball that has won the prize in the normal figure start gate 34 (the game ball that passes through the normal figure start gate 34) is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 32).

Further, on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, there are two general winning openings 3
5 is arranged, and one general winning opening 35 is arranged on the lower right side of the center case 40 and on the right side of the special variable winning device 38 described later. The game ball that has won a prize in these general winning openings 35 is detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 32).

Further, below the center case 40 in the game area 32, there is a start winning opening 36 forming a first starting winning opening (starting winning area) that gives a start condition for the first special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game). (Starting port 1) is provided. The game ball that has won the start winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 32).

Further, below the starting winning opening 36, an out opening 30a for collecting game balls that did not win in the winning opening or the like is provided.
In addition, it is located below the starting gate 34 in the normal drawing, and on the right side of the center case 40,
A normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting winning area) that gives a start condition for the second special figure variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) is provided. The normal variable winning device 37 (starting port 2) is provided with a movable member 37b that can be opened and converted into a state in which a game ball can easily flow in by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side tilts to the right. 37b is always in a closed closed state (a state disadvantageous to the player) in which the game ball cannot flow in because it is almost vertical.
Then, when the result of the normal figure fluctuation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, the normal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 32) as a driving device rotates so that the upper end side tilts to the right and normally fluctuates. The winning device 37 can be changed to an open state (a state advantageous for the player) in which the game ball easily flows into the winning device 37. The game ball that has won the ordinary variable winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 32). It should be noted that the normally variable winning device 37 may be able to win a prize even in the closed state, and may be more difficult to win in the closed state than in the open state. The ordinary variable winning device 37 corresponds to an ordinary electric accessory (Public electric).

A flow path 91 through which a game ball can flow down is formed on the right side of the normal variable winning device 37, and a game ball that has not won a prize in the normal variable winning device 37 flows downward through the flow path 91. A guide portion 93 is provided below the flow path 91. The guiding portion 93 has an inclined surface whose upper surface 94 descends to the left, and the upper surface 94 catches the game ball flowing downward and guides the game ball to the left where the special variable winning device 38 described later is present. ..

Further, in the lower right of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a special variable winning device (large winning opening) 38 that can be converted into a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which the game ball is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game is arranged. It is set up. The special variable winning device 38 has an opening / closing member (opening / closing door) 3
It has 8c, and the opening / closing member 3 depends on the result of the special figure fluctuation display game as an auxiliary game.
From the closed state in which the 8c closes the large winning opening (a closed state that is disadvantageous to the player), the opening / closing member 38c retracts to an open state that can accept the game ball flowing down the game area 32 (a state that is advantageous to the player). Convert. That is, the special variable winning device 38 includes a large winning opening that is opened and closed by an opening / closing member 38c driven by a large winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 32) as a driving device. Big hit game state according to the result of the display game (
During the first special game state) or during the small hit game state (second special game state) as a result of the special figure 2 variable display game, the big prize opening is converted from the closed state to the open state to win the big prize. It facilitates the inflow of game balls into the mouth and gives the player a predetermined game value (prize ball). Inside the large winning opening (winning area), a large winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 32) is provided as a detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the large winning opening. ..

Further, the special variable winning device 38 includes a guiding flow path for guiding the winning game ball in the winning opening, and a V flow path formed by branching from the guiding flow path. The special variable winning device 38 is provided with a V door at a position that becomes an inflow portion of the V flow path. The V door is a specific area solenoid 38d (see FIG. 32).
It can be changed to a blocking state in which the game ball slides in the front-rear direction to prevent the inflow of the game ball into the V flow path, and a permissible state in which the game ball is retracted backward to allow the inflow of the game ball into the V flow path. It has become. Further, the special variable winning device 38 is provided with a specific area switch 38e (see FIG. 32) for detecting a game ball flowing into the V flow path.

In the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, the probability state after the end of the special gaming state is not determined by the jackpot symbol, but the gaming ball flows into the V flow path in the special gaming state and the specific area switch. Based on the fact that it is detected by 38e, it is set to be in a high probability state. however,
The gaming machine 10 may be configured to be capable of generating a high probability state after the end of the special gaming state based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game.

Further, the special variable winning device 38 may be provided with a plurality (for example, two) of large winning opening switches 38a. Further, the special variable winning device 38 is not limited to one, and may be provided by two, and when there are a plurality of large winning openings, the large winning opening switch 38a is about one or two for each. , X pieces (see FIG. 32) may be provided as a whole.

Further, a warp opening (warp entrance) 39a is provided on the left side portion of the center case 40. The game ball that has flowed into the warp flow path from the warp port 39a rolls on the stage in the center case 40, and a part of the game ball is guided to the warp outlet 39b. The warp exit 39b is located directly above the starting winning opening 36, and the game ball guided to the warp exit 39b is the starting winning opening 36.
It will be easier to win a prize.

In the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, of the gaming areas 32 in which the gaming balls flow down, the left area of the center case 40 is the left gaming area, and the right area of the center case 40 is the right gaming area. It is said that. Then, the player adjusts the firing force and launches the game ball to the left game area (so-called left-handed) to start the starting winning opening 36 and the general winning opening 35 (general winning opening on the right side of the special variable winning device 38). You can aim to win a prize (excluding 35), and by launching a game ball to the right game area (so-called right-handed), the normal figure start gate 34 and the normal variable winning device 37,
It is possible to aim for a prize in a special variable prize device 38 or the like.

Further, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, the lower right of the game board 30), the first special figure fluctuation display game, the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the normal figure start gate 34, which form the special figure fluctuation display game, are reached. A batch display device 50 that displays various information and displays a game with a variable display of a normal map triggered by a prize.
Is provided.

The batch display device 50 includes a round display unit 51 composed of LEDs and the like, a special figure 1 hold display unit 52, a special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, a special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, and a normal symbol display unit. It includes 55, a normal drawing hold display unit 56, and a status display unit 57 (see FIG. 34). Details of the batch display device 50 will be described later.

Next, the control system of the gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. 32. FIG. 32 is a block diagram showing an example of the control system of the gaming machine of the second embodiment.
The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100, and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that collectively controls a game, and is a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. CPU (Central Processing Unit) unit 110 having an input port, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, and the like, and a CPU.
It is composed of a data bus 140 or the like that connects the unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130.

The CPU unit 110 includes a gaming microcomputer 111 called an amusement chip (IC (Integrated Circuit)) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and serves as a reference for an operating clock, a timer interrupt, and a random number generation circuit of the gaming microcomputer 111. Oscillator circuit that generates the clock
It has a crystal oscillator) 113 and the like. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 are DCs (Di) generated by the power supply device 400.
rect Current) 32V, DC12V, DC5V, etc. are supplied with a predetermined level of DC voltage to enable operation.

The power supply device 400 generates an AC (DC 32V) DC voltage from a 24V AC power supply (AC).
Alternating Current) -DC 12V, DC 5V from DC converter or DC 32V voltage
Ordinary power supply unit 4 having a DC-DC converter or the like that generates a lower level DC voltage such as
It has a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies power supply voltage to the internal RAM (Random Access Memory) of the game microcomputer 111 in the event of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and causes and recovers the power failure in the game control device 100. It is provided with a control signal generation unit 430 and the like that generate and output control signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal to be notified.

In the second embodiment, the power supply unit 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are on a separate board or integrated with the game control device 100, that is, , May be configured to be provided on the main board. Game board 30
And the game control device 100 is to be replaced when the model is changed. Therefore, as in the second embodiment, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are mounted on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board. By providing the above, it is possible to reduce the cost by excluding it from the target of replacement.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 (
In particular, the data supplied to the built-in RAM) and stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or power failure. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it drops to 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. This R
When the AM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, a process for forcibly initializing the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200. Is done. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is the game microcomputer 1.
It is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by 11. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a setting value change switch 126 and a setting key switch 127. The set value change switch 126 is, for example, a push switch and detects a pressing operation. The setting key switch 127 inserts a setting key to enable switching between an ON state and an OFF state. The game control device 100 can change the settings related to the game performance, and the settings stored in the RAM are retained even during a power failure or after the power is cut off. For example, the game control device 100 makes it possible to change the hit probabilities of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game according to the setting of 6 stages.

The game control device 100 transitions to a setting change mode in which the setting of the game machine 10 can be changed by turning on the power while the setting key switch 127 is ON and the RAM initialization switch 112 is ON. For example, the game control device 100 makes it possible to cyclically change from setting 1 to setting 6 by detecting the pressing operation of the setting value change switch 126 while displaying the setting contents on the probability setting value display device 136 in the setting change mode. The probability set value display device 136 is a display device capable of displaying the set value, and is, for example, a one-digit 7-segment LE.
It is D and is mounted on the substrate.

Further, the game control device 100 transitions to the setting confirmation mode in which the setting confirmation of the gaming machine 10 can be performed by turning on the power while the setting key switch 127 is ON and the RAM initialization switch 112 is OFF. .. For example, the game control device 100 displays the setting contents on the probability setting value display device 136 in the setting confirmation mode.

The game microcomputer 111 is a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A.
, Read-only ROM (Read Only Memory) 111B and RA that can be read and written at any time
It is equipped with M111C.

The ROM 111B non-volatilely stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control, and the RAM 111C is a work area of the CPU 111A or a storage area of various signals and random numbers during game control. It is used as. ROM111B or R
As AM111C, an electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable ROM) may be used.

Further, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect content, the presence / absence of the occurrence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a variation pattern random number 1, a variation pattern random number 2, and a variation pattern random number 3 stored as a start memory in the CPU 111A.
Is a table for determining the fluctuation pattern with reference to. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a missed fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is missed, a jackpot fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Further, these pattern tables include tables for determining the latter half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.).
, A table for determining the first half fluctuation pattern, which is a fluctuation pattern before reaching the reach state (first half fluctuation group table, first half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes an advantageous gaming state (special gaming state) for the player when the special result mode is adopted, a part of the plurality of display results has not yet been derived and displayed. Derived A display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the conditions for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is out of the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses to the stage before the display result is derived and displayed. Refers to a display mode that does not exist. Further, for example, a state in which variation display is performed by a plurality of variation display areas (so-called full rotation reach) while maintaining a state in which special result modes are aligned is also included in the reach state. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It refers to a display state when at least a part of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition of the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas of the display device. When the variable display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle after display and the result mode is displayed, the left and right variable display areas satisfy the conditions for the special result mode (for example). The state in which the variable display is stopped due to the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the fluctuation display of all the fluctuation display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition of the special result mode in any two of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display regions is satisfied (for example, the same). The state in which the identification information is used, except for the special result mode) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variable-displayed from this reach state.

The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and as reach effects in which the possibility of deriving a special result mode is different (expected value is different), normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), and so on. Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), Special 3
Reach (SP3 reach) and premier reach are set. The expected value increases in the order of "no reach"<"normalreach"<"special 1 reach"<"special 2 reach"<"special 3 reach"<"premierreach". Further, this reach state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived (when it becomes a big hit) in the special figure variable display game. That is, it may be included in the variable display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived (when it is out of order) in the special figure variable display game. Therefore, the state in which the reach state occurs is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, or generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to be a game machine. 10 Control the entire system. Further, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a jackpot random number for determining a hit in a special figure variation display game, a jackpot symbol random number for determining a jackpot symbol, and a variation pattern in a special figure variation display game (various types). Random number generation circuit for generating variation pattern random numbers for determining (including the execution time of the variation display game in reach and variation display without reach), hit random numbers for determining the hit of the normal figure variation display game, etc. And the oscillation signal from the oscillation circuit 113 (original clock signal)
Based on this, it is provided with a clock generator that generates a clock that gives a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 ms (ms)) to the CPU 111A and an update timing of a random number generation circuit.

Further, the CPU 111A is the ROM 111B in the process related to the special figure variation display game.
Acquire any one of the fluctuation pattern tables stored in. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result (hit (big hit or small hit) or miss) of the special figure fluctuation display game and the probability state (normal probability state or high probability) of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current game state. A variable pattern table is selected from a plurality of variable pattern tables based on the state), the operating state (time saving operating state) of the normal variable winning device 37 as the current gaming state, the number of start memories, and the like. To get. Here, CP
The U111A serves as a variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when the special figure variation display game is executed.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, ROM, RAM, input interface, output interface, and the like, and is a payout motor of a payout unit provided in the game machine 10 in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100. Is driven, and control is performed to pay out the prize ball. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball lending request signal from the card unit of the ball lending machine attached to the gaming machine 10.
Control to pay out the loan.

The input unit 120 of the game microcomputer 111 has a start port 1 switch 36 in the start winning port 36.
a, Starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, gate switch 34a in the normal starting gate 34, winning opening switch 35a, large winning opening switch 38 in the special variable winning device 38
a. It is connected to the specific area switch 38e of the special variable winning device 38, and a negative logic signal such as high level 11V and low level 7V supplied from these switches is input and 0.
An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 that converts a V-5V positive logic signal is provided. The detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62 that detects the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine 10 is also input to the proximity I / F 121. Further, the proximity I / F 121 has an input range of 7V-11.
By setting it to V, it is possible to detect an abnormal condition such as the lead wire of a sensor or proximity switch being improperly shorted, the sensor or switch being disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire being cut off and floating. It is configured to output an abnormality detection signal.

Explaining the winning opening switch 35a, although the winning opening switch 35a is shown by one block in FIG. 32, a plurality of (n) winning opening switches 35a (three in the present embodiment) are actually used. Is provided on the game board 30, and each signal is input to the proximity I / F 121 with different signal lines. Further, in FIG. 32, the large winning opening switch 38a is shown by one block, but in reality, a plurality of (x) large winning opening switches 38a (three in the present embodiment) are provided on the game board 30. Has been done. And these multiple big prize opening switches 38a
Are connected by different signal lines, or are wired OR on a relay board (not shown) that exists between the switch and the game control device 100 (main board), for example.
It is connected to the game control device 100 by the above method. The panel radio wave sensor 62 and the magnetic sensor 61 described later may also be connected by a plurality of different signal lines, or may be similarly connected to the game control device 100 by a method called wired or.

The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Proximity I / F
Of the outputs of 121, the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, the large winning port switch 38a, and the specific area switch 3
The detection signal of 8e is input to the second input port 123. It should be noted that the signal outputs of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a, which are the starting port switches of FIG. 1, are output (proximity I / F12).
The output from 1) is shown by one signal line in FIG. 32, but there are actually two.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124. Further, the third input port 124 has a detection signal of a magnetic sensor 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the game machine 10, and a glass frame open detection switch provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10. 63 detection signal, detection signal of main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 of the game machine 10, detection signal of setting value change switch 126, detection signal of setting key switch 127, payout control A touch switch signal (a signal based on the input of the touch switch provided on the operation unit 24) from the device 200 is input.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the game control device 100 to the test firing test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123.

As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12V in addition to the voltage such as 5V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It has become.

For the data held by the second input port 123, the gaming microcomputer 111 asserts the chip enable signal CE (Chip Enable) (effective level), which is not shown, by decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123. It can be read by changing to). The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, the input unit 120 has a detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 and a payout control device 20.
Frame radio wave invalid signal from 0 (signal output based on the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 detecting radio waves), payout busy signal (whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept commands) (Signal indicating abnormal payout), status signal indicating abnormal payout (status signal indicating abnormal payout)
, Shoot ball out switch signal (signal indicating shortage of game balls before payout), overflow switch signal (game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 in a predetermined amount or more (they are full))
1st input port 122 that takes in the out-ball detection switch signal (the signal that is output when the out-ball is detected) and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Is provided.

The out ball detection switch signal is a signal output from the out sensor each time the out sensor (not shown) detects one out ball of the gaming machine 10. For example, the out ball detection switch signal is provided in the discharge flow path (not shown) between the discharge port (not shown) for discharging the game ball (out ball) from the game machine 10 and the out port 30a. The out-ball detection switch signal is a gaming performance (eg, 60,000 out-balls) per predetermined operation (eg, 60,000 out-balls).
It is used for the calculation of the base), and the calculated game performance is displayed on the performance display device 135. The out-ball detection switch signal may be input to the effect control device 300.
In that case, the out-ball detection switch signal may be used for determining the operating state, which is a trigger for switching to the game effect or the customer waiting screen display. For example, the performance display device 135 is a 4-digit 7-segment LED, and can display the gaming performance in decimal or hexadecimal.

Further, the gaming machine 10 may be provided with a vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration so that the detection signal of the vibration sensor switch is input to the first input port 122 or the third input port 124.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the game microcomputer 111 and the like, and the Schmidt buffer 125 is provided with these inputs. It has a function to remove noise from the signal. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 that receive signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET whose noise has been removed by the Schmidt buffer 125 is
It is directly input to the reset terminal provided on the game microcomputer 111 and supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RESET is output directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test firing test device. It is configured to do. again,
The reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RESET is not supplied to the first to third input ports 122, 123, 124 of the input unit 120. The data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset in order to prevent the system from malfunctioning, but the input unit 120 is set immediately before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from each port is discarded by resetting the gaming microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged in a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. The serial communication from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 is a one-way communication in which a signal cannot be input to the game control device 100 from the effect control device 300 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140, and data for notifying the special symbol information of the variable display game to the test firing test device of the accreditation body (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the jackpot, and the like are transmitted via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass production product) installed in a game store. The detection signal of a switch such as a start port switch that does not need to be processed, which is output from the proximity I / F 121, is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, a detection signal that cannot be supplied to the test firing test device as it is, such as the magnetic sensor 61 and the panel radio wave sensor 62, is once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, the gaming machine plays a game. It is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test firing test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 as an error signal indicating that the state cannot be controlled.
The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not go through the buffer, and the like. ing. The port on the relay board 70 has a game microcomputer 11
The chip enable signal CE (not shown) output from 1 is also supplied, and the signal of the port selectively controlled by the chip enable signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with opening / closing data of the large winning opening solenoid 38b connected to the data bus 140 and opening / closing the opening / closing member 38c of the special variable winning device 38 (large winning opening), and the V door of the special variable winning device 38. A first output port 134a for outputting the opening / closing data of the specific area solenoid 38d to be opened / closed, the opening / closing data of the normal electric solenoid 37c for opening / closing the movable member 37b of the normal variation winning device 37, and the display data of the performance display device 135 is provided. Has been done.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a second output port 134b for outputting the display data of the probability setting value display device 136. Further, the output unit 130 has a third output port 134c for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the batch display device 50, and the batch display device 50. 4th output port 1 for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED of
34d is provided.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with information about the gaming machine 10, such as jackpot information, from the external information terminal board 71.
A fifth output port 134e for outputting to is provided. The external information terminal board 71 has
It is equipped with a photo relay and can be connected to, for example, an external device (information collection terminal, game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.) installed in a game store, and information about the game machine 10 is transmitted to the external device via the photo relay. Can be supplied to. A part of the information supplied to the external device is output from the fourth output port 134d. Further, a firing permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 134e to the payout control device 200 via the Schmidt buffer 132.

Further, the output unit 130 is a first driver that generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal by receiving open / close data signals of the large winning port solenoid 38b, the specific area solenoid 38d, and the peripheral electric solenoid 37c output from the first output port 134a. (Drive circuit) 138a, batch output from the second driver 138b and fourth output port 134d that output the on / off drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the batch display device 50 output from the third output port 134c. External information signals supplied to external devices such as management devices from the third driver 138c, the fifth output port 134e, and the fourth output port 134d that output the on / off drive signal of the digit line on the current draw side of the display device 50 are external. A fourth driver 138d that outputs to the information terminal plate 71 and a fifth driver 138e that receives the display data signal of the performance display device 135 output from the first output port 134a and generates and outputs a drive signal of the performance display device 135 are provided. Has been done.

To the first driver 138a, DC 32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. Further, DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment line of the batch display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit wire is for pulling out the digit wire corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A dynamic drive system in which a current is passed through the anode terminal of the LED via the segment wire by the second driver 138b that outputs 12V, and a current is drawn from the cathode terminal via the segment wire by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in, and the LEDs are turned on. The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71, supplies the external information signal with a level of 12V, so that DC12V is supplied. The buffer 133, the first output port 134a, the first driver 138a, etc. are
It may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board. Further, the performance display device 135, or the fifth driver 138e and the performance display device 135 may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the external board (not shown) side instead of the main board. ..

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to an external inspection device 490. Photocoupler 139
Is configured to be capable of bilateral communication so that the game microcomputer 111 can send and receive data to and from the inspection device 490 by serial communication. The transmission and reception of such data is
Since it is performed by using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the first to third input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Next, the configuration of the staging control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 33. FIG. 33 is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of the staging control device according to the second embodiment.
The staging control device 300 is an amusement chip (IC) similar to the gaming microcomputer 111.
), A main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 and a sound source LSI 314 that controls sound output in order to reproduce various melody and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

The main control microcomputer 311 is a P that stores programs executed by the CPU and various data.
A PROM 321 consisting of a ROM (programmable read-only memory), a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and a FeRAM that can hold stored contents even when power is not supplied in the event of a power failure (FeRAM).
Ferroelectric RAM) 323 and RTC (real-time clock) 338, which is a timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day of the week, time, etc.), are connected. A RAM 311a that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. Further, a WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands (effect commands) from the game microcomputer 111, determines the effect content, controls the input / output of the display device 41, and controls the input / output of the display device 41.
It executes processes such as instructing the 314 to play a sound, turning on a decorative lamp, controlling the drive of a motor or solenoid, and managing the effect time.

An audio ROM 327 in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 314.
The main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are connected via the address / data bus 340. Further, the interrupt signal I is transmitted from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311.
NT is to be input. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and is generated by the sound source LSI 314. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 100. An effect control command signal (effect command) such as a decorative special figure hold number command, a decorative special figure command, a variation command, a stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 via this command I / F331. ). Game microcomputer 111 of game control device 100
Operates at DC 5V, and the main control microcomputer 311 of the staging control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V. Therefore, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes a reel motor control circuit 312 that drives and controls a reel motor (stepping motor) included in the display device 41, and a reel sensor control circuit 313 that drives and controls a reel sensor (photo sensor) included in the display device 41. , A reel LED control circuit 325 for driving and controlling various LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided in the display device 41 is provided. These control circuits 312, 313, 325 that drive and control the reel motor, reel sensor, various LEDs, etc. are the main control microcomputer 3 via the address / data bus 340.
It is connected to 11.

Further, the staging control device 300 is a board decoration LE that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40).
D control circuit 332, frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the glass frame 15, game board 30 (center case 40). A board effect movable body control circuit 334 for driving and controlling a board effect device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41) is provided. These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340. Even if the glass frame 15 is provided with a frame effect device provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for effect), and is provided with a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device. good.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes a selection button switch 25a and a decision button switch 25b of the option setting unit 25 provided on the glass frame 15, and an effect switch that detects the initial position of the motor in the board effect device 44. A function of detecting the on / off state of 47 (effect motor switch) and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and the effect control device 300.
A switch input circuit 336 having a function of detecting the state of the volume control switch 335 and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 is the staging control device 300 having the above configuration.
DC32V for driving a motor or solenoid, DC12V for driving a motor or LED, command I / F331 to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the motor or electronic components controlled by the display device 41. In addition to the DC 5V that is the power supply voltage of the above, it is configured to generate a DC 15V voltage for driving a motor, an LED, and a speaker.
Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, the DC- is used to generate DC3.3V or DC1.2V based on DC5V. A DC converter is provided in the staging control device 300. DC-D
The C converter may be usually provided in the power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in the reset state. Further, the sound source LSI 314 and the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESE) are output from the main control microcomputer 311.
It is supplied to the control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) that drive and control the T signal), the lamp, the motor, and the like, and these are reset. Further, the effect control device 300 includes the gaming machine 1.
A cooling FAN 45 for cooling each part of 0 is connected, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven in a state where the power of the staging control device 300 is turned on. Further, the circuit board constituting the staging control device 300 corresponds to a sub control board (also referred to as a sub board).

Next, the game control performed in these control circuits will be described.
In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, the normal start gate 3 is used.
Based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in 4, the random value for hit determination of the normal figure is extracted and compared with the judgment value stored in the ROM 111B, and the normal figure fluctuation display game is performed. Performs the process of determining the hit or miss. Then, a process is performed in which the identification symbol (identification information) is variablely displayed for a predetermined time on the normal symbol display unit 55 of the batch display device 50, and then the normal symbol variation display game to be stopped and displayed is displayed. When the result of this normal figure fluctuation display game is a hit, a special result mode corresponding to each of the first hit stop symbol to the third hit stop symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display unit 55, and the normal electric solenoid 37c is displayed. Is operated, and the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37 is controlled to be opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds) as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). If the result of the normal map variation display game is out of sync, the normal map symbol display unit 55 is controlled to display the result mode of the out of alignment.

Further, the start winning prize (starting memory) is memorized based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning opening 36, and based on this starting memory, the first special figure variation display game The random value for big hit determination is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and the process of determining the hit / miss of the first special figure variation display game is performed. Further, the starting memory is memorized based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variable winning device 37, and based on this starting memory, for the jackpot determination of the second special figure variation display game. The random value is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and the process of determining the hit / miss of the second special figure variation display game is performed.

Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command, effect command) including the determination results of the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game to the effect control device 300. do. Then, after displaying the identification symbol (identification information) on the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 and the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 of the batch display device 50 for a predetermined time, a process of displaying a special symbol variation display game to be stopped and displayed. To do. That is, the game control device 100 is a start winning area (starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37) of a game ball flowing down the game area 32.
It serves as a game control means for controlling the progress of a variable display game based on a prize.

Further, the effect control device 300 performs a process of displaying the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game on the display device 41 based on the control signal from the game control device 100. Further, the effect control device 300 performs processing such as setting the effect state, outputting sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, and controlling light emission of various LEDs based on the control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as an effect control means for controlling the effect related to the game (variable display game, etc.).

Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit or a small hit, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 displays a special result mode or a small hit result mode on the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 or the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54. Is displayed, and a process of generating a special game state or a small hit game state (that is, a process of executing a special game or a small hit game) is performed. In the process of generating a special gaming state due to the result of the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game being a big hit, the CPU 111A is, for example, a special variation winning device 38 by a large winning opening solenoid 38b. The opening / closing member 38c of the game is opened, and control is performed to allow the game ball to flow into the large winning opening. In this special gaming state, the CPU 111A is subject to either a condition that a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls wins in the large winning opening, or a predetermined opening time elapses from the opening of the large winning opening. One round is to open the big winning opening until it is achieved, and this is continued (repeated) a predetermined number of rounds, and control (cycle game) is performed. In addition, a small hit game state is generated due to the result of the first special figure variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) or the second special figure variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) being a small hit. In the process, the CPU 111A controls, for example, to open the opening / closing member 38c of the special variable winning device 38 by the large winning opening solenoid 38b so that the game ball can flow into the large winning opening.

The opening / closing operation pattern (opening / closing operation mode) of the large winning opening performed in these small hit game states is, for example, an operation of keeping the opening / closing member in the open state for 200 msec four times at 1500 msec intervals. As described above, the game control device 100 serves as a large winning opening opening / closing control means for controlling the opening / closing of the large winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of order, the CPU 111A controls to display the result mode of the out of place on the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 and the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 of the batch display device 50.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the end of the special game state based on the inflow of the game ball into the V flow path described above or based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. It has become. In this high probability state, the probability of a hit result in the special figure fluctuation display game is higher than that in the normal probability state. Further, regardless of the high probability state based on the result mode of either the first special figure fluctuation display game or the second special figure fluctuation display game, the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure Both variable display games are in a high probability state.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a time saving state (specific game state, high probability state in the normal figure) as a game state after the end of the special game state, for example, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. .. In this time-saving state, the probability of winning the result of the normal map fluctuation display game (normal figure probability) is the normal probability (normal figure low probability state), for example, a high probability higher than "0" (normal figure high probability state). ). As a result, the opening time of the normal variable winning device 37 per unit time is controlled to be longer than that in the case where the normal variable winning device 37 is in the low probability state of the normal figure. Here, the ordinary variable winning device 37 in the present embodiment
Has a normal probability of, for example, "0" so as not to open the movable member 37b in the normal gaming state.
Is set to.

Further, in the time saving state, the execution time of the normal map fluctuation display game (normal map fluctuation time) is, for example, 500 msec, and the normal map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is, for example, 600 msec. When the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened as a result of the normal fluctuation display game, the opening time (normal power opening time) and the number of times of opening (for example) of the first hit stop symbol
500msec x 1 time), 2nd hit stop symbol opening time (normal power opening time) and number of times of opening (for example, 1700msec x 2 times), 3rd hit stop symbol opening time (normal power opening time) and opening Number of times (
For example, it can be set to 1700 msec x 3 times).

It should be noted that the execution time, the normal figure stop time, the normal electric opening number of times, and the normal electric opening time of the normal figure fluctuation display game are appropriately set so as to control the normal fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 in a time-saving operation state. For example, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the execution time (normal map fluctuation time) of the above-mentioned normal map fluctuation display game to be a second variable display time shorter than the first variable display time. (For example, 10000 msec is 1000 msec). Further, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the normal map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map fluctuation display game to be the second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 msec). 70
4 ms). Further, in the time saving state, when the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened as a result of the normal fluctuation display game, the opening time (normal power opening time) is set to the normal state (normal figure low probability state). It is possible to control the second opening time to be longer than the first opening time (for example, 100 msec is 1352 msec). Further, in the time saving state, the number of times the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened (the number of times the normal electric power is opened) is larger than the number of times the first opening (for example, twice) for the result of one hit of the normal fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the number of times (for example, 4 times) to the second opening number. Further, in the time saving state, the probability of winning the result of the normal map fluctuation display game (normal figure probability) is the normal probability when the normal operation state (normal figure low probability state, for example, 0 /).
Higher probability than 251 or 1/251) (normal high probability state, eg 251 /
It can be 251 or 250/251).

In the time saving state, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened by changing any one or more of the normal fluctuation time, the normal stop time, the number of times the normal power is opened, the normal power opening time, and the normal power probability. Try to extend the conversion time longer than usual. It is also possible to set multiple types of time saving states that change different things. Further, in the case of a hit, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first open mode and the second open mode may be different. Further, the high probability state and the time saving state can be generated independently, both can be generated at the same time, or only one can be generated. In addition, the time saving state is the normal power support state (during normal power support or electric support).
It can also be called.

Next, the configuration of the batch display device will be described with reference to FIG. 34. FIG. 34 is a diagram showing an example of the batch display device of the second embodiment. The batch display device 50 has a 7-segment LED_d.
It includes 1 and 7 segment LEDs_d2, and 16 LEDs from LED_d3 to LED_d18. The batch display device 50 includes a 7-segment LED_d1 and a 7-segment LED.
Various statuses are displayed depending on the lighting mode of _d2 and LED_d3 to LED_d18.

The batch display device 50 distributes various status display functions from the 7-segment LED_d1 and the 7-segment LED_d2, and from the LED_d3 to the LED_d18, so that the round display unit 51, the special figure 1 hold display unit 52, and the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53. A special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, a normal symbol symbol display unit 55, a normal figure hold display unit 56, a status display unit 57, and a special figure 2 hold display unit 58 are provided. The round display unit 51 has four LEDs, LEDs_d3 to LED_d6.
The number of rounds in the special figure game is displayed according to the lighting mode of. The special figure 1 hold display unit 52 displays the number of holds in the special figure 1 game according to the lighting mode of the two LEDs of LED_d11 and LED_d12. The special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 has eight Ls of the 7-segment LED_d1.
The symbol in the special figure 1 game is displayed according to the lighting mode of the ED (7 segment LEDs and 1 dot LED). The special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 displays the symbol in the special figure 2 game according to the lighting mode of eight LEDs (seven segment LEDs and one dot LED) of the seven-segment LED_d2. The normal symbol display unit 55 displays a symbol in the normal symbol game according to the lighting mode of the three LEDs of LED_d8, LED_d10, and LED_d18. The normal figure hold display unit 56 displays the number of hold in the normal figure game according to the lighting mode of the two LEDs, LED_d15 and LED_d16. The status display unit 57 includes LED_d7 and LE.
The gaming state in the special figure game is displayed by the lighting mode of the three LEDs of D_d9 and LED_d17. The special figure 2 hold display unit 58 displays the number of holds in the special figure 2 game according to the lighting mode of the two LEDs of LED_d13 and LED_d14.

Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the game microcomputer 111 mainly includes a main process and a timer interrupt process performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 ms).

[Main processing]
First, the main processing of the game control device of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 39. FIG. 35 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of the main process of the game control device of the second embodiment. FIG. 36 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of the main process of the game control device of the second embodiment. FIG. 37 is a diagram (No. 3) showing a flowchart of the main process of the game control device of the second embodiment. FIG. 38 is a diagram (No. 4) showing a flowchart of the main process of the game control device of the second embodiment. FIG. 39 is a diagram (No. 5) showing a flowchart of the main process of the game control device of the second embodiment.

The main process is started by the control unit (gaming microcomputer 111) when the power is turned on. In this main process, first, a process for disabling interrupts (step S1) is performed, and then a stack pointer setting process for setting a stack pointer, which is the start address of an area for saving values such as registers when an interrupt occurs. (Step S2) is performed. Next, register bank 0 is specified (step S3), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S4). RAM 11
The range of the address of 1C is 0000h to 01FFh, and the upper level is 00h or 01h. In step S4, 00h, which is on the head side of the address range of the RAM 111C, is set.

Next, the firing stop signal is output and the firing permission signal is set to the prohibited state (step S5).
.. The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing stop signal, and the firing of the game ball is prohibited.

After that, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) is read into the first register (for example, the B register) (step S6), and then the state of the input port 3 (third input port 124) is read into the second register (for example, the B register). Read into the C register) (step S7).

Here, the predetermined bit of the first register is masked and the other bits are cleared (step S8). For example, only the second bit of the B register corresponding to the detection signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 is held, and the 0th bit, the 1st bit, and the 3rd bit to the 7th bit are cleared. Then, the predetermined bit of the second register is masked and the other bits are cleared (step S9). For example, only the 4th bit of the C register corresponding to the detection signal from the setting key switch 127 is held, and the 0th to 3rd bits and the 5th to 7th bits are cleared.

The information in the first register is integrated into the second register, and the information held by the second register is stored in RAM1.
It is retained as reference information that does not rely on 11C (step S10). For example, the logical sum of the B register and the C register is stored in the C register, and the C register is held as a status reference register.

For example, the value "00000000B" of the state reference register (C register) is "0" after the 0th bit and the 1st bit, the 3rd bit and the 5th bit to the 7th bit are cleared, and the second bit is. It indicates that it is “0” corresponding to the detection signal on from the RAM initialization switch 112, and that the fourth bit is “0” corresponding to the detection signal on from the setting key switch 127. That is, the value "0000000000B" of the status reference register indicates a setting change state in which the RAM initialization switch 112 is ON (ON) and the setting key switch 127 is ON (ON).

Further, the value "00010000B" of the status reference register is the 0th bit and the 1st bit.
The 3rd bit and the 5th to 7th bits are cleared to be "0", and the 2nd bit is RA.
It indicates that it is “0” corresponding to the detection signal on from the M initialization switch 112, and that the fourth bit is “1” corresponding to the detection signal off from the setting key switch 127. That is,
The value "00010000B" of the status reference register indicates a RAM initialization state in which the RAM initialization switch 112 is ON (ON) and the setting key switch 127 is OFF (OFF).

Further, the value "00000100B" of the status reference register is the 0th bit and the 1st bit.
The 3rd bit and the 5th to 7th bits are cleared to be "0", and the 2nd bit is RA.
It indicates that it is “1” corresponding to the detection signal off from the M initialization switch 112, and that the fourth bit is “0” corresponding to the detection signal on from the setting key switch 127. That is,
The value "00000100B" of the status reference register indicates a setting confirmation state in which the RAM initialization switch 112 is OFF (OFF) and the setting key switch 127 is ON (ON).

Further, the value "000010100B" of the status reference register is the 0th bit and the 1st bit.
The 3rd bit and the 5th to 7th bits are cleared to be "0", and the 2nd bit is RA.
It indicates that it is “1” corresponding to the detection signal off from the M initialization switch 112, and that the fourth bit is “1” corresponding to the detection signal off from the setting key switch 127. That is,
The value "000010100B" of the status reference register indicates a power recovery (power failure recovery) state in which the RAM initialization switch 112 is OFF (OFF) and the setting key switch 127 is OFF (OFF).

As a result, the detection signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 and the detection signal from the setting key switch 127 are held in the C register. Since the storage position (second bit) of the detection signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 in the B register and the storage position (fourth bit) of the detection signal from the setting key switch 127 in the C register are different, the B register and C are different. Even by the logical sum of the registers, the detection signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 and the detection signal from the setting key switch 127 are stored without being lost.

After that, a process of setting the power-on delay timer is performed (step S11). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, a slave control means (for example, a payout control device 200, an effect control device 300, etc.) that performs various controls according to an instruction from the game control device 100 that is the main control means, etc. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for the program of the slave control device) to start normally is set. As a result, the game control device 10 is tentatively turned on when the power is turned on.
It is possible to prevent the subordinate control means from missing the command by sending the command to the subordinate control means before 0 rises first and the slave control means starts up. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a standby means for setting a predetermined waiting time for delaying the activation of the main control means and waiting for the activation of the slave control means when the power is turned on.

In addition, when timing the power-on delay timer, the validity of the data held in the RAM area is determined (
It is performed using a storage area (RAM area or register that is not subject to validity judgment) that is not subject to checksum calculation). As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of a RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area for calculation, so that it is possible to prevent the control at the time of turning on the power from becoming complicated.

The detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 is stored in the second register (C register), but the detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 is stored before the start of the standby time. You can reliably save the operation. That is, if the state of the RAM initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the RAM initialization switch 112 can be operated after the standby time has elapsed, or the RAM initialization switch can be operated from the power-on to the standby time. It is necessary to continue to operate 112. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by performing the operation immediately after turning on the power without performing such annoying operations, and the initialization operation performed at the time of turning on the power. Can be prevented from being unacceptable.

Further, the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is stored in the second register (C register), but by storing it before the start of the standby time, the operation of the setting key switch 127 can be performed. It can be detected reliably. That is, the setting key switch 12 after the waiting time has elapsed.
When the state of 7 is read, the setting key switch 127 is waited for the elapse of the waiting time.
It is necessary to operate the setting key switch 127 from the power-on to the elapse of the standby time. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by performing the operation immediately after turning on the power without performing such annoying operations, and the setting change operation performed at the time of turning on the power or It is possible to prevent the situation where the setting confirmation operation is not accepted.

Next, a process for setting a power-on delay timer (for example, about 3 seconds) (step S11).
), And the process of timing the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power outage during the standby time ()
Steps S12 to S16) are performed. First, the number of times (for example, twice) to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus is set (step S12), and whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on or not is set. A determination is made (step S13).

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S13; Y), it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks set in step S12 (step S1).
4). Then, when the power failure monitoring signal is not continuously turned on for the number of checks (step S14; N), the process returns to the determination of whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S13). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks (step S14;
Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the power of the gaming machine 10 is waited to be cut off. In this way, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal continues to be received for a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent false detection of a power failure due to noise or the like, and appropriately deal with problems when the power is turned on. be able to.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to deal with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the start of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM 111C is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power cutoff are retained.
When a power failure occurs here, it is not necessary to perform backup processing or the like. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM 111C, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S13; N), that is, when a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated to "-1" (step S15), and the timer value is "0". (Step S16). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step S16; N), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the check count of the power failure monitoring signal (step S12). Also, the value of the timer is "0".
(Step S16; Y), that is, when the waiting time has ended, the RAM 11
Allow read / write RWM (Read Write Memory) access such as 1C or EEPROM (step S17), and output off-data to all output ports (set to no output).
(Step S18).

Next, the serial port (the port that is pre-installed in the game microcomputer 111,
Set (used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200) (step S19).
).

In step S20, a process of activating a CTC circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed.

In step S21, a process of setting the RAM error flag is performed. It should be noted that the set of the RAM abnormality flag is provisional and may be updated in the process of inspecting the RAM abnormality which is executed later.

In step S22, it is determined whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah). If the value of the power failure inspection area 1 is normal (step S22; Y), it is determined whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step). S23), power failure inspection area 2
If the value of is normal (step S23; Y), the checksum calculation process (step S24) for calculating the checksum of the predetermined area in the RWM is performed.

In the checksum calculation process, the sum of the data in the game control work area and the data in the status display work area may be calculated as a checksum, or the data in the game control work area and the status display work may be calculated. The checksum may be calculated separately from the data in the area, or the checksum may be calculated only from the data in the game control work area. The game control work area is a work area used for game control in the storage area in the RWM. The status display work area is a work area used for status display in the storage area in the RWM.

Next, it is determined whether or not the checksum calculated in step S24 and the checksum when the power is turned off match (step S25), and when it is determined that the checksums match (normal) (step S25; Y) clears the RAM abnormality flag tentatively set in step S21 (step S26).

When it is determined that the checksums do not match (is not normal) (step S25;
In N), by passing step S26 and shifting to step S27, the RAM abnormality flag tentatively set in step S21 becomes deterministic. Even if it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step S22; N or step S23; N), it is tentatively set in step S21 by passing step S26 and moving to step S27. The RAM error flag is deterministic.

In step S27, the setting key switch 12 refers to the second register (C register).
It is determined whether or not the detection signal of 7 is on and the detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 is on. If the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is on and the detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 is on, the process proceeds to step S33, the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is on, and the detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 is on. If not on, step S
Proceed to 28.

Since the game control device 100 holds the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 and the detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 in the second register (C register), the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 and the RAM initialization The detection signal of the switch 112 can be determined at the same time. Further, the game control device 100 has a detection signal of the setting key switch 127 and RAM.
Since the detection signal of the initialization switch 112 is held in the second register (C register),
The detection signal of the setting key switch 127 and the detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 before the validity determination of the RAM can be determined.

In step S28, the control unit determines whether or not the RAM abnormality flag is on. The control unit proceeds to step S30 when the RAM error flag is on (that is, when the RAM error flag is set), and when the RAM error flag is not on (that is, RAM).
If the abnormality flag is cleared), the process proceeds to step S29.

In step S29, the control unit determines whether or not the setting change mode flag is on. The control unit proceeds to step S48 when the setting change mode flag is on, and proceeds to step S30 when the setting change mode flag is not on.

Steps S30 to S32 are processes executed when the RAM is abnormal or when the power is shut off during the setting and the RAM is restarted without being cleared. Step S3
At 0, the control unit transmits a command for notifying the main abnormality error to the effect control device 300.
As a result, the effect control device 300 performs the effect control corresponding to the command of the main abnormality error notification. For example, the staging control device 300 receives a command for notifying a main abnormality error, displays a message informing the restart with RAM clear on the display device 41, or outputs sound from the speakers 19a and 19b. Further, the effect control device 300 receives the command for notifying the main abnormality error, and notifies the main abnormality error by the frame decoration device 18, the board decoration device 46, and the board effect device 44.

In step S31, the control unit displays the 7-segment display data when the game is stopped by the performance display device 135.
Output to. At this time, the control unit can display the status corresponding to the main abnormality error on the performance display device 135. Further, the control unit outputs the 7-segment display data when the game is stopped to the probability setting value display device 136. At this time, the control unit can display a numerical value or a character that is not in the probability set value on the probability set value display device 136. The control unit is L when the game is stopped.
The 7-segment display data including the ED display data may be output to the batch display device 50. At this time, the control unit may turn off or turn on all the batch display devices 50.

In step S32, the control unit outputs the on-data of the security signal to the external information terminal board 71.
Output from. At this time, the control unit turns off the output data of other signals output from the external information terminal board 71. The control unit repeatedly executes steps S31 and S32 and waits for the power to be cut off. That is, the gaming machine 10 outputs a security signal from the external information terminal board 71 until the power is cut off. Further, the gaming machine 10 waits until the power is cut off.
No signal other than the security signal is output from the external information terminal board 71.

The control unit does not prohibit RAM access in the repeated execution of steps S31 and S32 until the power is cut off. As a result, the gaming machine 10 has NMI (No.
n-Maskable Interrupt) The return address can be stored in RAM when it occurs, reducing the risk of program runaway. In this way, the control unit waits for the power to be cut off in step S31.
And the stored contents of the RAM during repeated execution of step S32 are not protected by prohibiting RAM access, but since clearing the RAM at the time of restart is a condition for starting the game control, the risk that the stored contents of the RAM are not protected is limited. There is. That is, the gaming machine 10 obtains the effect of reducing the risk of program runaway while limiting the risk that the stored contents of the RAM are not protected. Further, the control unit does not prohibit RAM access in the repeated execution of step S31 and step S32 until the power is cut off, so that the control unit does not prohibit RAM access, so that step S31 and step S32
In, the subroutine can be called to improve the program efficiency.

Steps S33 to S36 are processes related to preparation for setting change, and step S
At 27, the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is turned on and the RAM initialization switch 11
This is a process executed when the detection signal of 2 is on.

In step S33, the control unit determines whether or not the RAM abnormality flag is on. The control unit proceeds to step S34 when the RAM error flag is on, and proceeds to step S35 when the RAM error flag is not on.

In step S34, the control unit clears the set value because the RAM error flag is on. The setting value may be cleared by setting an invalid value as the setting value, or by setting the most disadvantageous value for the player from the viewpoint of fraud countermeasures.

In step S35, the control unit performs a process of setting the setting change mode flag. The setting change mode flag is a flag indicating whether or not the game machine 10 is changing the setting. The setting change mode flag is set when the setting is being changed, and the setting change mode is in progress when the setting is not being changed. The flag is cleared (reset).

In step S36, the control unit transmits the command for which the setting is being changed to the effect control device 300. As a result, the effect control device 300 performs the effect control corresponding to the command whose setting is being changed. For example, the staging control device 300 receives a command during the setting change and displays a message indicating that the setting is being changed on the display device 41, or the speakers 19a, 1
Sound is output from 9b. Further, the effect control device 300 receives the command during the setting change, and notifies the frame decoration device 18, the board decoration device 46, and the board effect device 44 that the setting is being changed.

Step S37 is a process executed after the setting change preparation (step S33 to step S36) or after the setting confirmation preparation (step S49, step S50). In step S37, the control unit sets the security signal control timer to 128 ms. As a result, the gaming machine 10 outputs a security signal at least until the security signal control timer is timed up.

Steps S38 to S40 are processes related to waiting for the end of setting change or waiting for the end of setting confirmation. By setting the output of the security signal in step S37, the gaming machine 10 makes it possible to grasp from the outside the execution of the process related to the setting change end waiting or the setting confirmation end waiting.

After enabling the interrupt (step S38), the control unit refers to the second register (C register) and determines whether or not the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is off (step S).
39). The control unit is in step S5 when the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is off.
The process proceeds to step 5, and if the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is not off, the process proceeds to step S40.

In step S40, the control unit determines whether or not a power failure has occurred. The control unit is
The occurrence of a power failure can be determined by continuously detecting the power failure monitoring signal for a predetermined time. The control unit proceeds to step S41 when a power failure occurs, and step S when a power failure does not occur.
Proceed to 39. That is, the control unit waits for the setting key to be turned off until the power failure occurs, with the interrupt enabled in step S38.

When the control unit determines that a power failure has occurred, the process for disabling interrupts (step S4).
1) Perform the process of outputting off-data to all output ports (step S42).
After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step S43).
), The power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step S44).
Further, a checksum calculation process (step S45) for calculating the checksum when the power of the RWM is turned off, and a process for saving the calculated checksum in the checksum area (step S46).
), Then the process of prohibiting access to the RAM (step S47) is performed, and then the power of the gaming machine is waited to be cut off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is turned off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power is cut off is correctly backed up. It can be determined at the time of re-input.

Step S48 is executed when it is determined in step S29 that the setting change mode flag is on. In step S48, the control unit refers to the second register (C register) and determines whether or not the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is on. The control unit
If the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is on, the process proceeds to step S49, and if the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is not on, the process proceeds to step S51.

Step S49 and step S50 are processes related to preparation for setting confirmation. Step S4
In 9, the control unit performs a process of setting a flag in the setting confirmation mode. The setting confirmation mode flag is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming machine 10 is confirming the setting. The setting confirmation mode flag is set when the setting is being confirmed, and the setting confirmation mode is in progress when the setting is not being confirmed. The flag is cleared (reset). In step S50, the control unit transmits the command for which the setting is being confirmed to the staging control device 300. As a result, the staging control device 300 performs staging control corresponding to the command being confirmed for setting. For example, the staging control device 300 receives a command during setting confirmation, displays a message indicating that the setting is being confirmed on the display device 41, or outputs sound from the speakers 19a and 19b. In addition, the staging control device 3
00 receives the command during the setting confirmation, and notifies that the setting is being confirmed by the frame decoration device 18, the board decoration device 46, and the board effect device 44. After this, the control unit proceeds to step S37.

On the other hand, when the control unit determines in step S48 that the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is not on, the control unit executes step S51. In step S51, the control unit refers to the second register (C register) and determines whether or not the detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 is on. The control unit proceeds to step S52 when the detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 is on, and proceeds to step S58 when the detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 is not on. That is, the gaming machine 10 proceeds to execute the process related to RAM initialization (RAM clear) by the activation detection accompanied by the pressing operation of the RAM initialization switch 112, and R
The process proceeds to the execution of the process related to the power failure recovery by the activation detection without pressing the AM initialization switch 112.

Next, the process related to RAM initialization performed in step S52 and subsequent steps will be described. R
In the process related to AM initialization, the control unit clears the RAM area other than the set value to 0 (zero clear) (step S52), and saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (step S52).
Step S53). For example, the control unit sets the RAM clear start address 2 as the start address at the time of RAM clear (see the memory map 111M in FIG. 42), and stores the RWM (for example, RAM 111C) in the storage area (area not including the access prohibited area). Clear the data in our clear target area (game control work area) to zero.

Since the setting change mode flag and the setting confirmation mode flag are included in the data in the clear target area, they are cleared by zero clearing the data in the clear target area.

In step S54, the control unit transmits a command at the time of RAM initialization to the effect control device 300. As a result, the effect control device 300 performs effect control corresponding to the command at the time of RAM initialization. For example, the effect control device 300 receives a command at the time of RAM initialization, displays a message informing that the RAM has been initialized on the display device 41, or outputs sound from the speakers 19a and 19b. Further, the staging control device 300 receives the command for initializing the RAM, and indicates that the RAM has been initialized by the frame decoration device 18 or the board decoration device 4.
6. Notify by the board effect device 44.

Further, when the control unit detects that the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is off after executing the process related to the setting change end waiting or the setting confirmation end waiting (step S38 to step S40), the control unit performs step S55. Run. After disabling interrupts (step S55), the control unit transmits a command to end the notification to the effect control device 300 (step S).
56).

As a result, the effect control device 300 ends the notification that the setting is being changed, which is started by receiving the command during the setting change, or the notification that the setting is being confirmed, which is started by receiving the command being confirmed. ..

Next, the control unit refers to the setting change mode flag and determines whether or not the setting change mode is in progress (step S57). When the control unit is in the setting change mode, step S5
Proceed to step 2 to execute the process related to RAM initialization. On the other hand, when the setting change mode is not in progress, the control unit proceeds to step S58 and executes a process related to power failure recovery.

In step S58, the control unit executes a power failure recovery process. The power failure recovery process saves the initial value at the time of power failure recovery in the area to be initialized, determines whether or not the special figure game is in high probability by referring to the special figure status, and the special figure game is in high probability. In the case of, the process of saving the on-information in the high-probability notification flag area and saving the on-data of the high-probability notification LED in the segment area is included.

The area to be initialized in the power failure recovery process is a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, a setting change mode flag, a setting confirmation mode flag, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. In the power failure recovery process, the busy signal status area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept the command, is also cleared, and the state of the payout busy signal is confirmed. It is considered to be an indefinite state indicating that it has not been done. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area that stores the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and the state of the touch switch signal is set to an indefinite state indicating that the state has not been determined.

Next, the control unit transmits a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the special figure game processing number to the staging control board (staging control device 300) (step S59), and proceeds to step S60. In step S59, the model designation command, the special figure 1 hold number command, the special figure 2 hold number command,
Send multiple commands such as probability information command, probability setting value information command, and screen specification command. Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, information on the number of times of production and information on the number of times of high probability are transmitted. The screen-specified command is that the control states of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are both normally being processed (during fluctuation, during jackpot (first special game state)).
If it is in a small hit (a state that is neither of the second special game states), it is a command to instruct the display of the customer waiting demo screen, and in other cases, it is a command to display the recovery screen. It is a command to do.

In step S60, the control unit performs a process of starting and setting the random number generation circuit. After that, the values of the predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of turning on the power are extracted, and the corresponding initial value random numbers (big hit symbol initial value random number, small hit symbol initial value random number, hit initial) are extracted. After saving in a predetermined area of the RWM as the initial value (start value) of the value random number and the winning symbol initial value random number (step S61), the interrupt is permitted (step S62).

Subsequently, the control unit performs an initial value random number update process (step S63) for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers. This initial value random number update process is a process of updating (incrementing) each initial value random number by, for example, "+1". In this way, the gaming machine 10 makes it possible to increase the randomness of the random numbers by continuously updating the initial value random numbers as long as time permits in the main process.

Here, the control unit temporarily disables interrupts (step S64), executes the performance display editing process (step S65), and permits interrupts after executing the performance display editing process (step S66). The performance display editing process is a process related to base calculation and display, which will be described later with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. Since the processing load of the performance display editing process is relatively high, the control unit prohibits interrupts to derive the processing result more quickly. As a result, the gaming machine 10 guarantees the derivation of the processing result of the performance display editing process by the time the gaming state is updated by the timer interrupt.

In step S67, the control unit determines whether or not a power failure has occurred. The control unit is
The occurrence of a power failure can be determined by continuously detecting the power failure monitoring signal for a predetermined time. The control unit proceeds to step S41 when a power failure occurs, and step S when a power failure does not occur.
Proceed to 63.

That is, the control unit repeatedly executes the processes from step S63 to step S67 unless a power failure occurs. Specifically, when a power failure has not occurred, the control unit repeatedly performs initial value random number update processing, performance display editing processing, and power failure monitoring signal check (loop processing).

Then, an interrupt is permitted before the initial value random number update process (step S63) (step S).
66) As a result, if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process will be executed with priority, and the timer interrupt will be waited for by the initial value random number update process, which will put pressure on the interrupt process. Can be avoided.

Similarly, the interrupt is disabled before the performance display editing process (step S65) (step S6).
4) As a result, the performance display editing process is executed in preference to the timer interrupt.
It is possible to avoid pressure on the performance display editing process.

From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) that comprehensively controls the game, and the subordinate control means (payout control device 200, that performs various controls according to the instructions from the main control means).
In a gaming machine provided with an effect control device (300, etc.), the main control means waits for setting a predetermined standby time for delaying the start of the main control means and waiting for the start of the slave control means when the power is turned on. A means (game control device 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined standby time are provided.

Further, a power supply device 400 for supplying electric power to various devices is provided, the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) is provided. , It is determined that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) includes a RAM 111C capable of storing data and a RAM 111C.
An initialization operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112) that can be operated from the outside, and an initialization means (game control device 100) that initializes the data stored in the RAM 111C based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. And, the operation state of the initialization operation unit is read before the start of the waiting time.

The game control device 100 has a function (second initialization process) of distinguishing between the initialization process (first initialization process) at the time of data abnormality and the initialization process (second initialization process) at the time of initialization operation. (1) Initialization means, 2nd initialization means), so that the optimum and lean initialization processing according to the situation can be realized.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) includes a RAM 111C capable of storing data and a RAM 111C.
Setting operation unit that can be operated from the outside (setting value change switch 126, setting key switch 12)
7) and a setting changing means (game control device 100) for changing the setting value stored in the RAM 111C based on the operation of the setting operation unit are provided to enable the setting change and the setting display unit (setting display unit). The setting (set value) can be confirmed by providing the probability set value display device 136). Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is a RAM after the lapse of the standby time.
This means that access to 111C is permitted.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) prohibits access to the RAM (RAM111C) (step S47) and waits for the execution of all the processes to be stopped.
The loop after step S47) and the RAM error standby process (loop in steps S31 and S32) that waits for the execution of all processes to be stopped while permitting access to the RAM (RAM111C) (step S17). Make it feasible.

Here, the standby process when a power failure occurs and the standby process when a RAM is abnormal will be described. The power failure standby process is a loop process that is executed after the access to the RAM is prohibited in step S47 of the main process and waits for the execution of all the processes to be stopped. Further, since the standby process at the time of power failure is executed after the interrupt is prohibited in step S41 of the main process, an interrupt (timer interrupt) that is not an NMI interrupt is prohibited. The standby process when a power failure occurs is NMI.
About interrupts NMI interrupts can occur because interrupts cannot be disabled. However, since the standby process when a power failure occurs is a process executed when a power failure occurs, there is little risk that an NMI interrupt will occur during the execution of the process. Further, the standby process when a power failure occurs is a standby process that does not accompany abnormality notification. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can allocate the electric power up to the power cutoff to the power failure processing. The gaming machine 10 prohibits access to the RAM during the standby process when a power failure occurs, thereby reducing the risk that the stored contents of the RAM will change due to an unstable voltage.

The RAM error standby process is a loop process that is executed after the access to the RAM (RWM) is permitted in step S17 of the main process, and waits for the execution of all the processes to be stopped.
Further, since the RAM error standby process is executed after the interrupt is prohibited in step S1 of the main process, an interrupt that is not an NMI interrupt (timer interrupt) is prohibited. Note that the standby process when a power failure occurs is N because interrupts cannot be disabled for NMI interrupts.
MI interrupts can occur. Since the RAM error standby process is a process of waiting for the power to be cut off, the risk of an NMI interrupt occurring during the execution of the process is greater than that of the power failure standby process.
However, in the RAM error standby process, since access to the RAM is permitted even if an NMI interrupt occurs, the return address can be stored in the RAM, and the risk of program runaway due to the occurrence of the NMI interrupt is small. Further, since the gaming machine 10 transmits the main abnormality error notification command to the effect control device 300 in step S30, the effect control device 300 performs the abnormality notification in parallel during the execution of the RAM abnormality standby process. Can be done. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can be expected to be restarted promptly.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt processing of the game control device 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 40. Figure 4
0 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second embodiment. This timer interrupt process is performed in the above-mentioned main process from the time when the interrupt is enabled until the interrupt is disabled (step S38 to step S41, step S38 to step S55, step S66 to step S64, step S66). To step S41)
This is the interrupt processing that occurs in. The timer interrupt process is a process executed by the CPU 111A.

The timer interrupt process is started by inputting a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator to the CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and the timer interrupt process is started.

When the timer interrupt processing is started, first, register bank 1 is specified (step S7).
1). Switching to the register bank 1 is equivalent to performing a register save process of transferring the value held in a predetermined register (for example, the register used in the main process) to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, the D register) (step S72). In step S72, the same processing as in step S4 in the main processing is performed, but the register banks are different.

Next, input from various sensors and switches, input of signals, that is, input processing (step S73) for reading the state of each input port is performed. In step S74, the control unit refers to the setting change mode flag and the setting confirmation mode flag, and determines whether or not the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is in progress. The control unit proceeds to step S75 when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is in progress, executes the setting change / confirmation process, and ends the timer interrupt process. The setting change / confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 41.
On the other hand, the control unit proceeds to step S76 when neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is in progress.

In step S76, the control unit executes an output process for controlling the drive of an actuator such as a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 38b, universal solenoid 37c) based on the output data set in various processes.

When the firing stop signal is output in step S5 in the main processing, the firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permitted state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, the signal is not processed. In addition, the launch permission signal is the game control device 1.
A first signal indicating the state of launch permission seen from 00, and a second signal (launch permission signal) indicating the state of launch permission seen from the payout control device 200 are also generated in the payout control device 200 and fired. It is output to the control device. That is, two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device.
If both are permitted to fire, the game ball is configured to be ready to fire.

Next, the control unit issues a command set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 20.
Issue command transmission process (step S77) to output to 0, random number update process 1 (step S7)
8), the random number update process 2 (step S79) is executed. Here, the random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number, which are the targets of the initial value random number update process. .. In addition, the random number update process 2 is
It is a process of updating the fluctuation pattern random number for determining the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display game of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2. In addition to the random number update process 1 or the random number update process 1, the random number update process 2 may stop the random number update during the setting change or change the update cycle.

Next, the control unit includes a start port 1 switch 36a, a start port 2 switch 37a, a gate switch 34a in the normal drawing, a winning port switch 35a, a large winning port switch 38a, and a specific area switch 38.
The winning opening switch / state monitoring process (step S80) for monitoring whether or not there is a normal signal input from e and monitoring for errors (whether or not the front frame or the glass frame is opened, etc.) is performed. Further, the start port switch monitoring process (step S81) for monitoring the winning of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is performed. In the start port switch monitoring process, if the game ball is won in the start winning opening 36 forming the first starting winning opening or the normal variable winning device 37 forming the second starting winning opening, various random numbers (big hit random numbers, etc.) Is extracted, and the game result is determined in advance based on the prize at the stage before the start of the special figure variation display game. The game result is determined in advance.

Next, the control unit performs a special figure 1 game process (step S82) for processing the special figure 1 variable display game, a special figure 2 game process (step S83) for performing a process related to the special figure 2 variable display game, and a normal figure variation. General figure game processing (step S) that performs processing related to the display game
84) is executed.

Next, a segment LED (for example, a special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 of the batch display device 50) provided on the game machine 10 and displaying various information related to the display of the special figure variation display game and the game is LE.
Segment LED editing process (step S85) that drives D) to display the desired content.
), Magnet fraud monitoring process (step S86) that checks the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61 and determines whether there is an abnormality, and process that checks the detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 62 and determines whether there is an abnormality. Perform the radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S87). Then, an external information editing process (step S88) and a performance display device control process (step S89) for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer are performed, and the timer interrupt process is terminated.

Here, in the second embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting interrupt) and the process of restoring the register bank designation (that is, the process of designating register bank 0) are interrupts. It is automatically performed at the time of return (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Depending on the CPU used, there are also gaming machines that need to be instructed to execute a process of restoring the interrupt disabled state or a process of restoring the register bank designation.

[Main processing]
Next, the main process of the staging control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 41. FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the main process in the staging control device of the second embodiment.

The main process is a process executed by the control unit (CPU311) of the staging control device 300 when the power supply of the gaming machine 10 is started.
[Step D11] The control unit disables interrupts.

[Step D12] The control unit performs initial settings of the CPU 311.
[Step D13] The control unit permits interrupts.
[Step D14] The control unit sets a random number seed. This is a process of setting a pseudo-random number generation sequence using, for example, a sland function. Here, the control unit may use a fixed value such as 0 (zero) as an argument given to the sland function, or use a value created based on the ID value of the CPU or the like so as to be different for each gaming machine. You may.

[Step D15] The control unit is the RWM (for example, RAM 322) of the staging control device 300.
The initial value at the time of power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (for example, the effect flag area (the storage area used as various flags described later in the control process of the effect control device 300)).

[Step D16] The control unit clears the WDT (watchdog timer).
[Step D17] The control unit executes the effect button input process. The effect button input process is a process for editing when the effect buttons (selection button switch 25a and enter button switch 25b) are operated when they are enabled. Since the effect button does not turn on and off at high speed, the control unit may perform the process of detecting the input of the effect button in the effect button input process or in a short-cycle timer interrupt (not shown). good.

[Step D18] The control unit executes the hall / player setting mode process. Hall / player setting mode processing includes setting the changeable range of LED and display device 41 such as brightness and volume, and setting the changeable range.
This is a process for accepting operations such as changing the brightness and volume of the LED and the display device 41 by the player.

[Step D19] The control unit executes a random number update process. Random number update processing is, for example, r
This is a process of updating the pseudo-random number at least once in each control cycle of the main process using the and function. Since the random function generates a random number based on the specified generation sequence each time the recalculation is performed, the control unit can obtain the random number only by executing the random function. A counter that increments by "1", such as the main board (game control device 100), may be used as a random number.

[Step D20] The control unit executes a received command check process. The received command check process is a process of analyzing a command received from the game control device 100 in units of a predetermined number.

[Step D21] The control unit executes the effect display editing process. The effect display editing process is a process for setting a reel operation schedule for controlling the display content on the display device 41. For example, the control unit sets the reel operation schedule in a table shape in the effect display editing process.

[Step D22] The control unit executes a reel control process. The reel control process is a process of setting the reel operation mode of the display device 41 and the lighting mode of various LEDs according to the reel operation schedule set in step D21. For example, the control unit sets the rotation speed and the rotation amount of the reel included in the display device 41.

[Step D23] The control unit executes the sound control process. The sound control process is a process related to volume control of the sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b).

[Step D24] The control unit executes the decoration control process. The decoration control process is a process for controlling various LEDs and the like such as the board decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18.
[Step D25] The control unit executes the movable body control process. The movable body control process is a process for controlling a movable body (for example, a board effect device 44) including various motors and SOLs (solenoids).

[Step D26] The control unit executes the launch information control process. The launch information control process sets launch-related information based on the launch status flag, and also produces a special map rotation state (the number of special map fluctuations per game for a predetermined amount of money (that is, a predetermined number of balls to be rented)). It is a process to perform mode correction of.

[Step D27] The control unit executes the information disclosure process. The information disclosure process is a process of disclosing performance information regarding game performance to a player.
The control unit returns to step D16 after executing step D27, and thereafter, step D1.
The process of steps 6 to D27 is repeatedly executed. That is, steps D16 to D
Reference numeral 27 is a loop process (a loop process) that is repeatedly executed in the above process cycle after the effect control device 300 is started.
In some cases, it is called main loop processing).

In addition, the control unit has step D in the main loop process in order to match the effect of the display device 41.
The processes of steps 23 to D25 are executed, and the process of actually outputting the signals and data (particularly the signals for driving and controlling various LEDs and motors) generated or set by these control processes to the port is shown in the figure. It is performed in a timer interrupt with a short cycle that has not been set. However, when an IC specialized for controlling various devices is used, there is a case where a signal or the like is not output by a timer interrupt only by instructing by serial communication or the like.

Next, the display device 41 will be described with reference to FIG. 42. FIG. 42 is a diagram showing an example of an overview of the display device of the second embodiment. The display device 41 has a left symbol display area 41L, a middle symbol display area 41C, a right symbol display area 41R, a special figure 1 changing display 41a, a special figure 2 changing display 41b, a hold display 41d, and a hold. Includes digestion label 41e.

The display device 41 has a box-shaped housing, three large rectangular windows arranged horizontally in the center, and three windows.
It has two small circular windows arranged laterally in the lower right, eight circular windows arranged laterally in the lower center, and one elliptical window located in the lower left.

The left symbol display area 41L, the middle symbol display area 41C, and the right symbol display area 41R are integrated to form a symbol display area for the symbol display of special figure 1 or special figure 2, and special figure 1 Alternatively, the decorative design of Special Figure 2 is displayed.

The left symbol display area 41L displays a part of the left reel LL from the left window portion of the three rectangular window portions to display the left symbol of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2. The middle symbol display area 41C displays a part of the middle reel CL from the inner window portion of the three rectangular window portions to display the middle symbol of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2. The right symbol display area 41R displays a part of the right reel RL from the right window portion of the three rectangular window portions to display the right symbol of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2.

Since the left symbol display area 41L, the middle symbol display area 41C, and the right symbol display area 41R are large enough to display three symbols vertically, nine symbols can be displayed in total.

For the decorative design of Special Figure 1 or Special Figure 2, one line arranged in the central horizontal direction may be used as an effective line, or two lines arranged in the vertical and horizontal directions may be added to make three lines as effective lines. Further, two lines, one line diagonally to the left and one line diagonally to the right, may be added to make five lines effective. Also, valid lines are not limited to this arrangement (for example,
It may be a mountain-shaped line, a valley-shaped line, etc.), and the number of effective lines may be any number as long as it is 1 or more.

LEDs face each of the two small circular windows that line up horizontally in the lower right corner, and the LE on the left side.
D corresponds to the special figure 1 changing display 41a, and the LED on the right side corresponds to the special drawing 2 changing display 41b. For example, in the special figure 1 changing display 41a, the blinking of the corresponding LED indicates that the special figure 1 game is being changed, and the lighting of the corresponding LED indicates that the special figure 1 game is stopped changing (the stop symbol is being displayed). The corresponding LED is turned off to indicate that the game is not being executed. In addition, special figure 2 changing display 4
In 1b, the blinking of the corresponding LED indicates that the fluctuation of the special figure 2 game is being displayed, the lighting of the corresponding LED indicates that the fluctuation of the special figure 2 game is stopped (during the stop symbol is being displayed), and the extinguishing of the corresponding LED indicates that the special figure is being displayed. 2
Indicates that the game is not running.

The gaming machine 10 has a left symbol display area 41L, a middle symbol display area 41C, and a right symbol display area 41R.
About the decorative pattern to be displayed with and, while ensuring the variety of display effects, special figure 1 variable display 41a
And the special figure 2 changing display 41b facilitates the player's grasp of the game state.

Further, the gaming machine 10 has a special figure even when a failure such as a failure occurs in the display of the decorative symbol displayed in the left symbol display area 41L, the middle symbol display area 41C, and the right symbol display area 41R. 1 The variable display state can be guided by the variable display 41a and the special figure 2 variable display 41b. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 has a left symbol display area 41L, a middle symbol display area 41C, and a right symbol display area 4.
Even if the decorative symbol displayed in 1R does not function as a special symbol display, the variable display state can be grasped from the special diagram 1 variable display 41a and the special diagram 2 variable display 41b, and the special diagram 1 symbol display can be grasped. The variation display result can be grasped from the unit 53 and the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54.

The LEDs facing from the eight circular windows arranged in the horizontal direction at the lower center correspond to the hold display 41d. The hold display 41d is the sum of the number of hold memories of the special figure variation display game (the number of start memories of the special figure 1 game held and the number of start memories of the special figure 2 game held) depending on the display mode. )
Is specified. Therefore, the number of hold storages displayed by the hold display 41d depends on the game state.
It corresponds to the total number of either or both of the reserved storage numbers of the special figure 1 and the reserved storage numbers of the special figure 2. Further, the hold display 41d can notify the degree of expectation for the game result for each hold storage.

The LED facing from one elliptical window located at the lower left corresponds to the hold digestion display 41e. The hold digestion display 41e can indicate that the special figure variable display game is in the variable display state and notify the degree of expectation for the game result depending on the display mode. That is, the gaming machine 10
Can perform a hold notice effect using the hold display 41d and the hold digestion display 41e. The hold notice effect is an aspect of the look-ahead effect performed by using the hold display 41d and the hold digestion display 41e.

Next, the symbol arrangement provided on the outer peripheral surface of the reel will be described with reference to FIG. 43. FIG. 43
Is a figure showing an example of a symbol arrangement provided on the outer peripheral surface of the reel of the second embodiment. The display device 41 has three reels, a left reel LL, a middle reel CL, and a right reel RL. The left reel LL is provided with the left reel symbol arrangement FA1 on the outer peripheral surface of the reel. The middle reel CL is provided with the middle reel symbol arrangement FA2 on the outer peripheral surface of the reel. The right reel RL is provided with a right reel symbol arrangement FA3 on the outer peripheral surface of the reel. Left reel LL, middle reel CL, and right reel RL
Are outer peripheral surfaces of the same size, and are rotated once by driving a stepping motor described later in a predetermined step (for example, 200 steps) in the same direction, so that all the symbols on the symbol array face the display surface. be able to. The stepping motor is not limited to 200 steps per lap, and may be one lap with another number of steps such as 360 steps per lap.

In the left reel symbol arrangement FA1, the symbol "rocket" is arranged at the position FP1, the blank symbol is arranged at the position FP2, the symbol "red 7" is arranged at the position FP3, and the blank symbol is arranged at the position FP4. Then, the symbol "tiger" is placed at the position FP5, the blank symbol is placed at the position FP6, the large symbol "pig" is placed at the positions FP7, FP8, and FP9, the blank symbol is placed at the position FP10, and the blank symbol is placed at the position FP11. The symbol "white 7" is arranged, the blank symbol is arranged at the position FP12, the symbol "lion" is arranged at the position FP13, and the blank symbol is arranged at the position FP14.

In the middle reel symbol arrangement FA2, the symbol "tiger" is arranged at the position FP1 in order from the bottom, and the position F
A blank symbol is placed in P2, a symbol "red 7" is placed in position FP3, a blank symbol is placed in position FP4, a symbol "rocket" is placed in position FP5, a blank symbol is placed in position FP6, and a position is placed. A large symbol "pig" is placed in FP7, FP8, FP9, a blank symbol is placed in position FP10, a symbol "lion" is placed in position FP11, a blank symbol is placed in position FP12, and a symbol "white" is placed in position FP13. 7 ”is placed, and a blank symbol is placed at the position FP14. The right reel symbol arrangement FA3 is the same as the middle reel symbol arrangement FA2.

In this way, there are 14 positions from FP1 to FP14 where the symbols (including large symbols and blank symbols) are arranged on the outer peripheral surface of the reel. Since the stepping motor goes around the reel in 200 steps, FP1 to FP14 cannot be arranged at equal intervals. Therefore, in the left reel symbol array FA1, the middle reel symbol array FA2, and the right reel symbol array FA3, four consecutive sections from FP6 to FP10 are set at 15-step intervals, and the rest are set at 14-step intervals. As a result, although the 14-step section and the 15-step section are arranged together, the 14-step section and the 15-step section may be arranged in a distributed manner. Further, in the gaming machine 10, the 15-step sections are collectively arranged in the left reel symbol arrangement FA1, the middle reel symbol arrangement FA2, and the right reel symbol arrangement FA3, and the large symbol "pig" is arranged in the 15-step section. , It is possible to display the fluctuation of the large symbol "pig" in detail compared to other symbols.

In addition, the symbol "rocket", the symbol "red 7", the symbol "tiger", the symbol "white 7", in the symbol arrangement,
And the symbol "Lion" is the result of the variable display game when the same symbol is aligned on the effective line (not limited to one line arranged in the horizontal direction in the center) on each of the left reel LL, the middle reel CL, and the right reel RL. It shows that the hit was derived. In addition, for the large symbol "pig" in the symbol arrangement, the large symbol is an effective line for each of the left reel LL, the middle reel CL, and the right reel RL (
Aligning on (limited to one line lined up in the horizontal direction in the center) indicates that a hit has been derived as a result of the variable display game. The blank symbols in the symbol arrangement can be displayed in a variable display game even if the blank symbols are aligned on the effective line (not limited to one line arranged in the horizontal direction in the center) in each of the left reel LL, the middle reel CL, and the right reel RL. It does not show that the hit was derived as a result.

Next, a reel unit commonly used in the left reel LL, the middle reel CL, and the right reel RL will be described with reference to FIG. 44. FIG. 44 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the reel unit of the second embodiment.

The reel unit 500 includes a reel frame 501, a stepping motor 502, a photo sensor 503, and an LED substrate 504. The reel frame 501 has a film on which a pattern arrangement is printed on the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion. The reel frame 501 is provided with spokes on one side of the bottom surface of the cylinder so that it can be axially attached to the stepping motor 502, and the other side of the bottom surface of the cylinder is opened to accommodate the stepping motor 502 and the LED substrate 504 in the cylinder portion. ..

The stepping motor 502 is supported by the housing of the display device 41 on one side, and is pivotally attached to the reel frame 501 on the other side to support the reel frame 501 and the reel frame 501.
Is rotatable. The stepping motor 502 can control the rotation position of the reel frame 501 in one step units, and can rotate the reel frame 501 once in 200 steps.

The photo sensor 503 is arranged so as to straddle the reel frame 501 or the film attached to the reel frame 501, and detects a light-shielding state and a light-transmitting state. Reel frame 5
01 is provided with a light-shielding portion 510 at a predetermined position (reference position) in one round, and is used as a light-transmitting portion at the other positions. As a result, the gaming machine 10 has the reel frame 5 by the photo sensor 503.
The reference position of 01 is detected, and the reel frame 5 is controlled by the drive of the stepping motor 502.
The rotation position of 01 is controlled.

The light-shielding portion 510 may be provided on the reel frame 501 or may be provided on the film attached to the reel frame 501. Further, the reel unit 500 is provided with a light-shielding portion 510 at a reference position, and the other positions are used as a light-transmitting portion.
A light-transmitting portion may be provided at a reference position, and a light-shielding portion may be used at the remaining position.

The LED board 504 is a display device 41 through a film attached to the reel frame 501.
It is arranged at a position facing the rectangular window portion of. The LED substrate 504 includes a plurality of LEDs 505. The LED 505 can irradiate the film attached to the reel frame 501 from the back surface to decorate the symbol located in the symbol display area depending on other lighting modes. For example, LED5
Reference numeral 05 denotes a full-color LED, which can decorate a symbol located in the symbol display area by turning on, turning off, blinking, changing the brightness, or changing the color.

In such a display device 41, the reel position on the control and the actual reel position usually match, but the reel position on the control and the actual reel position may not match for some reason. Here, the discrepancy between the reel position on the control and the actual reel position will be described with reference to FIG. 45. FIG. 45 is a diagram showing an example of a discrepancy between a controlled reel position and an actual reel position in the display device of the second embodiment.

FIG. 45 (1) is an example of symbol display during variable display in the display device 41. Display device 41
Aligns the large symbol "pig" on the left reel LL, the middle reel CL, and the right reel RL, and swings the display up and down. At this time, the stepping motors of the left reel LL, the middle reel CL, and the right reel RL are controlled so that the control position FP8 moves back and forth on the effective line (one line arranged in the horizontal direction in the center). At this time, the stepping motor may step out due to the inertia of the reel.

For example, FIG. 45 (2) is a display example when the symbol is stopped when the stepping motor is stepped out during the fluctuation display on the display device 41. For control purposes, the display device 41 stops the large symbol "pig" on the effective line at the left reel LL, the middle reel CL, and the right reel RL. However, in the left reel LL, the rotation is insufficient due to the stepping motor step-out, and the large symbol "pig" is shifted by d1 in the rotation under-rotation direction and stopped as compared with the middle reel CL stopped at the normal position. Further, in the right reel RL, due to excessive rotation due to stepping out of the stepping motor, the large symbol "pig" is shifted by d2 in the excessive rotation direction and stopped as compared with the middle reel CL stopped at the normal position.

If the size of such deviations d1 and d2 becomes excessive, the actual stop symbol may be displayed as different from the control stop symbol. For example, when the deviations d1 and d2 reach 7 steps, which is half of the time when the symbol arrangement interval is 14 steps, the stopped symbol becomes unclear.
Further, even if it cannot be said that the amount of deviation in each reel is excessive, the stop symbol may not be clear because the amount of relative deviation between the reels is excessive. For example, in FIG. 45 (2), the left reel LL may be recognized as having the same large symbol “pig” stopped even if it is deviated by d1 from the middle reel CL. Also, the right reel RL
May be recognizable as the same large symbol "pig" is stopped even if it is deviated by d2 from the middle reel CL. However, the left reel LL and the right reel RL are relatively d.
Since the deviation is 1 + d2, it may not be possible to recognize that the same large symbol "pig" is stopped on the left reel LL and the right reel RL.

Therefore, the gaming machine 10 appropriately detects and corrects the amount of deviation between the reel position on the control and the actual reel position. Next, the reel position monitoring process for detecting the amount of deviation between the reel position on the control and the actual reel position will be described with reference to FIG. 46. FIG. 46 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the reel position monitoring process of the second embodiment.

The reel position monitoring process is a process executed during reel rotation by the control unit (CPU311) of the staging control device 300. The reel position monitoring process is, for example, one of the processes executed by the control unit in the reel control process of step D22 of the main process.

[Step D31] The control unit determines whether or not at least one of the reference positions of the left reel LL, the middle reel CL, and the right reel RL has been detected. The reference position of each reel can be detected by the photo sensor included in each reel. The control unit proceeds to step D32 when detecting at least one reference position of the left reel LL, the middle reel CL, and the right reel RL, and ends the reel position monitoring process when the reference position is not detected.

[Step D32] The control unit acquires control position information for the reel that has detected the reference position.
[Step D33] The control unit detects the amount of displacement of the reel that has detected the reference position. When the control position information of the reel that has detected the reference position does not match the reference position, the control unit determines that there is a deviation, and detects the size as the deviation amount. The control unit determines that there is no deviation when the control position information of the reel that has detected the reference position matches the reference position.

[Step D34] The control unit stores the detected deviation amount in a predetermined storage area for each reel. The control unit ends the reel position monitoring process after storing the deviation amount.
Next, a process of correcting the deviation amount detected by the reel position monitoring process will be described. First, a position correction reservation process for determining the pros and cons of position correction for each reel and reserving the position correction when the position correction for each reel is desired will be described with reference to FIG. 47. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the position correction reservation process of the second embodiment.

The position correction reservation process is a process executed during reel rotation by the control unit (CPU311) of the staging control device 300. The position correction reservation process is, for example, step D of the main process.
It is one of the processes executed by the control unit in the reel control process of 22.

[Step D41] The control unit determines whether or not the position correction condition is satisfied. The control unit
If the position correction condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step D42, and if the position correction condition is not satisfied, the position correction reservation process is terminated. The position correction condition is determined by determining the presence or absence of the displacement amount of each reel and its magnitude. In the present embodiment, the control unit assumes that the position correction condition is satisfied if the deviation amount is even one step, but even if the position correction condition is satisfied if the deviation amount is a predetermined step or more (for example, three steps or more). good. When the position correction described later is reserved, the control unit fails the position correction condition regardless of the presence or absence of the deviation amount of each reel and its magnitude in order to eliminate the duplicate reservation.

[Step D42] The control unit determines whether or not the position can be corrected within the fluctuation (the symbol fluctuation in which the deviation amount is detected). For example, whether the control unit has sufficient time to perform position correction, whether there is a rotation operation suitable for performing position correction, or whether verification after position correction is possible. Etc. can be used as the judgment criteria. The control unit proceeds to step D43 when it is determined that the position can be corrected within the fluctuation, and proceeds to step D44 when it is determined that the position cannot be corrected within the fluctuation.

[Step D43] The control unit sets a position correction reservation within the fluctuation and ends the position correction reservation process. As a result, the control unit executes the position correction within the fluctuation.
[Step D44] The control unit sets a position correction reservation within the next fluctuation and ends the position correction reservation process. As a result, the control unit executes the position correction within the next fluctuation. If the control unit cannot correct the position due to the next fluctuation, the control unit corrects the position after the next fluctuation.

Next, a position correction control process for performing correction based on the position correction reserved by the position correction reservation process will be described with reference to FIG. 48. FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the position correction control process of the second embodiment.

The position correction control process is a process executed by the control unit (CPU311) of the staging control device 300. The position correction control process is, for example, one of the processes executed by the control unit in the reel control process of step D22 of the main process. The control unit is the game control device 1.
Since the fluctuation pattern of the next fluctuation is unknown from 00 until the command of the next fluctuation is received, if the position correction is reserved within the fluctuation in the position correction reservation processing, the position correction control process is executed during the fluctuation and the next fluctuation is performed. When the position correction is reserved within, the position correction control process is executed after waiting for the start of the next fluctuation.

[Step D51] The control unit acquires the deviation amount of each reel (left reel LL, middle reel CL, and right reel RL).
[Step D52] The control unit acquires the correctable timing for the fluctuation.

[Step D53] The control unit determines whether or not relative correction is possible in the correction for the fluctuation. The control unit proceeds to step D54 when the relative correction is possible in the correction of the fluctuation, and proceeds to step D55 when the relative correction is not possible.

Relative correction is a correction that corrects the relative position between a reel without deviation and a reel with deviation. The control unit can perform correction without relative correction and correction with relative correction. The correction without relative correction and the correction with relative correction will be described later.

[Step D54] The control unit selects correction with relative correction.
[Step D55] The control unit selects correction without relative correction.
[Step D56] The control unit sets the correction variation selected for each reel to be corrected during the variation, and ends the position correction control process. The correction fluctuation corrects the position with respect to the normal fluctuation by changing the speed switching timing and switching speed.

Here, the correction without relative correction and the correction with relative correction will be described with reference to FIG. 49.
FIG. 49 is a diagram showing an example of a correction without relative correction and a correction with relative correction according to the second embodiment.

FIG. 49 (1) shows an example of correction without relative correction. The amount of deviation of the left reel LL is "+1",
When the deviation amount of the middle reel CL is "0" and the deviation amount of the right reel RL is "-1", the control unit sets the correction amount of the left reel LL to "-1" and the correction amount of the middle reel CL to "0". , The correction amount of the right reel RL is set to "+1", and the deviation amount for each reel is set to "0". In this way, the control unit sets the deviation amount for each reel to "0" in one step in the correction without relative correction. Such correction fluctuation does not give a sense of discomfort to the player when the amount of deviation for each reel is small. On the other hand, such a correction variation may give the player a sense of discomfort when the amount of deviation for each reel is large.
Therefore, the control unit performs correction without relative correction when the deviation amount for each reel is equal to or less than a predetermined threshold value (for example, deviation amount “3”). The deviation amount "+1" indicates that the actual reel position is one step excessive with respect to the control reel position, and the deviation amount "-1" indicates the actual reel with respect to the control reel position. Indicates that the position is one step too short.

FIG. 49 (2) shows an example of correction with relative correction. The amount of deviation of the left reel LL is "+6",
When the deviation amount of the middle reel CL is "0" and the deviation amount of the right reel RL is "0", the control unit sets the correction amount of the left reel LL to "-3" and the correction amount of the middle reel CL to "+3". , The correction amount of the right reel RL is set to "+3", and the relative deviation amount between the reels is set to "0". The control unit performs such correction as a primary correction (relative correction). At this time, the amount of deviation of the left reel LL and the middle reel C
The amount of deviation of L and the amount of deviation of the right reel RL (amount of deviation after primary correction) are all "+3". As a result, the left reel LL, the middle reel CL, and the right reel RL are displaced as a whole, but for the player, there is no deviation between the left reel LL, the middle reel CL, and the right reel RL. Therefore, the display state does not have a sense of discomfort, or the display state has a small sense of discomfort.

Next, the control unit sets the correction amount of the left reel LL to "-3" and the correction amount of the middle reel CL to "-3".
, The correction amount of the right reel RL is set to "-3", and the deviation amount for each reel is set to "0" (deviation amount after secondary correction). The control unit performs such correction as a secondary correction (absolute correction). Such a two-step correction variation does not give a sense of discomfort to the player even when the amount of deviation for each reel is large. In the control unit, the correction without relative correction is set as a one-step correction variation, and the correction with relative correction is set as a two-step correction variation, but the correction without relative correction may be set as a two-step correction variation.

FIG. 49 (3) shows an example of correction without relative correction. The amount of deviation of the left reel LL is "+6",
When the deviation amount of the middle reel CL is "0" and the deviation amount of the right reel RL is "0", the control unit sets the correction amount of the left reel LL to "-3" and the correction amount of the middle reel CL to "0". , The correction amount of the right reel RL is set to "0", and the deviation amount of the left reel LL is set to "+3" (the amount of deviation after the primary correction). The control unit
Such correction is performed as a primary correction (absolute correction).

Next, the control unit sets the correction amount of the left reel LL to "-3" and the correction amount of the middle reel CL to "0".
The correction amount of the right reel RL is "0", and the deviation amount for each reel is "0" (deviation amount after secondary correction).
To. The control unit performs such correction as a secondary correction (absolute correction). Such a two-step correction variation does not give a sense of discomfort to the player even when the amount of deviation for each reel is large.

In addition, although the control unit tried to perform two-step correction fluctuation when the amount of deviation for each reel is large, even if the correction fluctuation of three or more steps is performed in both the correction without relative correction and the correction with relative correction. good. Further, the control unit may perform the correction variation in a plurality of stages, or may perform the correction variation in a single variation, or may divide the correction variation into a plurality of variations.

Next, the correctable timing for each variation will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a diagram showing an example of a correctable timing selection condition of the second embodiment.
The control unit determines whether or not the position can be corrected within the fluctuation in step D42 of the position correction reservation process. Whether or not there is a possible timing can be determined by whether or not the fluctuation pattern or stop pattern (stop symbol) of the fluctuation is suitable as a selection condition. When the control unit can determine that there is a timing that can be corrected during a specific fluctuation, a temporary stop, a re-variation, or a stop within the fluctuation, it can be determined that the position can be corrected within the fluctuation.

For example, it can be determined that the fluctuation pattern C1 and the stop pattern C1 can be corrected at the time of a specific fluctuation within the fluctuation. Similarly, it can be determined that the fluctuation pattern C2 and the stop pattern C2 can be corrected at the time of temporary stop within the fluctuation, and the fluctuation pattern C3 and the stop pattern C can be determined.
3 can be determined to be correctable at the time of re-variation within the fluctuation, and the fluctuation pattern C4 and the stop pattern C4 can be determined to be correctable at the time of stop within the fluctuation.

For the sake of simplicity, the fluctuation patterns and stop patterns that can be applied as selection conditions at the time of specific fluctuation, temporary stop, re-variation, and stop within the fluctuation are listed one by one, but they are suitable. There may be no fluctuation pattern or stop pattern, or there may be two or more.

It should be noted that the time of specific fluctuation, the time of temporary stop, the time of re-variation, and the time of stop are examples of fluctuation modes in which the correction timing of the fluctuation can be set. For example, a specific fluctuation is a predetermined timing in a specific fluctuation mode such as a reach operation, a temporary stop is a predetermined timing during a temporary stop operation, and a re-variation is a re-variation. It is a predetermined timing, and when stopped, it is a predetermined timing during the stop.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can correct the reel deviation detected during the fluctuation display accompanied by the reel rotation until the fluctuation stops. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can reduce the risk of misleading the player to the result mode due to the deviation between the controlled position of the reel and the actual position.

In addition, when setting the correctable timing for the fluctuation, the first half fluctuation of the entire fluctuation display time is often completed. Therefore, the fluctuation mode in which the correctable timing can be set for the fluctuation is the second half fluctuation. The variation mode included in is set.

Further, when it is determined in step D42 of the position correction reservation process that the position correction within the fluctuation cannot be performed, the position correction is carried over to the next fluctuation. Whether or not there is a timing that can be corrected during switching or high-speed fluctuation can be determined by whether or not the fluctuation pattern or stop pattern (stop symbol) at the time of the next fluctuation is suitable as a selection condition. When the control unit can determine that there is a timing that can be corrected at the time of the next fluctuation, the fluctuation start operation, the speed switching, and the high-speed fluctuation, it can be determined that the position can be corrected at the time of the next fluctuation.

For example, it can be determined that the fluctuation pattern N1 and the stop pattern N1 can be corrected at the start of the fluctuation at the time of the next fluctuation. Similarly, it can be determined that the fluctuation pattern N2 and the stop pattern N2 can be corrected in the fluctuation start operation at the time of the next fluctuation, and the fluctuation pattern N3 and the stop pattern N3 can be corrected at the time of speed switching at the time of the next fluctuation. Can be determined, fluctuation pattern N
It can be determined that 4 and the stop pattern N4 can be corrected at the time of high-speed fluctuation at the time of the next fluctuation.

For the sake of simplicity, the fluctuation patterns and stop patterns that can be applied as selection conditions at the time of the next fluctuation start, fluctuation start operation, speed switching, and high-speed fluctuation are listed one by one. There may be no fluctuation pattern or stop pattern, or there may be two or more.

It should be noted that the fluctuation start time, the fluctuation start operation, the speed switching time, and the high speed fluctuation time are examples of the fluctuation mode in which the correction timing at the time of the next fluctuation can be set. For example, when the fluctuation starts, it is the fluctuation start timing, and the fluctuation start operation is the timing of the delayed operation or the temporary reverse rotation operation (hopping action, etc.), and when the speed is switched, the fluctuation changes from low speed to medium speed. Or, it is the switching timing from the medium speed fluctuation to the high speed fluctuation, and the high speed fluctuation is a predetermined timing during the high speed fluctuation.

In addition, when setting the timing that can be corrected in the next fluctuation, since the first half fluctuation of the entire fluctuation display time is before the start, the fluctuation mode in which the correctionable timing can be set in the fluctuation is included in the first half fluctuation. The variation mode is set.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can correct the reel deviation detected during the fluctuation display accompanied by the reel rotation at the time of the next fluctuation start or after the fluctuation start. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can reduce the risk of misleading the player to the result mode due to the deviation between the controlled position of the reel and the actual position.

It should be noted that the gaming machine 10 can control the reel at a lower cost than by preventing step-out by a torqueful stepping motor or by recovering from step-out by feedback control based on the encoder output attached to the stepping motor. The deviation between the position and the actual position can be corrected, and the display device 41 can be compactly integrated.

Up to this point, the correction operation for each reel in the variation display game has been described, but the effect control device 300 performs the reel initialization process when the power of the gaming machine 10 (effect control device 300) is turned on. The reel initialization process is a process of confirming the operation of the stepping motor 502 and confirming the signal detection of the photo sensor 503, displaying a predetermined display mode, and notifying the initialization result.

Here, the reel initialization process for performing the initial operation of the reel will be described with reference to FIG. 51. FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the reel initialization process of the second embodiment. The reel initialization process is a process executed by the control unit (CPU311) of the staging control device 300. The reel initialization process is, for example, one of the processes executed by the control unit in the reel control process of step D22 of the main process.

[Step D61] The control unit determines whether or not the mode at the time of turning on the power (see the main process of the game control device 100) is the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The control unit proceeds to step D62 when the mode at the time of power-on is the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and proceeds to step D64 when the mode is not the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. By receiving a required command from the game control device 100, the control unit can determine whether or not the mode at the time of turning on the power is the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

[Step D62] The control unit determines whether or not the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has ended. The control unit proceeds to step D64 when it detects the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and proceeds to step D63 when it does not detect the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The control unit can detect the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode by receiving a required command from the game control device 100.

[Step D63] The control unit sets a standby operation that waits for the initialization operation. For example, the standby operation is to stop all reels and turn off all LEDs 505. The control unit proceeds to step D62 after setting the standby operation. That is, when the control unit detects the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the control unit waits for the initialization operation until it detects the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

[Step D64] The control unit sets the initialization operation. The initialization operation is an operation in which all reels make one or more rotations and stop at a predetermined symbol. Specifically, the control unit drives the stepping motor 502 of each reel in the forward direction, detects the reference position of the reel from the input signal of the photo sensor 503, and further rotates one rotation in the forward direction to control the reel. Make sure that there is no discrepancy between the upper position and the actual position. Next, the control unit makes one rotation by rotating in the opposite direction and confirms that there is no deviation between the controlled position of the reel and the actual position. When the control unit confirms that the rotation in both directions is normal, the control unit displays a predetermined symbol for each reel and stops.

Note that the control unit executes the initialization operation regardless of whether the power is turned on with power failure recovery or RAM initialization. Therefore, when the power is turned on with power failure recovery, the customer The initialization operation can be executed in a game control state such as waiting, variable display of a special figure game, or big hit. Therefore, the control unit prevents the combination of predetermined symbols that are stopped and displayed for each reel from forming a big hit in the initialization operation. Further, when the variable display is started during the initialization operation, the control unit gives priority to the initialization operation for the reel. Therefore, the control unit notifies the fluctuation state with the special figure 1 changing display 41a and the special drawing 2 changing display 41b. Special figure 1
In the variable display of the game, the variable display of the special figure 2 game is indicated by the blinking display of the special figure 1 variable display 41a, and in the variable display of the special figure 2 game, the variable display of the special figure 2 is displayed 41b. The blinking display of the special figure 1 indicates that the game is being displayed in a variable manner. In addition, the control unit displays Special Figure 1 during change 4
In addition to 1a and the special figure 2 changing display 41b, the hold display 41d and the hold digestion display 41e may also be display modes according to the game control state.

When the power is turned on with RAM initialization, the control unit makes the special figure 1 changing display 41a, the special drawing 2 changing display 41b, the hold display 41d, and the hold digestion display 41e independent of the game control state. The lighting operation may be confirmed by sequentially lighting or the like.

[Step D65] The control unit determines whether or not normal operation has been confirmed by the initialization operation. The control unit proceeds to step D66 when the normal operation is confirmed by the initialization operation, and proceeds to step D67 when the normal operation is not confirmed. In addition, instead of proceeding to step D67 due to the failure of one initialization operation, the control unit may proceed to step D67 when normal operation is not confirmed after a predetermined number of retry operations.

[Step D66] The control unit notifies the confirmation of normal operation by a combination of predetermined symbols to be stopped and displayed for each reel as a result of the initialization operation, and ends the reel initialization process. The control unit starts the fluctuation display operation using each reel from the next fluctuation after confirming the normal operation.

[Step D67] The control unit notifies the abnormal operation by a predetermined display mode as a result of the initialization operation, and ends the reel initialization process.
The gaming machine 10 may execute the initialization operation performed in the initialization process only when the power is turned on. That is, the gaming machine 10 does not perform the initialization operation while the player is playing the game. As a result, since the power of the gaming machine 10 is usually turned on before the opening of the gaming hall, the target that comes into contact with the abnormal operation notification as a result of the initialization operation can be limited to the gaming hall staff.

Here, an example of notification of normal operation and an example of notification of abnormal operation will be described with reference to FIG. 52. Figure 5
2 is a diagram showing an example of result notification of the initialization operation of the reel initialization process of the second embodiment.

FIG. 52 (1) shows an example of notification of normal operation. In the display device 41, the left reel LL displays the symbol "rocket", the middle reel CL displays the large symbol "pig", and the right reel RL displays the symbol "rocket" on the effective line (one line arranged in the horizontal direction in the center). Red 7 "is displayed. At this time, the left reel LL
, The combination of the symbols of each reel of the middle reel CL and the right reel RL does not constitute a big hit. The symbols of the left reel LL, the middle reel CL, and the right reel RL are LED50.
It is illuminated from the back by the white lighting of No. 5 to indicate that it is a normal operation.

FIG. 52 (2) shows an example of notification of abnormal operation. In the display device 41, the left reel LL displays the symbol "rocket", the middle reel CL displays the large symbol "pig", and the right reel RL displays an indefinite symbol on the effective line (one line arranged in the horizontal direction in the center). Is displayed. This is because the control unit is the left reel L
This is a display example when normal operation is confirmed for L and the middle reel CL, and normal operation cannot be confirmed for the right reel RL.

The control unit confirmed normal operation for the left reel LL and the middle reel CL, so the valid line (
The left reel LL displays the symbol "rocket" and the middle reel CL displays the large symbol "pig" on one line (one line arranged in the horizontal direction in the center). However, since the control unit could not confirm the normal operation of the right reel RL, it cannot always display the symbol "Red 7" on the right reel RL. Even in such a case, the combination of the symbols of the left reel LL, the middle reel CL, and the right reel RL does not constitute a big hit. Further, the left reel LL and the middle reel CL, which have been confirmed to operate normally, are informed that the left reel LL and the middle reel CL are operating normally in reel units but are operating abnormally as a whole by turning off the LED 505. The right reel RL is LED5.
Illuminated from the back by the red flashing of 05, it informs that normal operation could not be confirmed.

In addition, the control unit regards the abnormality of the display device 41 as an accessory abnormality error, and the sound output device (speaker 1).
Notification may be performed by the sound output (including voice output) of 9a, 19b), the lamp of the frame decoration device 18, the lighting mode of the LED, the lamp of the board decoration device 46, and the lighting mode of the LED. For example, when the control unit notifies the abnormality of the display device 41 as an accessory abnormality error,
The lighting mode of the lamp of the frame decoration device 18 or the lamp of the board decoration device 46 or the LED can be the same lighting mode as the lighting mode of the LED 505 or the corresponding lighting mode. The lamps and LEDs of the board decoration device 46 include LEDs for decorating the start winning opening 36, LEDs for decorating the special edition introduction prize device 38, LEDs for decorating the center case 40, LEDs for decorating the board staging device 44, and the like. LED for all or one or more of these
It can be the same lighting mode as the lighting mode of 505, or the corresponding lighting mode.

Further, after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed, the control unit may end the abnormal operation notification by the other abnormal operation notification means except for the abnormal operation notification of the display device 41. Even during the notification of the abnormal operation of the display device 41, the control unit normally operates the special figure 1 changing display 41a and the special drawing 2 changing display 41b.

The gaming machine 10 may be used when another error occurs during the notification of abnormal operation of the display device 41.
The abnormal operation notification of the display device 41 can be interrupted with priority given to other error notifications, and the abnormal operation notification of the display device 41 can be continued with priority given to other error notifications. For example, the staging control device 300 sets priorities for a plurality of types of errors prepared in advance, and a serious error (strong error) is notified with priority over a minor error (weak error). .. Therefore, when the abnormal operation notification of the display device 41 takes precedence over another error (for example, a weak error), the gaming machine 10 can give priority to the other error and give the abnormal operation notification of the display device 41. When the abnormal operation notification is inferior to another error (for example, a strong error), the abnormal operation notification can be performed inferior to the other error. for example,
The error in which the notification takes precedence over the abnormal operation of the display device 41 includes an error related to fraud, an error in which normal game cannot be continued, and the like. Errors related to fraud and errors that may prevent normal game from being continued include front frame opening error, game frame opening error, payout error, switch error, big winning opening fraudulent winning error, magnetic error, and general error. There are electric fraudulent winning errors, board radio wave errors, frame radio wave errors, etc. On the other hand, the error that the notification is inferior to the abnormal operation of the display device 41 is an error that does not immediately prevent the normal game from being continued. Errors that do not immediately prevent normal game from being continued include shot ball out errors and overflow errors.

The gaming machine 10 classifies the error that has priority over the abnormal operation notification and the error that is subordinated into a serious error and a minor error, but other classifications may be used. For example, gaming machine 10
Is an error notified by the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 (an error detected by the game control device 100) as an error prioritizing the abnormal operation notification, and the game control device 100 controls the effect as an error inferior to the abnormal operation notification. An error not notified to the device 300 (effect control device 30)
It may be an error detected by 0).

Further, a modified example of the abnormal operation notification will be described with reference to FIG. 53. FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a modified example of the abnormal operation notification of the reel initialization process of the second embodiment. The display device shown as a modification is the left symbol display area 41L, the middle symbol display area 41C, and the right symbol display area 41R.
A shutter that covers (conceals) is provided for each display area and is used for the required display effect. In the display device shown as a modification, this shutter can also be used for notifying an abnormal operation of the reel initialization process.

FIG. 53 (1) shows an example of notification of an abnormal operation. In the display device 41, the left reel LL displays the symbol "rocket", the middle reel CL displays the large symbol "pig", and the right reel RL displays an indefinite symbol on the effective line (one line arranged in the horizontal direction in the center). Is displayed. However, when there is an abnormality in two or more reels, the possibility that the display device 41 displays a symbol combination that is a big hit cannot be excluded in the notification example of such an abnormal operation.

Therefore, the control unit covers the reel displaying the indefinite symbol (in the case of FIG. 53 (1), one right reel RL) with the right shutter 510. As a result, even if the control unit displays the symbols on the reels whose normal operation has been confirmed (in the case of FIG. 53 (1), the left reel LL and the middle reel CL), the display device 41 is a big hit. Can be eliminated from the possibility of displaying.
It should be noted that the reels that have been confirmed to operate normally are informed that the reels are operating normally in reel units but are operating abnormally as a whole by turning off the LED 505.

FIG. 53 (2) shows another example of notification of abnormal operation. In the display device 41, the left reel LL displays the symbol "rocket", the middle reel CL displays the large symbol "pig", and the right reel RL displays an indefinite symbol on the effective line (one line arranged in the horizontal direction in the center). Is displayed. However, when there is an abnormality in two or more reels, the possibility that the display device 41 displays a symbol combination that is a big hit cannot be excluded in the notification example of such an abnormal operation.

Therefore, the control unit uses a reel (FIG. 53) to display a symbol displayed as a result of the initialization operation.
In the case of (2), the left reel LL and the middle reel CL) are covered by the left shutter 511 and the middle shutter 512, respectively. As a result, even if the control unit displays an indefinite symbol for a reel whose normal operation cannot be confirmed (in the case of FIG. 53 (2), there is one right reel RL), the display device 41 displays a symbol combination that is a big hit. The possibility can be ruled out. The reel whose normal operation cannot be confirmed is illuminated from the back by the red blinking of the LED 505, indicating that the normal operation could not be confirmed.

In addition, when another error occurs during the correction fluctuation, the gaming machine 10 can interrupt the correction fluctuation by giving priority to the other error notification, and also gives priority to the correction fluctuation over the other error notification. You can continue. For example, the gaming machine 10 can perform the correction variation in preference to the other error when the correction variation has priority over the other error, and is subordinated to the other error when the correction variation is inferior to the other error. The correction fluctuation can be stopped or interrupted. The gaming machine 10 may execute the canceled correction variation at a required timing, or may restart the interrupted correction variation at a required timing. For example, the gaming machine 10 may wait for the error prioritizing the correction variation to be resolved before executing the canceled correction variation, or may resume the interrupted correction variation.

Next, the gaming machine of the first modification of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 54. FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the reel abnormality monitoring process during variation display of the first modification of the second embodiment.

The reel abnormality monitoring process during variable display is a process executed by the control unit (CPU311) of the staging control device 300. The reel abnormality monitoring process during variable display is, for example, one of the processes executed by the control unit in the reel control process of step D22 of the main process, and is executed during the variable display of the special figure game.

[Step D71] The control unit determines whether or not a reel abnormality has been detected. If there is a reel abnormality detection, the control unit proceeds to step D72, and if there is no reel abnormality detection, the control unit ends the reel abnormality monitoring process during fluctuation display. In the control unit, the reference position of the reel is the photosensor 5 during the fluctuation display.
If it is detected twice or more in 03, it can be determined whether or not the reel abnormality is detected.

[Step D72] The control unit determines whether or not the residual variation display time of the variation during the variation display is larger than the initialization operation time. The control unit proceeds to step D73 when the remaining variation display time is larger than the initialization operation time, and ends the variation display reel abnormality monitoring process when the remaining variation display time is not larger than the initialization operation time.

[Step D73] The control unit sets the initialization operation so as to overwrite the variable display operation.
[Step D74] The control unit confirms the normal return by the initialization operation. The control unit proceeds to step D76 when the normal return by the initialization operation is confirmed, and proceeds to step D75 when the normal return is not confirmed.

[Step D75] Since the control unit does not confirm the normal return, it notifies the abnormal operation and ends the reel abnormality monitoring process during the fluctuation display.
[Step D76] Since the control unit has confirmed the return to normal, the control unit issues a normal operation notification in a temporary stop mode.

[Step D77] The control unit determines whether or not the fluctuation display result of the fluctuation during the fluctuation display is correct. The control unit proceeds to step D78 when the variation display result is a hit, and proceeds to step D79 when the variation display result is not a hit.

[Step D78] The control unit sets a revariable operation that derives a hit from the temporary stop mode of the normal operation notification. It should be noted that the temporary stop mode of the normal operation notification is not a hit, that is, because it is a combination of missed symbols, the temporary stop mode of the normal operation notification does not require a set of re-variable operations.

[Step D79] The control unit determines whether or not the variation display time during the variation display has elapsed. The control unit proceeds to step D80 when the variation display time during the variation display has elapsed, and waits for the variation display time to elapse when the variation display time does not elapse.

[Step D80] The control unit stops and displays the symbol in the temporary stop mode, and ends the reel abnormality monitoring process during the variable display.
As a result, the gaming machine 10 enables a quick return even if there is a problem with the reel control during the fluctuation display. When the display device 41 is notified of the abnormal operation, the gaming machine 10 is used.
May stop the reel control in the fluctuation display from the next time onward.

Next, the gaming machine of the second modification of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 55. FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the reel abnormality monitoring process during variation display of the second embodiment of the second embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 of the modification 2 of the second embodiment executes the same reel abnormality monitoring process during variation display as the modification 1 of the second embodiment. However, the variation display reel abnormality monitoring process of the second embodiment is different from the variation display reel abnormality monitoring process of the second embodiment only in step D72. Steps are the same. Therefore, only step D72a, which replaces step D72, will be described, and the description of the same process will be omitted.

[Step D72a] The control unit determines whether or not the variation display during the variation display has ended.
The control unit proceeds to step D73 when the variation display during the variation display is completed, and ends the variation display reel abnormality monitoring process when the variation display during the variation display is not completed.

As a result, when the variation display result is a hit, the gaming machine 10 makes it possible to execute the initialization operation during the fanfare period during the hit. Further, the gaming machine 10 enables the initialization operation to be executed while the fluctuation is stopped when the fluctuation display result is out of alignment. Further, when the variation display result is out of alignment, the gaming machine 10 enables the initialization operation to be executed during the variation of the next variation even if the variation is started next time.

Next, the reel abnormality return monitoring process executed by the gaming machine of the third modification of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 56. FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the reel abnormality return monitoring process of the third modification of the second embodiment.

The reel abnormality return monitoring process of the third modification of the second embodiment is a process executed during the fluctuation display when the reel abnormality is detected. The reel abnormality return monitoring process of the third modification of the second embodiment is a process executed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the staging control device 300. The reel abnormality return monitoring process is, for example, one of the processes executed by the control unit in the reel control process of step D22 of the main process.

[Step D81] The control unit determines whether or not the reference position has been detected on all reels.
The control unit determines that the initialization operation can be executed when the reference position is detected on all reels, proceeds to step D83, and initializes when at least one of the reels does not detect the reference position. It is determined that the operation is infeasible, and the process proceeds to step D82.

[Step D82] The control unit determines whether or not the variation display time has elapsed. The control unit proceeds to step D81 when the variation display time has not elapsed, and ends the reel abnormality recovery monitoring process when the variation display time has elapsed. That is, the control unit waits for the detection of the reference position on all reels until the variation display time elapses, and if the reference position is not detected on all reels even after the variation display time elapses, the control unit executes the initialization operation. Attempts to execute the initialization operation in the variable display from the next time onward without performing.

[Step D83] The control unit sets the initialization operation so as to overwrite the variable display operation.
[Step D84] The control unit confirms the normal return by the initialization operation. The control unit proceeds to step D85 when the normal return by the initialization operation is confirmed, and proceeds to step D90 when the normal return is not confirmed.

[Step D85] Since the control unit has confirmed the normal return, the normal operation notification is performed in the temporary stop mode.
[Step D86] The control unit determines whether or not the fluctuation display result of the fluctuation during the fluctuation display is correct. The control unit proceeds to step D87 when the variation display result is a hit, and proceeds to step D88 when the variation display result is not a hit.

[Step D87] The control unit sets a revariable operation that derives a hit from the temporary stop mode of the normal operation notification. It should be noted that the temporary stop mode of the normal operation notification is not a hit, that is, because it is a combination of missed symbols, the temporary stop mode of the normal operation notification does not require a set of re-variable operations.

[Step D88] The control unit determines whether or not the variation display time during the variation display has elapsed. The control unit proceeds to step D89 when the variation display time during the variation display has elapsed, and waits for the variation display time to elapse when the variation display time has not elapsed.

[Step D89] The control unit stops and displays the symbol in the temporary stop mode, and ends the reel abnormality return monitoring process.
[Step D90] Since the control unit does not confirm the normal return, the retry operation is set.

[Step D91] The control unit notifies the abnormal operation during the retry operation, and ends the reel abnormality recovery monitoring process.
As a result, the gaming machine 10 enables a quick return even if there is a problem with the reel control during the fluctuation display. Further, the gaming machine 10 makes it possible to solve the problem at an early stage by automatic recovery by trying a retry even if the reel control problem during the fluctuation display is not solved. Such a gaming machine 10 reduces the chances of being unable to play due to a reel control failure, and contributes to improving the operation of the gaming machine 10.

By using the stepping motor 502 as a motor that can be always excited, the gaming machine 10 can safely perform retries during the variable display game.
The gaming machine 10 is supposed to detect the deviation between the position information on the control of the reel and the position information detected from the input signal during the fluctuation display of the symbol. The deviation may be detected during the initialization operation, the fanfare operation, the big hit operation, the ending operation, the customer waiting operation, and the like.

The gaming machine 10 is supposed to correct the detected deviation during the fluctuation display of the symbol, but in addition to or instead of this, during the initialization operation, the fanfare operation, the jackpot operation, and the ending operation, It may be used to correct the deviation during the customer waiting operation or the like.

The gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment (including the modified example) described above has the following features on one side.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes a display device (for example, a display device 41) and a control device (for example, a display device 41).
A game control device 100 and an effect control device 300) are provided. The display device rotates a reel (left reel LL, middle reel CL, right reel RL) having a plurality of symbols on the outer peripheral surface by a stepping motor (stepping motor 502), and the reference position detected by the sensor (photo sensor 503). By stopping the reels at a predetermined position based on the above, it is possible to display the symbol in the variable display game. The control device can control the output signal to the stepping motor based on the input signal from the sensor. Further, the control device includes detection means (for example, effect control device 300, stepping motor 502, photo sensor 503) and correction means (for example, effect control device 300, stepping motor 502, photo sensor 503). The detecting means detects the deviation between the position information on the control of the reel and the position information detected from the input signal during the variation display of the symbol. The correction means corrects the detected deviation until the fluctuation of the symbol stops. (See FIGS. 44 and 46 to 48) (2) The correction means of (1) corrects the deviation when the symbol is temporarily stopped. (See FIG. 50) (3) The correction means of (1) corrects the deviation at the time of re-variation after the symbol is temporarily stopped. (See FIG. 50) (4) The display device of (1) includes two or more reels. (See FIG. 42) The correction means of (5) and (4) correct the relative displacement amount of the reels. (See FIGS. 48 and 49) The correction means of (6) and (4) corrects the relative deviation amount of the reels and then corrects the absolute deviation amount. (See FIGS. 48 and 49) (7) Game machine 1
0 is a display device (for example, display device 41) and a control device (for example, a game control device 10).
0, an effect control device 300). The display device rotates a reel (left reel LL, middle reel CL, right reel RL) having a plurality of symbols on the outer peripheral surface by a stepping motor (stepping motor 502), and the reference position detected by the sensor (photo sensor 503). By stopping the reels at a predetermined position based on the above, it is possible to display the symbol in the variable display game. The control device can control the output signal to the stepping motor based on the input signal from the sensor. Further, the control device includes detection means (for example, effect control device 300, stepping motor 502, photo sensor 503) and correction means (for example, effect control device 300, stepping motor 502, photo sensor 503). The detecting means detects the deviation between the position information on the control of the reel and the position information detected from the input signal until the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped. The correction means corrects the detected deviation at the start of the next fluctuation of the symbol. (Fig. 4)
4. Refer to FIGS. 46 to 48.) The correction means of (8) and (7) correct the deviation at the start of the fluctuation of the symbol. (See FIG. 50) The correction means of (9) and (7) corrects the deviation at the time of switching the fluctuation speed (acceleration, deceleration) after the start of the fluctuation of the symbol. (See FIG. 50) The correction means of (10) and (7) corrects the deviation at the time of high-speed fluctuation (constant speed) after the start of fluctuation of the symbol. (See FIG. 50) (11) (1)
) Or (7), the detection means detects one rotation of the reel from the input signal, and the number of control steps when one rotation of the reel is performed by the stepping motor and one rotation of the reel by the stepping motor.
The deviation is detected by comparing with the number of steps when rotating. (See FIG. 46) (12) The gaming machine 10 includes variable display means (left reel LL, middle reel CL, right reel RL) and control means (
For example, a game control device 100 and an effect control device 300) are provided. The variable display means is
It is possible to execute a variable display game by variablely displaying a plurality of symbols and stopping the variable display of a plurality of symbols. The control means can control the variation display means based on the position detection means (for example, the staging control device 300, the stepping motor 502, the photo sensor 503) capable of detecting the predetermined symbol position. The control means include a deviation detecting means (for example, an effect control device 300, a stepping motor 502, a photo sensor 503) and a correction means (for example, an effect control device 300, a stepping motor 502, a photo sensor 503). The deviation detecting means detects the deviation between the control position information of the variation display means and the position information corresponding to the detection result by the position detecting means. The correction means corrects the detected deviation until the fluctuation of the plurality of symbols stops. (See FIGS. 44 and 46 to 48) (13) The gaming machine 10 has a variable display means (left reel LL, middle reel CL, right reel RL) and a control means (for example, a game control device 100, an effect control device). 300) and. The variable display means can execute a variable display game by displaying a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and stopping the plurality of symbols in a variable manner. The control means can control the variation display means based on the position detection means (for example, the staging control device 300, the stepping motor 502, the photo sensor 503) capable of detecting the predetermined symbol position. The control means are a deviation detecting means (for example, an effect control device 300, a stepping motor 502, a photo sensor 503) and a correction means (for example, an effect control device 300, a stepping motor 502).
, Photo sensor 503) and. The deviation detecting means detects the deviation between the control position information of the variation display means and the position information corresponding to the detection result by the position detecting means. The correction means is
The detected deviation is corrected at the start of the next fluctuation of multiple symbols. (See FIGS. 44, 46 to 48) The deviation detecting means of (14), (12), and (13) detects deviation during a period in which a plurality of symbols are variablely displayed.

(15) The deviation detecting means of (12) and (13) detects deviation outside the period of displaying fluctuations of a plurality of symbols (for example, initialization operation, fanfare operation, jackpot operation, ending operation, customer waiting operation, etc.). do.

The above processing function can be realized by a computer. In that case, a program describing the processing contents of the functions that the gaming machine of the embodiment should have is provided. By executing the program on a computer, the above processing function is realized on the computer. The program describing the processing content can be recorded on a computer-readable recording medium. Computer-readable recording media include magnetic storage devices,
There are optical disks, optical magnetic recording media, semiconductor memories, and the like. The magnetic storage device includes a hard disk device (HDD), a flexible disk (FD), a magnetic tape, and the like. Optical discs include DVD (Digital Versatile Disk), DVD-RAM, and CD (Compact Disk) -RO.
There are M / RW (ReWritable) and the like. MO (Magneto-Optical disk) is used as the magneto-optical recording medium.
And so on.

When distributing a program, for example, a DVD or C on which the program is recorded.
Portable recording media such as D-ROMs are sold. It is also possible to store the program in the storage device of the server computer and transfer the program from the server computer to another computer via the network.

The computer that executes the program stores, for example, the program recorded on the portable recording medium or the program transferred from the server computer in its own storage device. Then, the computer reads the program from its own storage device and executes the processing according to the program. The computer can also read the program directly from the portable recording medium and execute the processing according to the program. Further, the computer can sequentially execute the processing according to the received program each time the program is transferred from the server computer connected via the network.

Further, at least a part of the above processing functions is performed by DSP (Digital Signal Processor), A.
SIC (Application Specific Integrated Circuit), PLD (Programmable Logic De)
It can also be realized by an electronic circuit such as vice).

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the disclosed embodiment as a gaming machine, and is not limited to, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, and the like. It is applicable to all gaming machines that use the game balls of the above, and slot machines that are gaming machines that use medals.

It should also be considered that the disclosed embodiments are exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. Further, each configuration of the above-described embodiment and modification may be applied in combination. The scope of the invention is indicated by the claims rather than the description above.
It is intended to include all changes within the meaning and scope of the claims.

Next, the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment will be described.
It should be noted that the gaming machine 10 having a form different from that of the first to second embodiments, and having the same configuration as that of the first to second embodiments, will be described again with reference numerals.
Hereinafter, embodiments will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
[Third Embodiment]
First, the third embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 57 is a perspective view showing an example of the gaming machine of the third embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is an outer frame (support frame).
It is assembled to 11 so that it can be opened and closed. The game board 30 (see FIG. 58) is housed in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, a glass frame (transparent member holding frame) 15 provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 that covers the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

In addition, lamps, LEDs, etc. are built into the left and right sides of the glass frame 15 for decoration and production, and notification when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a payout abnormality occurs, the lamp, LED, etc. are displayed as an abnormality notification color (for example). Frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (blinking) in red) and sound (blinking)
For example, a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits a sound effect) is provided. moreover,
A speaker (lower speaker) 19b is also provided in the lower part of the front frame 12. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the contents of the abnormality are notified by voice from the speakers 19a and 19b. note that,
A lamp for notifying the payout abnormality may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

Further, in the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper plate (storage plate) 21 for supplying a game ball to a hitting ball launching device (not shown) and a game ball paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the game machine 10 are provided. An outlet 22 for the upper plate to be discharged, a lower plate (receiver) 23 for storing the game balls discharged when the upper plate 21 is full, an operation unit 24 of the hitting ball launching device, and the like are provided. Furthermore, the upper plate 2
An option setting unit (push button) 25 for setting various options by the player is provided on the upper edge portion of 1. A plurality of selection button switches 25a are provided around the upper surface of the option setting unit 25, and a determination button switch 25b is provided in the center of the upper surface of the option setting unit 25. The option setting unit 25 functions as an effect setting unit in which the player sets the effect mode. In this case, the selection button switch 25a functions as an effect button switch for selecting the effect mode, and the decision button switch 25b functions as a decision button switch for determining the effect mode. Further, on the lower right side of the front frame 12, the front frame 1
A keyhole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the 2 or the glass frame 15 is provided.

When the selection button switch 25a functions as an effect button switch, the gaming machine 1
0 can perform an effect in which the player's operation is intervened based on the player's operation received from the selection button switch 25a and the decision button switch 25b. for example,
The effect of intervening the operation of the player includes an effect in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) in the display device (variable display device) 41 (see FIG. 58), and the game machine 10 is displayed on the display device 41. It is possible to operate the character to be displayed and to stop the identification information in the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41.

Further, on the right side of the option setting unit 25, there is a ball lending button 27 that is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and an operation for ejecting a prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. A discharge button 28, a balance display unit (not shown) that displays the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided. In the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment, when the player rotates the operation unit 24, the hitting ball launching device transfers the gaming ball supplied from the upper plate 21 to the gaming area 32 on the front surface of the gaming board 30. Fire towards (see Figure 58). Further, by operating the selection button switch 25a and the decision button switch 25b, the player can, for example, set the volume radiated from the speakers 19a and 19b and set the brightness of the game board 30. ..

Next, the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. 58. FIG. 58 is a front view showing an example of the game board of the third embodiment.
On the surface of the game board 30, a substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is formed. The game area 32 is a resin side case 3 provided at each of the four corners of the game board 30.
It is surrounded by 3 and a guide rail 31. In the game area 32, a center case (game effect component) 40 provided with a display device (variable display device) 41 is arranged substantially in the center. The display device 41 is attached to a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position deeper than the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 is formed so as to surround the periphery of the display area of the display device 41, project forward from the display surface of the display device 41, and make it difficult for the game ball to jump from the surrounding game area 32.

The display device 41 is composed of, for example, a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) and a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube). In the area (display area) where the image on the display screen can be displayed, information related to the game such as a plurality of identification information (special symbol), a character that directs the special figure variation display game, and a background image that enhances the effect of the effect is displayed. .. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variablely displayed (variable display), and a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game is performed. In addition, on the display screen, an image for directing based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, etc.)
Fanfare display image, ending display image, etc.) are displayed.

Further, the upper part of the center case 40 is provided with a board staging device 44 that plays a game by operating. The board effect device 44 can be operated from the state shown in FIG. 58 toward the center of the display device 41.

Further, at a position on the left side of the center case 40 where the game ball does not flow, a light emitting device 80 is provided as one of the board decoration devices 46 (see FIG. 60) described later. Light emitting device 8
0 indicates the state and information related to the push button 25 (state and information such as how the operation of the push button 25 is currently accepted by the staging control device 300) according to the display state, and guides the player to the display state. It is a device for decorating and directing a game, is a kind of display means, and is a directing means including a decorative means.

For example, the mode and content of the effect (for example, the type and movement of the character appearing on the screen of the display device 41), which is mainly displayed by the display device 41, can be hit by the player operating the push button 25. When there is a possibility of switching to a highly reliable display state, the effect control device 300 switches the display state of the light emitting device 80 to a bright and conspicuous display state, and notifies the player of it. Alternatively, in a model in which the operation of the push button 25 is effective only during a specific period, when the operation of the push button 25 is effective, the display state of the light emitting device 80 is switched to a bright and conspicuous display state, and the player is notified of the display state. The details will be described later, but as an example, the light emitting device 80 of the present embodiment has an elliptical front shape and a "P" in the center.
For example, the characters "USH" are basically always visible, and depending on the operation of the light emitting source built in the back side, the front display state (brightness state, color development state, characters, etc.) seen by the player (Including the visual state of the design such as a pattern) can be changed in various ways. In addition, "PU
The character portion of "SH" (for example, the guide portion described later) may not be always visible and may be visible only in a specific display state.

On the right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a normal symbol start gate (normal map start gate) 34 that gives a start condition for the normal map variation display game is provided. The game ball that has won the prize in the normal figure start gate 34 (the game ball that passes through the normal figure start gate 34) is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 59).

Further, on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, there are two general winning openings 3
5 is arranged, and one general winning opening 35 is arranged on the lower right side of the center case 40 and on the right side of the special variable winning device 38 described later. The game balls that have won in these general winning openings 35 are detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 59).

Further, below the center case 40 in the game area 32, there is a start winning opening 36 forming a first starting winning opening (starting winning area) that gives a start condition for the first special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game). (Starting port 1) is provided. The game ball that has won a prize in the start winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 59).

Further, below the starting winning opening 36, an out opening 30a for collecting game balls that did not win in the winning opening or the like is provided.
In addition, it is located below the starting gate 34 in the normal drawing, and on the right side of the center case 40,
A normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting winning area) that gives a start condition for the second special figure variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) is provided. The normal variable winning device 37 (starting port 2) is provided with a movable member 37b that can be opened and converted into a state in which a game ball can easily flow in by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side tilts to the right. 37b is always in a closed closed state (a state disadvantageous to the player) in which the game ball cannot flow in because it is almost vertical.
Then, when the result of the normal figure fluctuation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, the normal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 59) as a driving device rotates so that the upper end side tilts to the right and normally fluctuates. The winning device 37 can be changed to an open state (a state advantageous for the player) in which the game ball easily flows into the winning device 37. The game ball that has won the ordinary variable winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 59). It should be noted that the normally variable winning device 37 may be able to win a prize even in the closed state, and may be harder to win in the closed state than in the open state. The ordinary variable winning device 37 corresponds to an ordinary electric accessory (Public electric).

A flow path 91 through which the game ball can flow down is formed on the right side of the normal variable winning device 37, and the game ball that has not won the normal variable winning device 37 flows downward through the flow path 91. A guide portion 93 is provided below the flow path 91. The guiding portion 93 has an inclined surface whose upper surface 94 descends to the left, and the upper surface 94 catches the game ball flowing downward and guides the game ball to the left where the special variable winning device 38 described later is present. ..

Further, in the lower right of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a special variable winning device (large winning opening) 38 that can be converted into a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which the game ball is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game is arranged. It is set up. The special variable winning device 38 has an opening / closing member (opening / closing door) 3
It has 8c, and the opening / closing member 3 depends on the result of the special figure fluctuation display game as an auxiliary game.
From the closed state in which the 8c closes the large winning opening (a closed state that is disadvantageous to the player), the opening / closing member 38c retracts to an open state that can accept the game ball flowing down the game area 32 (a state that is advantageous to the player). Convert. That is, the special variable winning device 38 includes a large winning opening opened and closed by an opening / closing member 38c driven by a large winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 59) as a driving device, and is provided with a special drawing 1 variation display game and a special figure 2 variation. During the big hit game state (first special game state) due to the result of the display game, or during the small hit game state (second special game state) due to the result of the special figure 2 variable display game, the big winning opening is opened from the closed state. By converting to the above state, the inflow of the game ball into the large winning opening is facilitated, and a predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. Inside the large winning opening (winning area), a large winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 59) is provided as a detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the large winning opening. ..

Further, the special variable winning device 38 includes a guiding flow path for guiding the winning game ball in the winning opening, and a V flow path formed by branching from the guiding flow path. The special variable winning device 38 is provided with a V door at a position that becomes an inflow portion of the V flow path. The V door is a specific area solenoid 38d (see FIG. 59).
It can be changed to a blocking state in which the game ball slides in the front-rear direction to prevent the inflow of the game ball into the V flow path, and a permissible state in which the game ball is retracted backward to allow the inflow of the game ball into the V flow path. It has become. Further, the special variable winning device 38 is provided with a specific area switch 38e (see FIG. 59) for detecting a game ball flowing into the V flow path.

In the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment, the probability state after the end of the special gaming state is not determined by the jackpot symbol, but the gaming ball flows into the V flow path in the special gaming state and the specific area switch. Based on the fact that it is detected by 38e, it is set to be in a high probability state. however,
The gaming machine 10 may have a configuration capable of generating a high probability state after the end of the special gaming state, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game.

Further, the special variable winning device 38 may be provided with a plurality (for example, two) of large winning opening switches 38a. Further, the special variable winning device 38 is not limited to one, and may be provided by two, and when there are a plurality of large winning openings, the large winning opening switch 38a is about one or two for each. , X pieces (see FIG. 59) may be provided as a whole.

Further, a warp opening (warp entrance) 39a is provided on the left side of the center case 40. The game ball that has flowed into the warp flow path from the warp port 39a rolls on the stage in the center case 40, and a part of the game ball is guided to the warp exit 39b. The warp exit 39b is located directly above the starting winning opening 36, and the game ball guided to the warp exit 39b is the starting winning opening 36.
It will be easier to win a prize.

In the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment, of the gaming areas 32 in which the gaming balls flow down, the left area of the center case 40 is the left gaming area, and the right area of the center case 40 is the right gaming area. It is said that. Then, the player adjusts the firing force and launches the game ball to the left game area (so-called left-handed) to start the starting winning opening 36 and the general winning opening 35 (general winning opening on the right side of the special variable winning device 38). You can aim to win a prize (excluding 35), and by launching a game ball to the right game area (so-called right-handed), the normal figure start gate 34 and the normal variable winning device 37,
It is possible to aim for a prize in a special variable prize device 38 or the like.

Further, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, the lower right of the game board 30), the first special figure change display game, the second special figure change display game, and the normal figure start gate 34, which form a special figure change display game, are reached. A batch display device 50 that displays various information and displays a game with a variable display of a normal map triggered by a prize.
Is provided. The detailed description of the batch display device 50 will be omitted.

Next, the control system of the gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. 59. FIG. 59 is a block diagram showing an example of the control system of the gaming machine according to the third embodiment.
The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100, and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that collectively controls a game, and is a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. CPU (Central Processing Unit) unit 110 having an input port, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, and the like, and a CPU.
It is composed of a data bus 140 or the like that connects the unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130.

The CPU unit 110 includes a gaming microcomputer 111 called an amusement chip (IC (Integrated Circuit)) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and serves as a reference for an operating clock, a timer interrupt, and a random number generation circuit of the gaming microcomputer 111. Oscillator circuit that generates the clock
It has a crystal oscillator) 113 and the like. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 are DCs (Di) generated by the power supply device 400.
rect Current) 32V, DC12V, DC5V, etc. are supplied with a predetermined level of DC voltage to enable operation.

The power supply device 400 generates an AC (DC 32V) DC voltage from a 24V AC power supply (AC).
Alternating Current) -DC 12V, DC 5V from DC converter or DC 32V voltage
Ordinary power supply unit 4 having a DC-DC converter or the like that generates a lower level DC voltage such as
It has a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies power supply voltage to the RAM (Random Access Memory) inside the game microcomputer 111 in the event of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and causes and recovers the power failure in the game control device 100. It is provided with a control signal generation unit 430 and the like that generate and output control signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal to be notified.

In the third embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are on a separate board or integrated with the game control device 100, that is, , May be configured to be provided on the main board. Game board 30
And the game control device 100 is to be replaced when the model is changed. Therefore, as in the third embodiment, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are mounted on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board. By providing the above, it is possible to reduce the cost by excluding it from the target of replacement.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 (
In particular, the data supplied to the built-in RAM) and stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or power cutoff. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it drops to 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. This R
When the AM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, a process for forcibly initializing the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200. Is done. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is the game microcomputer 1.
It is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by 11. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a setting value change switch 126 and a setting key switch 127. The set value change switch 126 is, for example, a push switch and detects a pressing operation. The setting key switch 127 inserts a setting key to enable switching between an ON state and an OFF state. The game control device 100 can change the settings related to the game performance, and the settings stored in the RAM are retained even during a power failure or after the power is cut off. For example, the game control device 100 makes it possible to change the hit probabilities of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game according to the setting of 6 stages.

The game control device 100 transitions to a setting change mode in which the setting of the game machine 10 can be changed by turning on the power while the setting key switch 127 is ON and the RAM initialization switch 112 is ON. For example, the game control device 100 makes it possible to cyclically change the settings 1 to 6 by detecting the pressing operation of the setting value change switch 126 while displaying the setting contents on the probability setting value display device 136 in the setting change mode. The probability set value display device 136 is a display device capable of displaying the set value, and is, for example, a one-digit 7-segment LE.
It is D and is mounted on the substrate.

Further, the game control device 100 transitions to the setting confirmation mode in which the setting confirmation of the gaming machine 10 can be performed by turning on the power while the setting key switch 127 is ON and the RAM initialization switch 112 is OFF. .. For example, the game control device 100 displays the setting contents on the probability setting value display device 136 in the setting confirmation mode.

The game microcomputer 111 is a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A.
, Read-only ROM (Read Only Memory) 111B and RA that can be read and written at any time
It is equipped with M111C.

The ROM 111B non-volatilely stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control, and the RAM 111C is a work area of the CPU 111A or a storage area of various signals and random numbers during game control. It is used as. ROM111B or R
As AM111C, an electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable ROM) may be used.

Further, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect content, the presence / absence of the occurrence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a variation pattern random number 1, a variation pattern random number 2, and a variation pattern random number 3 stored as a start memory in the CPU 111A.
Is a table for determining the fluctuation pattern with reference to. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a missed fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is missed, a jackpot fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Further, these pattern tables include tables for determining the latter half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.).
, A table for determining the first half fluctuation pattern, which is a fluctuation pattern before reaching the reach state (first half fluctuation group table, first half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes an advantageous gaming state (special gaming state) for the player when the special result mode is adopted, a part of the plurality of display results has not yet been derived and displayed. Derived A display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the conditions for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state deviates from the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses to the stage before the display result is derived and displayed. Refers to a display mode that does not exist. Further, for example, a state in which variation display is performed by a plurality of variation display areas (so-called full rotation reach) while maintaining a state in which special result modes are aligned is also included in the reach state. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It refers to a display state when at least a part of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition of the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas of the display device. When the variable display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle after display and the result mode is displayed, the left and right variable display areas satisfy the conditions for the special result mode (for example). The state in which the variable display is stopped due to the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the fluctuation display of all the fluctuation display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition of the special result mode in any two of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display regions is satisfied (for example, the same). The state in which the identification information is used, except for the special result mode) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variable-displayed from this reach state.

The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and as reach effects in which the possibility of deriving a special result mode is different (expected value is different), normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), and so on. Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), Special 3
Reach (SP3 reach) and premier reach are set. The expected value increases in the order of "no reach"<"normalreach"<"special 1 reach"<"special 2 reach"<"special 3 reach"<"premierreach". Further, this reach state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived (when it becomes a big hit) in the special figure variable display game. That is, it may be included in the variable display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived (when it is out of order) in the special figure variable display game. Therefore, the state in which the reach state occurs is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, or generates and outputs a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. 10 Control the entire system. Further, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a jackpot random number for determining a hit in a special figure variation display game, a jackpot symbol random number for determining a jackpot symbol, and a variation pattern in a special figure variation display game (various types). Random number generation circuit for generating variation pattern random numbers for determining (including the execution time of the variation display game in reach and variation display without reach), hit random numbers for determining the hit of the normal figure variation display game, etc. And the oscillation signal from the oscillation circuit 113 (original clock signal)
Based on this, it is provided with a clock generator that generates a clock that gives a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 ms (ms)) to the CPU 111A and an update timing of a random number generation circuit.

Further, the CPU 111A is the ROM 111B in the process related to the special figure variation display game.
Acquire any one of the fluctuation pattern tables stored in. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result (hit (big hit or small hit) or miss) of the special figure fluctuation display game and the probability state (normal probability state or high probability) of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current game state. A variable pattern table is selected from a plurality of variable pattern tables based on the state), the operating state (time saving operating state) of the normal variable winning device 37 as the current gaming state, the number of start memories, and the like. To get. Here, CP
The U111A serves as a variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when the special figure variation display game is executed.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, ROM, RAM, input interface, output interface, and the like, and is a payout motor of a payout unit provided in the game machine 10 in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100. Is driven, and control is performed to pay out the prize ball. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball lending request signal from the card unit of the ball lending machine attached to the gaming machine 10.
Control to pay out the loan.

The input unit 120 of the game microcomputer 111 has a start port 1 switch 36 in the start winning port 36.
a, Starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, gate switch 34a in the normal starting gate 34, winning opening switch 35a, large winning opening switch 38 in the special variable winning device 38
a. It is connected to the specific area switch 38e of the special variable winning device 38, and a negative logic signal such as high level 11V and low level 7V supplied from these switches is input and 0.
An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 that converts a V-5V positive logic signal is provided. The detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62 that detects the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine 10 is also input to the proximity I / F 121. Further, the proximity I / F 121 has an input range of 7V-11.
By setting it to V, it is possible to detect an abnormal state such as the lead wire of a sensor or proximity switch being improperly shorted, the sensor or switch being disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire being cut off and floating. It is configured to output an abnormality detection signal.

Explaining the winning opening switch 35a, although the winning opening switch 35a is shown by one block in FIG. 59, a plurality of (n) winning opening switches 35a (three in the present embodiment) are actually used. Is provided on the game board 30, and each signal is input to the proximity I / F 121 with different signal lines. Further, in FIG. 59, the large winning opening switch 38a is shown by one block, but in reality, a plurality of (x) large winning opening switches 38a (three in the present embodiment) are provided on the game board 30. Has been done. And these multiple big prize opening switches 38a
Are connected by different signal lines, or are wired OR on a relay board (not shown) that exists between the switch and the game control device 100 (main board), for example.
It is connected to the game control device 100 by the above method. The panel radio wave sensor 62 and the magnetic sensor 61 described later may also be connected by a plurality of different signal lines, or may be similarly connected to the game control device 100 by a method called wired or.

The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Proximity I / F
Of the outputs of 121, the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, the large winning port switch 38a, and the specific area switch 3
The detection signal of 8e is input to the second input port 123. The signal outputs (outputs from the proximity I / F 121) of the start port 1 switches 36a and 37a, which are the start port switches in FIG. 1, are shown by one signal line in FIG. 59, but are actually shown. There are two.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124. Further, the third input port 124 has a detection signal of a magnetic sensor 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the game machine 10, and a glass frame open detection switch provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10. 63 detection signal, detection signal of main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 of the game machine 10, detection signal of setting value change switch 126, detection signal of setting key switch 127, payout control A touch switch signal (a signal based on the input of the touch switch provided on the operation unit 24) from the device 200 is input.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the game control device 100 to the test firing test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123.

As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12V in addition to the voltage such as 5V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It has become.

For the data held by the second input port 123, the gaming microcomputer 111 asserts the chip enable signal CE (Chip Enable) (effective level), which is not shown, by decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123. It can be read by changing to). The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, the input unit 120 has a detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 and a payout control device 20.
Frame radio wave invalid signal from 0 (signal output based on the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 detecting radio waves), payout busy signal (whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept commands) (Signal indicating abnormal payout), status signal indicating abnormal payout (status signal indicating abnormal payout)
, Shoot ball out switch signal (signal indicating shortage of game balls before payout), overflow switch signal (game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 in a predetermined amount or more (they are full))
1st input port 122 that takes in the out-ball detection switch signal (the signal that is output when the out-ball is detected) and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Is provided.

The out ball detection switch signal is a signal output from the out sensor each time the out sensor (not shown) detects one out ball of the gaming machine 10. For example, the out ball detection switch signal is provided in the discharge flow path (not shown) between the discharge port (not shown) for discharging the game ball (out ball) from the game machine 10 and the out port 30a. The out-ball detection switch signal is a gaming performance (eg, 60,000 out-balls) per predetermined operation (eg, 60,000 out-balls).
It is used for the calculation of the base), and the calculated game performance is displayed on the performance display device 135. The out-ball detection switch signal may be input to the effect control device 300.
In that case, the out-ball detection switch signal may be used for determining the operating state, which is a trigger for switching to the game effect or the customer waiting screen display. For example, the performance display device 135 is a 4-digit 7-segment LED, and can display the gaming performance in decimal or hexadecimal.

Further, the gaming machine 10 may be provided with a vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration so that the detection signal of the vibration sensor switch is input to the first input port 122 or the third input port 124.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the game microcomputer 111 and the like, and the Schmidt buffer 125 is provided with these inputs. It has a function to remove noise from the signal. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 that receive signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET whose noise has been removed by the Schmidt buffer 125 is
It is directly input to the reset terminal provided on the game microcomputer 111 and supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RESET is output directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test firing test device. It is configured to do. again,
The reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RESET is not supplied to the first to third input ports 122, 123, 124 of the input unit 120. The data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset in order to prevent the system from malfunctioning, but the input unit 120 is set immediately before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from each port is discarded by resetting the gaming microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged in a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. The serial communication from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 is a one-way communication in which a signal cannot be input to the game control device 100 from the effect control device 300 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140, and data for notifying the special symbol information of the variable display game to the test firing test device of the accreditation body (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the jackpot, and the like are transmitted via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass production product) installed in a game store. The detection signal of a switch such as a start port switch that does not need to be processed, which is output from the proximity I / F 121, is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, a detection signal that cannot be supplied to the test firing test device as it is, such as the magnetic sensor 61 and the panel radio wave sensor 62, is once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, the gaming machine plays a game. It is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test firing test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 as an error signal indicating that the state cannot be controlled.
The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not go through the buffer, and the like. ing. The port on the relay board 70 has a game microcomputer 11
The chip enable signal CE (not shown) output from 1 is also supplied, and the signal of the port selectively controlled by the chip enable signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with opening / closing data of the large winning opening solenoid 38b connected to the data bus 140 and opening / closing the opening / closing member 38c of the special variable winning device 38 (large winning opening), and the V door of the special variable winning device 38. A first output port 134a for outputting open / close data of the specific area solenoid 38d to be opened / closed, open / close data of the normal electric solenoid 37c for opening / closing the movable member 37b of the normal variation winning device 37, and display data of the performance display device 135 is provided. Has been done.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a second output port 134b for outputting the display data of the probability setting value display device 136. Further, the output unit 130 has a third output port 134c for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the batch display device 50, and the batch display device 50. 4th output port 1 for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED of
34d is provided.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with information about the gaming machine 10, such as jackpot information, from the external information terminal board 71.
A fifth output port 134e for outputting to is provided. The external information terminal board 71 has
It is equipped with a photo relay and can be connected to, for example, an external device (information collection terminal, game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.) installed in a game store, and information about the game machine 10 is transmitted to the external device via the photo relay. Can be supplied to. A part of the information supplied to the external device is output from the fourth output port 134d. Further, a firing permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 134e to the payout control device 200 via the Schmidt buffer 132.

Further, the output unit 130 is a first driver that generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal by receiving open / close data signals of the large winning port solenoid 38b, the specific area solenoid 38d, and the peripheral electric solenoid 37c output from the first output port 134a. (Drive circuit) 138a, batch output from the second driver 138b and fourth output port 134d that output the on / off drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the batch display device 50 output from the third output port 134c. External information signals supplied to external devices such as management devices from the third driver 138c, the fifth output port 134e, and the fourth output port 134d that output the on / off drive signal of the digit line on the current draw side of the display device 50 are external. A fourth driver 138d that outputs to the information terminal board 71 and a fifth driver 138e that receives the display data signal of the performance display device 135 output from the first output port 134a and generates and outputs a drive signal of the performance display device 135 are provided. Has been done.

To the first driver 138a, DC 32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. Further, DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment line of the batch display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit wire is for pulling out the digit wire corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A dynamic drive system in which a current is passed through the anode terminal of the LED via the segment wire by the second driver 138b that outputs 12V, and a current is drawn from the cathode terminal via the segment wire by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in, and the LEDs are turned on. The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71, supplies the external information signal with a level of 12V, so that DC12V is supplied. The buffer 133, the first output port 134a, the first driver 138a, etc.
It may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board. Further, the performance display device 135, or the fifth driver 138e and the performance display device 135 may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the external board (not shown) side instead of the main board. ..

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to an external inspection device 490. Photocoupler 139
Is configured to be capable of bilateral communication so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can send and receive data to and from the inspection device 490 by serial communication. The transmission and reception of such data is
Since it is performed by using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the first to third input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Next, the configuration of the staging control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 60. FIG. 60 is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of the staging control device according to the third embodiment.
The staging control device 300 is an amusement chip (IC) similar to the gaming microcomputer 111.
), And VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for displaying video on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. , Sound source LSI31 that controls the sound output to reproduce various melody, sound effects, etc. from the speakers 19a and 19b.
4 is provided.

The main control microcomputer 311 is a P that stores programs executed by the CPU and various data.
A PROM 321 consisting of a ROM (programmable read-only memory), a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and a FeRAM that can hold stored contents even when power is not supplied in the event of a power failure (FeRAM).
Ferroelectric RAM) 323 and RTC (real-time clock) 338, which is a timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day of the week, time, etc.), are connected. A RAM 311a that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. Further, a WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command (effect command) from the game microcomputer 111, determines the effect content, instructs the VDP 312 about the content of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 of the playback sound, and decorates the lamp. Lighting, drive control of motors and solenoids,
It executes processing such as management of production time.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging / reducing an image. Further, the VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM 326 used for developing and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325.
Is connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By sending and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be sent in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

A vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30 from the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311.
C, a synchronization signal STS that gives the data transmission timing is input. In addition, VDP312
To notify the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of interrupt signals INT0 to n for notifying the processing status such as the end of drawing to the VRAM and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. A wait signal such as WAIT is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by an LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) method. From VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, video data and horizontal synchronization signal HSY
The NC and the vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input, and the image generated by the VDP 312 is displayed on the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313.

An audio ROM 327 in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 314.
The main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are connected via the address / data bus 340. Further, the interrupt signal I is transmitted from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311.
NT is to be input. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and is generated by the sound source LSI 314. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 100. An effect control command signal (effect command) such as a decorative special figure hold number command, a decorative special figure command, a variation command, a stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 via this command I / F331. ). Game microcomputer 111 of game control device 100
Operates at DC 5V, and the main control microcomputer 311 of the staging control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V. Therefore, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function.

Further, the staging control device 300 is a board decoration LE that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40).
D control circuit 332, frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the glass frame 15, game board 30 (center case 40). A board effect movable body control circuit 334 for driving and controlling a board effect device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41) is provided. These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340. Even if the glass frame 15 is provided with a frame effect device provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for effect), and is provided with a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device. good. Further, the above-mentioned light emitting device 80 is, for example, one of the board decoration devices 46, and is a board decoration LED by the main control microcomputer 311.
The drive is controlled via the control circuit 332.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes a selection button switch 25a and a decision button switch 25b of the option setting unit 25 provided on the glass frame 15, and an effect switch that detects the initial position of the motor in the board effect device 44. A function of detecting the on / off state of 47 (effect motor switch) and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and the effect control device 300.
A switch input circuit 336 having a function of detecting the state of the volume control switch 335 and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 is the staging control device 300 having the above configuration.
DC32V for driving a motor or solenoid, a display device 41 consisting of a liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving a motor or LED, in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the motor or electronic components controlled by the DC voltage. DC5 which is the power supply voltage of command I / F331
In addition to V, it is configured to generate a voltage of DC15V for driving a motor, LED, and speaker. Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, DC 3.3V is based on DC 5V.
And a DC-DC converter for generating DC 1.2V is provided in the staging control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in the reset state. In addition, VDP312 (VDPREST signal) and sound source LSI314 are output from the main control microcomputer 311.
It is supplied to the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) and the control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) that drive and control lamps, motors, and the like, and these are reset. Further, a cooling FAN 45 for cooling various parts of the gaming machine 10 is connected to the staging control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the power of the staging control device 300 is turned on. Further, the circuit board constituting the staging control device 300 corresponds to a sub control board (also referred to as a sub board).

Next, the game control performed in these control circuits will be described. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, a random value for hit determination in the normal figure is extracted based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal figure start gate 34, and the ROM 111B Compared with the judgment value stored in, the process of judging the hit / miss of the normal figure fluctuation display game is performed. Then, on the general symbol display unit of the batch display device 50,
After displaying the identification symbol (identification information) in a variable manner for a predetermined time, the process of displaying the normal map variable display game in which the identification symbol (identification information) is stopped and displayed is performed. When the result of this normal figure fluctuation display game is a hit, a special result mode corresponding to each of the first hit stop symbol to the third hit stop symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display unit, and the normal electric solenoid 37c is displayed. It is operated and controlled to open the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37 for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds) as described above.
That is, the game control device 100 serves as a conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). If the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is out of order, the control is performed to display the result mode of the out-of-order symbol in the normal symbol symbol display unit.

Further, the start winning prize (starting memory) is memorized based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning opening 36, and based on this starting memory, the first special figure variation display game The random value for big hit determination is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and the process of determining the hit / miss of the first special figure variation display game is performed. Further, the starting memory is memorized based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variable winning device 37, and based on this starting memory, for the jackpot determination of the second special figure variation display game. The random value is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and the process of determining the hit / miss of the second special figure variation display game is performed.

Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command, effect command) including the determination results of the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game to the effect control device 300. do. Then, after displaying the identification symbol (identification information) in the special figure 1 symbol display unit and the special figure 2 symbol display unit of the batch display device 50 for a predetermined time, a process of displaying the special figure variation display game to be stopped and displayed is performed. .. That is, the game control device 100 is the game area 3.
It serves as a game control means for controlling the progress of a variable display game based on a prize in the start winning area (starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37) of the game ball flowing down 2.

Further, the effect control device 300 performs a process of displaying the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game on the display device 41 based on the control signal from the game control device 100. Further, the effect control device 300 performs processing such as setting the effect state, outputting sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, and controlling light emission of various LEDs based on the control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as an effect control means for controlling the effect related to the game (variable display game, etc.).

Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit or a small hit, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 displays a special result mode or small on the special figure 1 symbol display unit or the special figure 2 symbol display unit of the batch display device 50. In addition to displaying the hit result mode, a process of generating a special game state or a small hit game state (that is, a process of executing a special game or a small hit game) is performed. In the process of generating a special gaming state due to the result of the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game being a big hit, the CPU 111A is, for example, a special variation winning device 38 by a large winning opening solenoid 38b. The opening / closing member 38c of the game is opened, and control is performed to allow the game ball to flow into the large winning opening. In this special gaming state, the CPU 111A is subject to either a condition that a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls wins in the large winning opening, or a predetermined opening time elapses from the opening of the large winning opening. One round is to open the big winning opening until it is achieved, and this is continued (repeated) a predetermined number of rounds, and control (cycle game) is performed. In addition, a small hit game state is generated due to the result of the first special figure variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) or the second special figure variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) being a small hit. In the process, the CPU 111A controls, for example, to open the opening / closing member 38c of the special variable winning device 38 by the large winning opening solenoid 38b so that the game ball can flow into the large winning opening.

The opening / closing operation pattern (opening / closing operation mode) of the large winning opening performed in these small hit game states is, for example, an operation of keeping the opening / closing member in the open state for 200 msec four times at 1500 msec intervals. As described above, the game control device 100 serves as a large winning opening opening / closing control means for controlling the opening / closing of the large winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of order, the CPU 111A controls to display the out-of-order result mode on the special figure 1 symbol display unit and the special figure 2 symbol display unit of the batch display device 50.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the end of the special game state based on the inflow of the game ball into the V flow path described above or based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. It has become. In this high probability state, the probability of a hit result in the special figure fluctuation display game is higher than that in the normal probability state. Further, regardless of the high probability state based on the result mode of either the first special figure fluctuation display game or the second special figure fluctuation display game, the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure Both variable display games are in a high probability state.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a time saving state (specific game state, high probability state in the normal figure) as a game state after the end of the special game state, for example, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. .. In this time-saving state, the probability of hitting the result of the normal map fluctuation display game (normal map probability) is higher than the normal probability (normal map low probability state), for example, "0" (
It is possible to make it a high-probability state. As a result, the opening time of the normal variable winning device 37 per unit time is controlled to be longer than that in the case where the normal variable winning device 37 is in the low probability state of the normal figure. Here, in the normal variable winning device 37 in the present embodiment, the probability of normal drawing is, for example, "0" so as not to open the movable member 37b in the normal gaming state.
Is set to.

Further, in the time saving state, the execution time of the normal map fluctuation display game (normal map fluctuation time) is, for example, 500 msec, and the normal map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is, for example, 600 msec. When the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened as a result of the normal fluctuation display game, the opening time (normal power opening time) and the number of times of opening (for example) of the first hit stop symbol
500msec x 1 time), 2nd hit stop symbol opening time (normal power opening time) and number of times of opening (for example, 1700msec x 2 times), 3rd hit stop symbol opening time (normal power opening time) and opening Number of times (
For example, it can be set to 1700 msec x 3 times).

It should be noted that the execution time, the normal figure stop time, the normal electric opening number of times, and the normal electric opening time of the normal figure fluctuation display game are appropriately set so as to control the normal fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 to be in a time-saving operation state. For example, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the execution time (normal map fluctuation time) of the above-mentioned normal map fluctuation display game to be a second variable display time shorter than the first variable display time. (For example, 10000 msec is 1000 msec). Further, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the normal map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map fluctuation display game to be the second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 msec). 70
4 ms). Further, in the time saving state, when the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened as a result of the normal fluctuation display game, the opening time (normal power opening time) is set to the normal state (normal figure low probability state). It is possible to control the second opening time to be longer than the first opening time (for example, 100 msec is 1352 msec). Further, in the time saving state, the number of times the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened (the number of times the normal electric power is opened) is larger than the number of times the first opening (for example, twice) for the result of one hit of the normal fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the number of times (for example, 4 times) to the second opening number. Further, in the time saving state, the probability of hitting the result of the normal map fluctuation display game (normal figure probability) is the normal probability when the normal operation state (normal figure low probability state, for example, 0 /).
Higher probability than 251 or 1/251) (normal high probability state, eg 251 /
It can be 251 or 250/251).

In the time saving state, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened by changing any one or more of the normal fluctuation time, the normal stop time, the number of times the normal power is opened, the normal power opening time, and the normal power probability. Try to extend the conversion time longer than usual. It is also possible to set multiple types of time saving states that change different things. Further, in the case of a hit, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first open mode and the second open mode may be different. Further, the high probability state and the time saving state can be generated independently, both can be generated at the same time, or only one can be generated. In addition, the time saving state is the normal power support state (during normal power support or electric support).
It can also be called.

Next, the configuration of the light emitting device 80 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 64. FIG. 61 is a front view showing an example of the light emitting device of the third embodiment. FIG. 62 is a side sectional view and an exploded perspective view showing an example of the light emitting device of the third embodiment. Of FIGS. 62, FIG. 62 (a) is a side sectional view of the light emitting device, and FIG. 62 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the light emitting device. FIG. 63 is a diagram showing an example of an LED substrate and a first sheet constituting the light emitting device of the third embodiment. FIG. 63
Of these, FIG. 63 (a) is a front view showing the LED substrate, and FIG. 63 (b) is a front view showing the first sheet. FIG. 64 shows the second sheet and the third sheet constituting the light emitting device of the third embodiment.
It is a figure which shows an example of a sheet. Of FIGS. 64, FIG. 64 (a) is a front view showing the second sheet, and FIG. 64 (b) is a front view showing the third sheet.

As shown in FIG. 61, for example, in the figure showing the light emitting device 80 and its components, as an example of the color arrangement, the shaded area is shown to be yellow, and the black-painted part (the part that looks black) is red. Indicates that there is, and the other filled areas (parts that appear gray) indicate black or a color close to black (whiteish black, reddish black, yellowish black, etc.). Red is basically brighter than black (that is, black actually looks darker), but here, in order to express a strong impression of red, red is illustrated in black and black is gray. Illustrated with a fill.

As shown in FIGS. 62 (a) and 62 (b), the light emitting device 80 is a component LE.
The D substrate 81, the smoke plate 82, the diffusion plate 83, the first sheet 84, the second sheet 85, the third sheet 86, and the front plate 87 (for example, a smoke lens) are sequentially arranged so as to be stacked from the rear side to the front side. .. These components have an elliptical shape with the same outer shape as shown in FIG. 62 (b).
For example, the front plate 87 arranged in the foreground has a larger outer diameter than the other components, and the remaining components have substantially the same outer diameter.

Further, as shown in FIG. 62A, for example, these components are attached to the case 88 and the rear with respect to the opening 40b (window for the light emitting device 80) formed in the member 40a constituting the front surface of the center case 40. It is attached by a face plate 89. The case 88 is a tubular member that covers the outer peripheral surface of each of the laminated components, and is a member that prevents and holds the movements and rotations of the components in the vertical and horizontal directions. The case 88 is fixed to the member 40a by, for example, screwing. The rear surface plate 89 is a plate-shaped member that is fixed to the rear surface of the case 88 by, for example, screwing, and prevents each component from falling off rearward. In the center of this rear plate 89,
An opening 89a for deriving the wiring (electrical wiring between the LED board 81 and the staging control device 300) (not shown) connected to the LED board 81 is formed.

The front view of FIG. 61 shows the light emitting device 80 (when not emitting light) in the opening 40b visible to the player who is the observer on the front side (left side in FIG. 62A). However, the light emitting device 8
The mounting structure of 0 is not limited to the configuration of FIG. 62 (a), and may be a configuration in which each component is arranged and mounted on the front side of the member 40a constituting the center case 40, for example. Any configuration may be used as long as the components are arranged and mounted in the order shown in FIG. 62.

Further, among the components of the light emitting device 80, the smoke plate 82, the diffusion plate 83, and the first sheet 8
4. The second sheet 85 and the third sheet 86 are closely arranged, for example, as shown in FIG. 62 (a). Between the LED board 81 and the smoke plate 82, or between the third sheet 86 and the front plate 87
A predetermined interval is provided between them as necessary.

The smoke plate 82, the diffusion plate 83, the first sheet 84, the second sheet 85, and the third sheet 86 can each have an arbitrary thickness. The thickness of each of the smoke plate 82, the diffuser plate 83, the first sheet 84, the second sheet 85, and the third sheet 86 may or may not be the same. In FIG. 62 (a), for convenience, the smoke plate 82, the diffuser plate 83, the first sheet 84, the second sheet 85, and the third sheet 86 have a thickness (for example, 1 mm) about half that of the case 88. Although shown, it may have a sheet-like thickness (for example, 100 μm).

Further, the smoke plate 82, the diffusion plate 83, the first sheet 84, the second sheet 85, and the third sheet 86 can be made of any material as long as they can exhibit their respective functions.
Smoke plate 82, diffuser plate 83, first sheet 84, second sheet 85, and third sheet 86
Each material may or may not be all the same (eg, vinyl chloride).

As shown in FIG. 63 (a), the LED substrate 81 is a full-color LED 81 as a light emitting source.
A substrate on which, for example, six a (specifically, a chip on which a plurality of LEDs having different emission colors that realize full color are mounted) are mounted. The irradiation direction of the light emitted from each full-color LED 81a (the direction of the central axis of the emitted luminous flux) is the front side (the left side in FIG. 62A).
It is set in the direction toward the player, and is set in the direction toward the player who is the observer who is directly in front of the light emitting device 80 from the rear part. Each full-color LED 81a is controlled by the staging control device 300 as an element constituting the board decoration device 46 shown in FIG. 60, and can emit light in various colors. In this embodiment, the light emitting state (state of whether or not the light is emitted) and the light emitting color of the six full-color LEDs 81a are all controlled to be the same. Further, in the LED substrate 81 (particularly, the full-color LED 81a), the color of the output light is white or a first color other than white (for example, yellow).
Of multiple colors, including a second color that is neither white nor a complementary color of the first color (eg red), a complementary color of the first color (eg bluish purple), and a complementary color of the second color (eg bluish green). It is a light emitting means that can be switched to any of them. In this embodiment, the light emitting means is a full-color LED 81a.
Therefore, any emission color other than the above five colors (for example, orange, green, blue, purple, etc.) can be output. The first color and the second color are not limited to yellow and red, and other colors may be used. However, in the following, as an example, the first color is yellow and the second color is red. do.

The smoke plate 82 is a translucent plate-shaped member that appropriately reduces the amount of transmitted light with respect to the amount of incident light, and is a light emitting device 80 when non-light emission (a state in which the full-color LED 82 does not emit light).
It is a member for reducing the visibility from the front of the. Without this smoke plate 82, for example, the full-color LED 81a on the LED substrate 81 will be visible to the player from the front to some extent when it is not emitting light, and there will be a problem that the player will be excited (or a problem that the decorativeness and the effect will be reduced). There is a possibility, but due to the presence of the smoke plate 82, the smoke plate 82 when not emitting light
The rear side will appear dark enough to prevent such problems.

The diffuser plate 83 is a plate-shaped member that diffuses the light incident from the full-color LED 81a and transmits it to the front side. Without this diffuser 83, a full-color LE would be given to the player on the front side.
Only the 6 positions where the D81a is placed appear to shine brightly locally, which may cause a problem that the player is excited about (or a problem that the decorativeness and the effect of the effect are reduced), but the diffusion plate Since the light emitted from the full-color LED 81a is diffused to the whole and irradiated to the next first sheet 84 due to the presence of the 83, such a problem is prevented.

As shown in FIG. 63 (b), the first sheet 84 has a first spot color transmission portion 84a for transmitting the first color (yellow), and a portion excluding the first spot color transmission portion 84a is transparent. It is a sheet-like member having a transparent portion 84b, which is a transparent portion. The first special color transmission portion 84a emits only the light component (light biased to a specific wavelength) that looks like the first color (yellow) when viewed from the front side even when the light emitting means on the rear side emits light, for example, white. It mainly has the property of transmitting. To put it the other way around, the first
When the light emitting means on the rear side emits light in the complementary color (blue-purple) of the first color, the spot color transmitting portion 84a hardly transmits the light of this complementary color (blue-purple) so that it looks black or gray from the front side. Has properties. On the other hand, the transparent portion 84b allows the light from the light emitting means on the rear side to pass through to the front side without limitation. In the first sheet 84 of this specific example, the shaded area (hatched portion) in FIG. 63 (b), that is, the guide information area having a shape including the character “PUSH” located in the center and its outline, and the guide information area thereof. The decorative design area representing various large and small stars scattered around the guidance information area is the first feature transmission portion 84a.

As shown in FIG. 64 (a), the second sheet 85 has a second spot color transmission portion 85a that allows the second color (red) to pass through, and the portion excluding the second spot color transmission portion 85a is transparent. It is a sheet-like member having a transparent portion 85b, which is a transparent portion. The second special color transmission portion 85a emits only the light component (light biased to a specific wavelength) that looks like the second color (red) when viewed from the front side even when the light emitting means on the rear side emits light, for example, white. It mainly has the property of transmitting. To put it the other way around, the second
When the light emitting means on the rear side emits light in the complementary color (blue-green) of the second color, the spot color transmission portion 85a of the above transmits almost all the light of this complementary color (blue-purple) so that it looks black or gray from the front side. Has the property of not. On the other hand, the transparent portion 85b allows the light from the light emitting means on the rear side to pass through to the front side without limitation. In the second sheet 85 of this specific example, the black-painted area (black-painted portion) in FIG. 64 (a), that is, the guide information area in the shape of the character “PUSH” located at the center is the second feature transparent. It is a part 85a. And this second sheet 8
The second spot color transmission portion 85a of 5 is the first spot color transmission portion 84a of the first sheet 84 described above.
"P" in the guidance information area (the area of the shape including the character "PUSH" and its outline) in
It is formed in a position and size that overlaps with the position of the character "USH" (that is, a predetermined position in the above-mentioned contour) without deviation.

Here, the first spot color transmission portion 84a of the first sheet 84 and the second spot color transmission portion 85a of the second sheet 85 are formed at positions where they do not overlap except at least a part. in this case,
The part of the character "PUSH" that does not include the outline overlaps with each other, but the other parts do not overlap with each other. As a result, in the non-overlapping portion, when the light emitting means (full color LED81a) emits light in a color that is not the complementary color of the target color to be transmitted without being affected by the spot color transmitting portion of one side (particularly). When the light emitting means emits light with the target color to be transmitted), the observer (for example, a player) on the front side of the light emitting device 80 can clearly and vividly observe the color and shape of the light emitted.

In addition, although there may be an embodiment in which the first spot color transmission portion 84a of the first sheet 84 and the second spot color transmission portion 85a of the second sheet 85 are entirely overlapped with each other, in order to obtain the above-mentioned effects, the present implementation is carried out. As in the specific example of the form, it is preferable that at least one spot color transmitting portion is formed at a position where it does not overlap with the other spot color transmitting portion except for a part.

As shown in FIG. 64 (b), the third sheet 86 is a transmission limiting portion 86 that limits the transmission of light.
It is a sheet-like member having a and the portion excluding the permeation limiting portion 86a is a transparent portion 86b which is a transparent portion. Similar to the smoke plate, the transmission limiting portion 86a has a property of reducing the amount of transmitted light with respect to the amount of incident light (a property of reducing the amount of light without being biased to light of a specific wavelength). On the other hand, the transparent portion 86b allows the light from the light emitting means on the rear side to pass through to the front side without limitation. In FIG. 64 (b), the gray-looking portion (filled portion) is the transmission limiting portion 86a, and the other white-looking portion (white portion) is the transparent portion 8.
It is 6b. In the third sheet 86 of this specific example, as shown in FIG. 64 (b), a guide information area having a shape including the character “PUSH” located at the center and its outline, and scattered around the guide information area. The decorative design area representing stars of various sizes is the transparent portion 86b.

The transparent portion 86b of the third sheet 86 is formed at a position where the first spot color transmission portion 84a of the first sheet 84 and the second spot color transmission portion 85a of the second sheet 85 are overlapped with each other without any deviation. .. That is, in the third sheet 86, the transparent portion 86b is formed in the region overlapping the first spot color transmission portion 84a and also in the region overlapping the second spot color transmission portion 85a. In this way, the transparent part 86 overlaps with at least one of the special color transmission parts.
Due to the formation of b, the first spot color transmission portion 84a or the second spot color transmission portion 8
The light transmitted through 5a is observed by an observer in front of the light emitting device 80 via the transparent portion 86b, and depending on the emission color of the light emitting means (full-color LED 81a), the first spot color transmitting portion 8
The shape and color development of the 4a or the second spot color transmission portion 85a can be clearly seen by the observer.

The front plate 87 is a transparent or translucent plate-shaped member, and is mainly a member for protecting the front surface of the light emitting device 80. The front plate 87 may function as a smoke plate that finally limits and adjusts the amount of light output from the light emitting device 80 to the front side, and may further enhance visibility. Further, the front plate 87 refracts the light output from the light emitting device 80 to the front side, and the light emitting device 80
(In particular, a portion corresponding to the above-mentioned guidance information area or decorative design area) may function as a lens that is slightly enlarged to show, and the visibility may be further enhanced.

Next, the operation of the light emitting device 80 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 and 65 to 67 described above. FIG. 65 is a diagram showing an example of the operation and display state (state visible to the observer) of the light emitting device of the third embodiment. 66 and 67 are views showing an example of another display state of the light emitting device of the third embodiment. Of FIGS. 65, FIG. 65 (a) is a diagram showing the operation of the light emitting device (display state of each part with respect to the light emitting color of the light emitting means), and FIG. 65 (b) is a case where the light emitting color of the light emitting means is white. It is a figure which shows an example of the display state of the light emitting device of. Of FIGS. 66, FIG. 66A is a diagram showing an example of the display state of the light emitting device when the light emitting color of the light emitting means is red, and is shown in FIG. 66 (a).
b) is a diagram showing an example of a display state of a light emitting device when the light emitting color of the light emitting means is yellow.
Of FIGS. 67, FIG. 67 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display state of the light emitting device when the light emitting color of the light emitting means is blue-green, and FIG. 67 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display state of the light emitting means. It is a figure which shows an example of the display state of a light emitting device in the case of.

First, when the light emitting means of the light emitting device 80 (in this case, six full-color LEDs 81a; the same applies hereinafter) is in a non-light emitting state (light-off state), the light-emitting means is in a light-emitting state (lighting state). Although it looks considerably darker as a whole, it can be seen by an observer (usually a player) in which the light emitting device 80 is on the front side, for example, as shown in FIG. 61, due to external light such as lighting of the game hall.

In detail, it means a region corresponding to a guide portion (a region corresponding to a guide information region of the first sheet 84) on the front surface (front surface) of the light emitting device 80, and means a region having a shape including the characters “PUSH” and its outline. ) Appears as red "PUSH" characters with a yellow outline, and means a design portion (a region corresponding to a decorative design region representing a star on the first sheet 84) on the front surface (front surface) of the light emitting device 80. ) Looks yellow, and the background part (front) on the front (front) of the light emitting device 80
It means the area excluding the guide part and the design part. The same applies below) appears black. At the time of non-light emission, the guide portion and the design portion may be darkened (that is, appear black) and buried in the background portion so that they cannot be seen well.

Next, when the light emitting means of the light emitting device 80 emits white light, that is, FIG. 6
As described in the second row from the top of 5 (a), the light emitting device 80 is visible to the observer on the front side. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 65 (b), the guide portion on the front surface of the light emitting device 80 appears as a red “PUSH” character with a yellow outline, and the design portion on the front surface of the light emitting device 80 is yellow. The background portion in front of the light emitting device 80 appears to be whitish black (for example, light gray). The display state at the time of white light emission shown in FIG. 65 (b) is not sufficiently shown in the drawing, but is brighter overall (higher brightness) than the non-light emission state shown in FIG. 61, and the guide portion and the design. The vividness (saturation) of the red and yellow colors of the part is also high. Then, the characters and contours of "PUSH" in the guide part and the part representing the star in the design part are clearly visible from the background part. That is, the guide part and the design part look clearly different from the background part.

Next, when the light emitting means of the light emitting device 80 emits red light (second color), the light emitting device 80 is on the front side as described in the third stage from the top of FIG. 65 (a). Seen by the observer in. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 66 (a), the guide portion on the front surface of the light emitting device 80 appears as a red “PUSH” character with a yellow outline, and the light emitting device 80
The design part in front of the light emitting device 80 looks like a yellow star, and the background part in front of the light emitting device 80 looks like reddish black. The display state when the red light is emitted as shown in FIG. 66 (a) is not sufficiently shown in the drawing, but is generally brighter (higher in brightness) than when the light is not emitted as shown in FIG. 61, and the guide portion and the design. The vividness (saturation) of the red and yellow colors of the part is also high. And, "PUS" of the guide part
The letter "H" and the outline and the part representing the star in the design part are clearly visible from the background part.
That is, the guide part and the design part look clearly different from the background part.

In the case of this red emission, the character part of "PUSH" in the guide part is red, whereas the background part is reddish black and the hue is close, so the character "PUSH" in the guide part is. There is a concern that this part will be buried in the background part and become difficult to see, but in the embodiment of the present application, the guide part is "
Since there is a contour portion that looks yellow in addition to the character portion of "PUSH", such a problem is avoided, and the observer can clearly recognize the character "PUSH" of the guide portion mainly by the yellow contour portion. Further, in the case of this red light emission, the display state of the light emitting device 80 has many red or reddish colored parts as a whole, and the yellow star and the yellow outline of the character "PUSH" are conspicuous in it. It is a display state with a color scheme different from other display states, and is a display state that gives the observer a unique impression different from other display states.

Next, when the light emitting means of the light emitting device 80 emits yellow light (first color), the light emitting device 80 is on the front side as described in the fourth stage from the top of FIG. 65 (a). Seen by the observer in. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 66 (b), the guide portion on the front surface of the light emitting device 80 is seen as a red “PUSH” character with a yellow outline, and the light emitting device 80 is used.
The yellow star in the design part in front of is buried in the background part and can hardly be seen, and the light emitting device 80
The background area in front of is yellowish black. The display state at the time of yellow light emission shown in FIG. 66 (b) is not sufficiently shown in the drawing, but is generally brighter (higher brightness) than the non-light emission state shown in FIG. 61, and the guide portion and the design. The vividness (saturation) of the red and yellow colors of the part is also high. However, although the character part of "PUSH" in the guide part is clearly visible in red, for example, the part representing the star in the design part is a similar color to the background part (yellow and yellowish black), so it is buried in the background part. I can't see it clearly. Since the outline of the character "PUSH" in the guide portion is also similar in color to the background portion, it cannot be clearly seen when compared with other display states such as when white light is emitted.

In the case of this yellow light emission, the display state of the light emitting device 80 has many yellow or yellowish colored parts as a whole, and the red "PUSH" characters are conspicuously visible in the other parts. It is a display state with a color scheme different from the display state, and is a display state that gives the observer a unique impression different from other display states.

Next, when the light emitting means of the light emitting device 80 emits blue-green (complementary color of the second color) to emit blue-green light, as described in the fifth row from the top of FIG. 65 (a), light is emitted. The device 80 is visible to the observer on the front side. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 67 (a), the light emitting device 8
The guide part in front of 0 is seen as the character "PUSH" (red is not visible) with a conspicuous yellow outline, and the design part in front of the light emitting device 80 looks like a yellow star, and the light emitting device 80.
The background area in front of is black or gray (strictly turquoise black or gray). The display state at the time of blue-green emission shown in FIG. 67 (a) cannot be sufficiently represented in the drawing, but
Compared to the non-luminous state shown in FIG. 61, the overall brightness is high (high brightness), and the vividness (saturation) of yellow in the guide portion and the design portion is also high. Then, the outline of the character "PUSH" in the guide part and
The part of the design that represents the star floats from the background and is clearly visible. That is, the guide part and the design part look clearly different from the background part.

In the case of this blue-green light emission, the part of the character "PUSH" of the guide part (the part of the second special color transmission part 85a of the second sheet 85) transmits red, whereas the light emission means Since the emission color is blue-green, which is a complementary color of red, the part of the character "PUSH" (the part other than the outline) of the guide part hardly develops red color (that is, the red color is significantly reduced). In addition, the part of the character "PUSH" in the guide portion (second feature transmission portion 8 of the second sheet 85).
The amount of light transmitted through the part 5a) is also significantly reduced, and this part looks dark (looks black or gray). As a result, the guide portion on the front surface of the light emitting device 80 has a conspicuous yellow outline.
It appears as the characters "USH" (red is invisible).

Further, in the case of this blue-green light emission, the display state of the light emitting device 80 has many parts having a color close to black or gray as a whole, and yellow stars and yellow outlines of the characters "PUSH" are conspicuous in them. It is a display state with a color scheme different from other display states, and is a display state that gives the observer a unique impression different from other display states.

Next, when the light emitting means of the light emitting device 80 emits blue purple (complementary color of the first color) to emit blue purple light, as described in the sixth row from the top of FIG. 65 (a), light is emitted. The device 80 is visible to the observer on the front side. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 67 (b), the light emitting device 8
The guide part in front of 0 is seen as a red "PUSH" character without a yellow outline, and the star in the design part in front of the light emitting device 80 is black or gray and almost invisible, and the background in front of the light emitting device 80. The site appears black or gray (strictly bluish-purple black or gray). The display state at the time of blue-purple light emission shown in FIG. 67 (b) is not sufficiently shown in the drawing, but is generally brighter (higher brightness) than that at the time of non-light emission shown in FIG. 61, and the guide portion is The vividness (saturation) of red is also high.

However, in the case of this bluish-purple light emission, although the part of the character "PUSH" in the guide part is clearly visible in red, the part representing the star in the design part and the outline part of the guide part (the first sheet 84 of the first sheet 84). While the special color transmission portion 84a transmits yellow, the emission color of the light emitting means is bluish purple, which is a complementary color of yellow, so that these portions hardly develop color as yellow (that is,). The amount of yellow color is significantly reduced), and the amount of light transmitted through these parts (the part of the first characteristic color transmitting portion 84a of the first sheet 84) is also significantly reduced, and these parts appear dark (black or gray). Looks like). As a result, in the guide portion in front of the light emitting device 80, only the characters "PUSH" excluding the outline appear as red, and the other portions including the star in the design portion appear to be the same black or gray as the background portion, and the background. It is buried in the part and almost invisible.

In the case of this bluish-purple light emission, the display state of the light emitting device 80 has many parts that appear black or gray as a whole, and the red "PUSH" characters (without outline) are conspicuously visible in them. It is a display state with a color scheme different from the display state of, and is a display state that gives the observer a unique impression different from other display states.

Next, with respect to the control of the light emitting device 80 performed by the staging control device 300, FIGS. 68 and 69.
Will be described using. FIG. 68 is a diagram showing a flowchart of light emission control processing in the staging control device of the third embodiment. FIG. 69 is a diagram showing an example of the display pattern table of the third embodiment.

As described above, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 performs a process of displaying the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game, and at the same time, the effect state. And processing to control the light emission of various LEDs. In the process of this processing, the control unit (CPU311) of the staging control device 300 is subjected to the light emitting device 8.
When it is time to switch the control state of 0 to a specific display pattern, the display pattern after switching is determined and the light emission control process shown in FIG. 68 is executed.

In this light emission control process, a determined display pattern after switching is acquired (step D71), and a light emission mode corresponding to the acquired display pattern is determined (step D72).
The determined light emission mode is set (step D73), and this light emission control process is terminated.

The storage means (for example, PROM 321) of the staging control device 300 stores, for example, a display pattern table having the contents shown in FIG. 69. That is, the display pattern 1 is a light emitting mode in which the light emitting means of the light emitting device 80 continuously emits light in white, and the display pattern 2 is a light emitting mode in which the light emitting means of the light emitting device 80 continuously emits light in red. 3 is a light emitting mode in which the light emitting means of the light emitting device 80 continuously emits light in yellow, display pattern 4 is a light emitting mode in which the light emitting means of the light emitting device 80 continuously emits light in blue-green, and display pattern 5 emits light. It is a light emitting mode in which the light emitting means of the apparatus 80 continuously emits light in blue-purple, and the display pattern 6
Is a light emitting mode in which the light emitting means of the light emitting device 80 is alternately switched between blue-green and blue-purple at predetermined time intervals to emit light, and the display pattern 7 sets the light emitting means of the light emitting device 80 to the first color (yellow) and the second. colour(
It is a light emission mode in which a plurality of colors other than red) are sequentially switched at predetermined time intervals to emit light.
The display pattern table set as information is stored.

Then, in step D72, the light emitting mode is determined based on this display pattern table, and the determined light emitting mode is set in step D73. Further, for example, the decoration control process (decorative control process) periodically performed by the control unit (CPU311) of the staging control device 300 in the main process.
In (not shown), a process of controlling the light emitting means (full color LED 81a) of the light emitting device 80 so as to have the set light emitting mode is performed based on the setting made in step D73.

As a result, when the display pattern 1 is acquired and switched to the display pattern 1 in step D71, the light emitting device 80 is in the display state (display state as shown in FIG. 65B) at the time of white light emission described above. Similarly, when the display pattern 2 is switched to, the display state at the time of red emission described above (display state as shown in FIG. 66A) is obtained, and when the display pattern 3 is similarly switched to, the display state described above is performed. When the display state at the time of yellow light emission (display state as shown in FIG. 66 (b)) is reached and the display pattern 4 is similarly switched, the display state at the time of blue-green light emission described above (FIG. 67 (a)). (Display state as shown in FIG. 67), and when the display pattern 5 is similarly switched, the display state at the time of blue-purple light emission described above (display state as shown in FIG. 67 (b)).
become.

Further, when the light emitting device 80 is similarly switched to the display pattern 6, the display state during the above-mentioned blue-green light emission (display state as shown in FIG. 67A) and the above-mentioned blue-purple light emission are obtained. The display state (display state as shown in FIG. 67B) is alternately repeated at predetermined time intervals.

Further, the light emitting means (full color LED 81a) of the light emitting device 80 similarly has a display pattern 7.
When switched to, for example, as shown at the bottom of FIG. 69, purple → blue purple → blue → blue green → green → purple → blue purple ... The operation of sequentially switching to multiple colors and emitting light is performed cyclically. As a result, the light emitting device 80 has a display state at the time of purple light emission (not shown), a display state at the time of blue-purple light emission described above, a display state at the time of blue light emission (not shown), and a display state at the time of blue-green light emission described above. And, the operation of sequentially switching to the display state at the time of green emission (not shown) is repeated at predetermined time intervals.

Here, the display state at the time of purple light emission, the display state at the time of blue light emission, and the display state at the time of green light emission of the light emitting device 80 will be omitted, but the same principle as other display states (that is, that is).
The principle is that one of the adjacent regions shining in the same color system is buried and cannot be seen, and if the emission color of the light emitting means is a complementary color to the specific color transmitted through the spot color transmission portion, the color development of the region of the spot color transmission portion is remarkably These display states are display states having a color scheme different from that of other display states, and give the observer a unique impression different from other display states.

Then, among the above display patterns, if the emission color is switched at predetermined time intervals (for example, at intervals of 0.1 to 0.5 seconds) like the display pattern 6 and the display pattern 7, the light emitting device 8
Each part of 0 (guide part, design part, background part) looks like glittering, which makes an impression on the observer, and enhances the decorative effect and the directing effect. In particular, when the light emitting color is sequentially switched at short intervals and the light emitting means emits light to a large number of colors as in the display pattern 7.
It is possible to give the observer of the light emitting device 80 an impression similar to that of rainbow-colored light emission (rainbow light emission).

Further, when the light emitting mode is such that the display pattern 7 is switched to a plurality of colors excluding specific colors (for example, the first color and the second color) at predetermined time intervals, the specific color (for example, the first color) is used. The display state (for example, the display state of the display patterns 2 and 3) when the light is emitted in the color (1) and the second color) is clearly different from the display state, and the player is notified of the state depending on the difference in the display state. It is possible to effectively suggest reliability.

Here, the staging control device 300 serves as a control means for causing the light emitting means of the light emitting device to emit light in various light emitting modes corresponding to the various display patterns described above. Further, the effect control device 300 can switch the emission color of the light emitting means to a plurality of different emission colors including the complementary color of the first color and the complementary color of the second color at predetermined time intervals to cause the light emitting means to emit light. Make possible control measures.

In addition, the display of the guide part (character and outline of "PUSH") has the operation guidance function of the push button 25, and the display of the design part (design of the star) is the display of the guide part (character and outline of "PUSH").
It has a function of producing the display of (for example, a function of suggesting the reliability of a big hit and raising the player's expectation).

As described above, the light emitting device 80 of the present embodiment has a simple configuration in which the light emitting means is provided only on the back surface side (rear side), but the front display state (brightness state, color development) as seen from the player. The state, including the visual state of the design such as characters) can be changed in various ways. For example, all the designs that are normally visible (the letters "PUSH" and the star design) may be shown to the player, or only some of the designs (the letters "PUSH") may be shown to the player. , The overall emission color can be varied in various ways, and the color development of some designs (characters of "PUSH") can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to provide a high-performance and inexpensive light-emitting device that can effectively notify the player of the state, decorate the gaming machine, and produce the game in various display states. In addition, the decorative effect and staging effect of the gaming machine can be enhanced, and the fun of the gaming can be improved.

For example, in the case of the decorative display device described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-37891, a light source unit (LED substrate) is arranged so as to face each end face of a plurality of display plates (light guide plates). Further, since it is naturally necessary to dispose a light emitting means as a backlight on the back surface side of the plurality of display plates, the number of assembly steps is large and a considerable cost increase is unavoidable. On the other hand, the light emitting device 80 of the present embodiment has a back surface side corresponding to a backlight (on the other hand).
Since it is configured to include only the light emitting means on the rear side) and can be easily assembled by simply stacking and holding each component in a laminated state, it can be realized at a significantly low cost.

Further, FIG. 70 is a diagram showing a hue circle composed of 24 hues. As can be seen from the figure of this color wheel, the first color (yellow) and the second color (red) are not in a complementary color relationship in which the angles of the first color (yellow) and the second color (red) are 180 degrees with each other. The first color (yellow) and the second color (red) are, in detail, 2
There is a relationship of medium-difference hues in which the hue difference is 4 to 7 in a hue circle composed of four hues (particularly red and yellow are in a relationship where the angle in the hue circle is at a position of 90 degrees). For example, yellow is a medium-difference hue to red, not a complementary color (red's complementary color is blue-green). In the light emitting device 80 of the present embodiment, the first spot color transmission portion 84a of the first sheet 84 and the second spot color transmission portion 85a of the second sheet 85 have a first color (yellow) having such a relationship. ) And the second color (red) are transmitted through each of them, so that it is possible to realize a variety of display modes having a particularly high decorative effect as described above.

It should be noted that there may be a configuration in which the first color and the second color are set to colors that are complementary colors to each other, for example, yellow and bluish purple, but in this case, even when the light emitting means emits light with the first color. Even when the second color is used for light emission, the color development is deteriorated because one of the colors has a complementary color relationship with the light emission color of the light emitting means. On the other hand, if the first color and the second color are set to, for example, colors having a medium difference hue relationship as in the present embodiment, the light emitting means is made to emit light in the first color. In both cases, when the second color is used for light emission, the color development does not deteriorate because both colors do not have a complementary color relationship with the light emission color of the light emitting means.

Further, the first color and the second color are not limited to yellow and red, and may be set in reverse (the first color is red and the second color is yellow), and a combination of these two colors may be used. However, it is not limited to the combination of yellow and red. For example, even if you set the first color and the second color by combining orange and green, yellow and bluish green, green and blue, bluish green and bluish purple, blue and purple, bluish purple and red, purple and orange, etc. good.

Further, the display pattern and the corresponding light emission mode are not limited to the display patterns 1 to 7 shown in FIG. 69, and a plurality of display patterns including, for example, a first color (yellow), a second color (red), and white are included. It may be a display pattern of a light emitting mode in which colors are sequentially switched at predetermined time intervals to emit light. Further, for example, as a display pattern selected when the operation of the push button 25 is invalid, a display pattern for turning off the full-color LED 81a, which is a light emitting means, or a part of the full-color L
There may be a display pattern that turns off the ED81a to reduce the overall brightness. In this embodiment, for example, a model in which the operation of the push button 25 is always valid is assumed, and in the case of such a model, it is not necessary to notify that the operation of the push button 25 is invalid. However, even in a model in which the operation of the push button 25 is always effective, for example, as a display pattern selected in a state of low reliability that becomes a big hit, a display pattern that completely turns off the full-color LED 81a, which is a light emitting means, or a plurality of display patterns. Some of them are full color L
There may be a display pattern that turns off the ED81a to reduce the overall brightness.

Further, the aspect of the decorative design area is not limited to that representing a star, and may be various modes such as a pattern representing roses, cherry blossoms, branches and leaves according to the production theme of the game board.

[Modification 1 of the third embodiment]
Next, the light emitting device 80 of the first modification of the third embodiment will be described. In the light emitting device 80 of the first modification of the third embodiment, the spot color transmission portion constituting the design representing the star is formed not as the first sheet 84 but as the second spot color transmission portion 85a of the second sheet 85. Has the characteristics of
Other configurations are the same as those in the third embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals as those of the third embodiment will be used for description.

First, the features of the configuration of the light emitting device 80 of the present modification 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 72. FIG. 71 is a front view showing the light emitting device of the first modification of the third embodiment. FIG. 72 is a diagram showing a first sheet and a second sheet constituting the light emitting device of the first modification of the third embodiment. Of FIGS. 72, FIG. 72 (a) is a front view showing the first sheet, and is shown in FIG. 72 (a).
b) is a front view showing the second sheet.

As shown in FIG. 72 (a), the first sheet 84 of the present modification 1 has a first spot color transmission portion 84a that allows the first color (yellow) to pass through, and the first spot color transmission portion 84a. It is a sheet-like member in which the removed portion is a transparent portion 84b which is a transparent portion. First feature transmission site 84
a has the property of mainly transmitting only the light component (light biased to a specific wavelength) that appears to be the first color (yellow) when viewed from the front side, even when the light emitting means on the rear side emits light in white, for example. Have. Conversely, the first spot color transmission portion 84a has this complementary color (blue-purple) so that when the light emitting means on the rear side emits light with the complementary color (blue-purple) of the first color, it looks black or gray from the front side. ) Has the property of hardly transmitting light. On the other hand, the transparent portion 84b allows the light from the light emitting means on the rear side to pass through to the front side without limitation. In the first sheet 84 of this modification 1, FIG. 72 (a)
), The shaded area (hatched portion), that is, only the guide information area having the shape including the character "PUSH" located in the center and its outline is the first feature transmission portion 84a.

Further, as shown in FIG. 72 (b), the second sheet 85 of the present modification 1 has a second color (red).
It is a sheet-like member having a second special color transmission portion 85a through which the second special color transmission portion 85a is transmitted, and a portion excluding the second special color transmission portion 85a is a transparent portion 85b which is a transparent portion. The second special color transmission portion 85a emits only the light component (light biased to a specific wavelength) that looks like the second color (red) when viewed from the front side even when the light emitting means on the rear side emits light, for example, white. It mainly has the property of transmitting. Conversely, in the second spot color transmission portion 85a, the light emitting means on the rear side is a complementary color (blue-green) of the second color.
It has the property of hardly transmitting the light of this complementary color (blue-green) so that it looks black or gray from the front side when it emits light. On the other hand, the transparent portion 85b allows the light from the light emitting means on the rear side to pass through to the front side without limitation. In the second sheet 85 of this modification 1, FIG. 7
In 2 (b), the black-painted area (black-painted part), that is, the "P" located in the center.
The guide information area in the shape of the characters "USH" and the decorative design area representing various large and small stars scattered around the guide information area are the second feature transmission portion 85a. The guidance information region (region in the shape of the character "PUSH") in the second spot color transmission portion 85a of the second sheet 85 is the guidance in the first spot color transmission portion 84a of the first sheet 84 described above. It is formed in a position and size that overlaps the position of the character of "PUSH" (that is, a predetermined position in the above-mentioned contour) in the information area (the area of the shape including the character of "PUSH" and its outline) without deviation. There is.

Next, the operation of the light emitting device 80 of the present modification 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 and 73 to 75 described above. FIG. 73 shows the operation and display state of the light emitting device of the first modification of the third embodiment (
It is a figure which shows an example of the state (a state visible to an observer). 74 and 75 are diagrams showing an example of another display state of the light emitting device of the first modification of the third embodiment. Of FIG. 73, FIG. 73 (a)
Is a diagram showing the operation of the light emitting device (display state of each part with respect to the light emitting color of the light emitting means), and is shown in FIG. 7.
3 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display state of a light emitting device when the light emitting color of the light emitting means is white. Of FIGS. 74, FIG. 74 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display state of the light emitting device when the light emitting color of the light emitting means is red, and FIG. 74 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display state of the light emitting means, and FIG. 74 (b) shows the light emitting color of the light emitting means is yellow. It is a figure which shows an example of the display state of the light emitting device in the case. Of FIGS. 75, FIG. 75 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display state of the light emitting device when the light emitting color of the light emitting means is blue-green, and FIG. 75 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display state of the light emitting means, and FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the display state of a light emitting device in the case of.

First, when the light emitting means (six full-color LEDs 81a) of the light emitting device 80 is in the non-light emitting state (lighting state), it is considerably darker as a whole as compared with the case where the light emitting means is in the light emitting state (lighting state). Although it can be seen, it can be seen by an observer (usually a player) who has the light emitting device 80 on the front side as shown in FIG. 71, for example, by external light such as lighting of the game hall. Specifically, the light emitting device 80
The guide portion (the area corresponding to the guide information area of the first sheet 84, which means the area having the shape including the characters "PUSH" and its outline; the same applies hereinafter) on the front surface (front surface) of the above has a yellow outline. It appears as red "PUSH" characters, and the design part (meaning the area corresponding to the decorative design area representing the star of the second sheet 85; the same applies hereinafter) on the front surface (front surface) of the light emitting device 80 looks red and emits light. The background portion (meaning the region excluding the guide portion and the design portion; the same applies hereinafter) on the front surface (front surface) of the device 80 appears black.

Next, when the light emitting means of the light emitting device 80 emits white light, that is, FIG. 7
As described in the second row from the top of 3 (a), the light emitting device 80 is visible to the observer on the front side. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 73 (b), the guide portion on the front surface of the light emitting device 80 appears as a red “PUSH” character with a yellow outline, and the design portion on the front surface of the light emitting device 80 is red. The background part in front of the light emitting device 80 looks whitish black. The display state at the time of white light emission shown in FIG. 73 (b) is not sufficiently shown in the drawing, but is brighter overall (higher brightness) than the non-light emission state shown in FIG. 71, and the guide portion and the design. The vividness (saturation) of the red and yellow colors of the part is also high. Then, the characters and contours of "PUSH" in the guide part and the part representing the star in the design part are clearly visible from the background part. That is, the guide part and the design part look clearly different from the background part.

Next, when the light emitting means of the light emitting device 80 emits red light (second color), the light emitting device 80 is on the front side as described in the third stage from the top of FIG. 73 (a). Seen by the observer in. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 74 (a), the guide portion on the front surface of the light emitting device 80 appears as a red “PUSH” character with a yellow outline, and the light emitting device 80
The red star in the design part in front of is buried in the background part and can hardly be seen, and the light emitting device 80
The background area in front of is reddish black. The display state when the red light is emitted as shown in FIG. 74 (a) is not sufficiently shown in the drawing, but is generally brighter (higher in brightness) than when the light is not emitted as shown in FIG. 71, and the guide portion and the design. The vividness (saturation) of the red and yellow colors of the part is also high. However, although the letters "PUSH" and the outline part (especially the yellow outline part) of the guide part are clearly visible from the background part, for example, the part representing the star of the design part is the same color as the background part (red and reddish). Because it is tinged with black), it is buried in the background and cannot be seen clearly.

In the case of this red emission, the character part of "PUSH" in the guide part is red, whereas the background part is reddish black and the hue is close, so the character "PUSH" in the guide part is. There is a concern that this part will be buried in the background part and become difficult to see, but in the embodiment of the present application, the guide part is "
Since there is a contour portion that looks yellow in addition to the character portion of "PUSH", such a problem is avoided, and the observer can clearly recognize the character of "PUSH" in the guide portion mainly by the yellow contour portion. Further, in the case of this red light emission, the display state of the light emitting device 80 has many red or reddish colored portions as a whole, and the yellow outline of the characters "PUSH" is conspicuously visible in the red or reddish colored portion. It is a display state with a color scheme different from other display states, and is a display state that gives the observer a unique impression different from other display states.

Next, when the light emitting means of the light emitting device 80 emits yellow light (first color), the light emitting device 80 is on the front side as described in the fourth stage from the top of FIG. 73 (a). Seen by the observer in. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 74 (b), the guide portion on the front surface of the light emitting device 80 appears as a red “PUSH” character with a yellow outline, and the light emitting device 80
The star in the design part in front of is clearly seen in red, and the background part in front of the light emitting device 80 looks yellowish black. The display state at the time of yellow light emission shown in FIG. 74 (b) is not sufficiently shown in the drawing, but is generally brighter (higher brightness) than the non-light emission state shown in FIG. 71, and the guide portion and the design. The vividness (saturation) of the red and yellow colors of the part is also high. Then, the characters and contours of "PUSH" in the guide part and the part representing the star in the design part are clearly visible from the background part. That is, the guide part and the design part look clearly different from the background part.

In the case of this yellow light emission, the display state of the light emitting device 80 has many yellow or yellowish colored parts as a whole, and red stars and the characters "PUSH" are conspicuously visible in them.
It is a display state with a color scheme different from other display states, and is a display state that gives the observer a unique impression different from other display states.

Next, when the light emitting means of the light emitting device 80 emits blue-green (complementary color of the second color) to emit blue-green light, as described in the fifth row from the top of FIG. 73 (a), light is emitted. The device 80 is visible to the observer on the front side. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 75 (a), the light emitting device 8
The guide part in front of 0 is seen as the letters "PUSH" (red is invisible) with a conspicuous yellow outline, and the star in the design part in front of the light emitting device 80 is black or gray and almost invisible, and the light emitting device. The background area in front of 80 appears black or gray (strictly bluish-greenish black or gray). The display state at the time of blue-green light emission shown in FIG. 75 (a) is not sufficiently shown in the drawing, but is brighter overall (higher brightness) than that at the time of non-light emission shown in FIG. 71, and the guide portion is The vividness (saturation) of yellow is also high.

However, in the case of this blue-green light emission, the outline part of the character "PUSH" in the guide part floats from the background part and is clearly visible in yellow, but the part representing the star in the design part and the "PU" in the guide part.
The character portion of "SH" (the portion of the second special color transmission portion 85a of the second sheet 85) transmits red, whereas the emission color of the light emitting means is blue-green, which is a complementary color of red. For,
These parts hardly develop red color (that is, the red color develops significantly less).
In addition, the amount of light transmitted through these portions (the portion of the second feature transmission portion 85a of the second sheet 85) is also significantly reduced, and these portions appear dark (black or gray). As a result, only the outline of the character "PUSH" appears as yellow in the guide portion in front of the light emitting device 80, and the other portion including the star in the design portion appears in the same black or gray as the background portion, and the background portion. It is almost invisible because it is buried in.

In the case of this blue-green light emission, the display state of the light emitting device 80 has many parts having a color close to black or gray as a whole, and the yellow outline of the characters "PUSH" is conspicuously visible in the other parts. It is a display state with a color scheme different from the display state, and is a display state that gives the observer a unique impression different from other display states.

Next, when the light emitting means of the light emitting device 80 emits blue purple (complementary color of the first color) to emit blue purple light, as described in the sixth row from the top of FIG. 73 (a), light is emitted. The device 80 is visible to the observer on the front side. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 75 (b), the light emitting device 8
The guide portion in front of 0 appears as a red "PUSH" character without a yellow outline, the design portion in front of the light emitting device 80 appears as a red star, and the background part in front of the light emitting device 80 is black or gray ( Strictly speaking, it looks bluish-purple black or gray). This Figure 7
The display state at the time of blue-purple light emission shown in 5 (b) is not sufficiently shown in the drawing, but is brighter overall (higher brightness) than the non-light emission state shown in FIG. 71, and the guide portion and the design portion. The vividness (saturation) of the red color is also high. Then, the characters "PUSH" in the guide part and the part representing the star in the design part are clearly visible from the background part.

However, while the outline portion of the character "PUSH" in the guide portion (the portion of the first spot color transmission portion 84a of the first sheet 84) transmits yellow, the emission color of the light emitting means is yellow. Since it is bluish purple, which is the complementary color of, this part hardly develops color as yellow (that is, the color development of yellow is significantly reduced), and this part (first spot color transmission portion 8 of the first sheet 84).
The amount of light transmitted through the part (4a) is also significantly reduced, and this part looks dark (looks black or gray). As a result, the guide portion on the front surface of the light emitting device 80 is "PUSH" excluding the contour.
Only the characters of are seen as red, and the above-mentioned outline part looks like the same black or gray as the background part, and is buried in the background part so that it is almost invisible.

In the case of this bluish-purple light emission, the display state of the light emitting device 80 has many parts that appear black or gray as a whole, and red stars and the characters "PUSH" (without outline) are conspicuously visible in them. , The display state has a different color scheme from the other display states, and gives the observer a unique impression different from the other display states.

Even with the light emitting device 80 of the first modification described above, various display states as described above can be realized while having a simple and low cost configuration. However, the color and appearance of the star in the design portion are different from those of the light emitting device 80 of the third embodiment. The light emitting device of the present invention is not limited to the specific examples described above, and the size and shape of the outer shape, the content of the design including characters (that is, the shape, size and arrangement of the spot color transparent portion of each sheet), and the color scheme (that is, , Setting the color of the spot color transmission portion of each sheet), etc., various deformations may occur. Also, it is not limited to push button guidance,
It can be widely applied for decoration, staging, or information notification. Further, the light emitting means of the light emitting device is not limited to the full-color LED. For example, the type of emission color may be a light emitting means limited to a predetermined number such as a first color, a second color, and a complementary color of the second color. Further, it has a plurality of monochromatic emission sources that emit light in a plurality of different colors such as a first color, a second color, and a complementary color of the second color, and the emission color of any one of these emission sources. By turning on the light emitting source of
It may be a light emitting means for switching the light emitting color.

[Modification 2 of the third embodiment]
Next, the second modification of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 76. FIG. 76 is a side sectional view and an exploded perspective view showing an example of the light emitting device of the second modification of the third embodiment. Of FIGS. 76, FIG. 76 (a) is a side sectional view of the light emitting device, and FIG. 76 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the light emitting device. The light emitting device 80a of the second modification of the third embodiment is the same in that it has the same components as the light emitting device 80 of the third embodiment, but the arrangement order of some components is different. Is different.

Further, as shown in FIG. 61, for example, in the figure showing the light emitting device 80a and its components, as an example of the color arrangement, the shaded portion is shown to be yellow, and the black-painted portion (the portion that looks black) is red. The other filled areas (parts that appear gray) indicate black or a color close to black (whiteish black, reddish black, yellowish black, etc.). Red is basically brighter than black (that is, black actually looks darker), but here, in order to express a strong impression of red, red is illustrated in black and black is gray. Illustrated with a fill.

As shown in FIGS. 76 (a) and 76 (b), the light emitting device 80a is a component L.
The ED substrate 81, the smoke plate 82, the third sheet 86, the second sheet 85, the first sheet 84, the diffusion plate 83, and the front plate 87 (for example, a smoke lens) are sequentially arranged so as to be stacked from the rear side to the front side. .. As a result, the light emitting device 80a can produce a display effect different from that of the light emitting device 80.

Further, the light emitting device 80a makes the density of the sheet color of the third sheet 86, the second sheet 85, and the first sheet 84 lighter than that of the third sheet 86, and darkens the second sheet 85 and the first sheet 84 in this order. It may be set to. The light emitting device 80a obtains a suitable display effect by setting the sheet color densities of the third sheet 86, the second sheet 85, and the first sheet 84 in this way. Further, the light emitting device 80a sets the range in which the density of the sheet color is sequentially set from the light color to the dark color in the third sheet 8.
6. Not limited to the range of the second sheet 85 and the first sheet 84, the smoke plate 82 and the third sheet 86.
, 2nd sheet 85, 1st sheet 84 range, 3rd sheet 86, 2nd sheet 85, 1st sheet 84, diffusion plate 83 range, or smoke plate 82, 3rd sheet 86, 2nd sheet 85.
, The first sheet 84 may be extended to the range of the diffusion plate 83.

The front view of FIG. 61 shows a light emitting device 80a (when not emitting light) in the opening 40b visible to the player who is the observer on the front side (left side in FIG. 76A). However, the mounting structure of the light emitting device 80a is not limited to the configuration shown in FIG. 76A, and for example, each component may be arranged and mounted on the front side of the member 40a constituting the center case 40. Any configuration may be used as long as the components are arranged and mounted in the order shown in FIG. 76.

Further, among the components of the light emitting device 80a, the smoke plate 82, the third sheet 86, the second sheet 85, the first sheet 84, and the diffusion plate 83 are closely attached as shown in FIG. 76 (a), for example. Arranged. A predetermined space is provided between the LED substrate 81 and the smoke plate 82 and between the diffusion plate 83 and the front plate 87, if necessary.

The smoke plate 82, the diffusion plate 83, the third sheet 86, the second sheet 85, and the first sheet 84 can each have an arbitrary thickness. The thickness of each of the smoke plate 82, the diffuser plate 83, the third sheet 86, the second sheet 85, and the first sheet 84 may or may not be the same. In FIG. 76A, for convenience, the smoke plate 82, the diffusion plate 83, the third sheet 86, the second sheet 85, and the first sheet 84 have a thickness (for example, 1 mm) about half that of the case 88. Although shown, it may have a sheet-like thickness (for example, 100 μm).

Further, the smoke plate 82, the diffusion plate 83, the third sheet 86, the second sheet 85, and the first sheet 84 can be made of any material as long as they can exhibit their respective functions.
Smoke plate 82, diffuser plate 83, first sheet 84, second sheet 85, and third sheet 86
Each material may or may not be all the same (eg, vinyl chloride).

The smoke plate 82, the third sheet 86, the second sheet 85, the first sheet 84, and the diffusion plate 8
3. The mounting order of the front plate 87 may be changed to an arbitrary order according to the targeted display effect.

Further, the display device 80a includes a third sheet 86, which is an essential component of the smoke plate 82, the third sheet 86, the second sheet 85, the first sheet 84, the diffusion plate 83, and the front plate 87.
The second sheet 85 and the first sheet 84 may be provided, and one or more of the smoke plate 82, the diffusion plate 83, and the front plate 87 can be omitted according to the targeted display effect. May be. For example, the display device 80a may omit only the front plate 87 from the smoke plate 82, the diffusion plate 83, and the front plate 87, or the smoke plate 82 may be omitted.
And the front plate 87 may be omitted, or all may be omitted.

The light emitting device 80a is arranged with the second sheet 85 on the rear side and the first sheet 84 on the front side, but the first sheet 84 is arranged on the rear side and the second sheet 85 is arranged on the front side. May be. This is because the first sheet 84 and the second sheet 85 have a complementary color relationship with each other. Therefore, the light emitting device 80a can obtain the same display effect even if the arrangement order of the first sheet 84 and the second sheet 85 is arbitrary. The same applies to the light emitting device 80.

The gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment (including a modification) described above, or the light emitting device 80 in the gaming machine 10, has the following features on one side.
(1) The light emitting device 80 in the game machine 10 is a complementary color (for example, red) of a first color (for example, yellow) or a complementary color of a second color (for example, red) that is not a complementary color of the first color. For example, the light emitting means has a light emitting means (for example, full-color LED81a) capable of emitting light (for example, bluish green) and a first characteristic color transmitting portion (for example, the first spot color transmitting portion 84a) for transmitting the first color. On the other hand, a first sheet (for example, the first sheet 84) arranged on the front side where the output light from the light emitting means is irradiated, and a second special color transmission portion (for example, the second sheet) for transmitting the second color. A second sheet (with a special color transmission portion 85a), which is arranged so as to be overlapped on the front side with respect to the first sheet (
For example, it has a second sheet 85), a transmission limiting portion (for example, a transmission limiting portion 86a) that limits the transmission of light, and a transparent portion (for example, a transparent portion 86b) that is a transparent portion excluding the transmission limiting portion. A third sheet (for example, the third sheet 86) is provided so as to be overlapped on the front side with respect to the second sheet, and the transparent portion of the third sheet is the first spot color transmission portion and the second sheet. It is formed at a position that overlaps the spot color transmission site.

(2) The light emitting means of (1) sets the color of the output light to a first color (for example, yellow), a second color that is not a complementary color of the first color (for example, red), and a first color. Complementary color (for example, bluish purple)
Alternatively, it is a means capable of switching to any of a plurality of colors including complementary colors of the second color (for example, blue-green).

(3) The light emitting means of (1) sets the color of the output light to white, a first color that is not white (for example, yellow), and a second color that is not white and is not a complementary color of the first color (for example, red). ), And a means capable of switching to any of a plurality of colors including a first color complement (eg, bluish purple) or a second color complement (eg, bluish green).

(4) The second color of (1) is a color (for example, red) having a medium difference hue relationship with the first color (for example, yellow).
(5) The first sheet of (1) has a transparent portion (for example, a transparent portion 84b) which is a transparent portion excluding the first spot color transmission portion.

(6) The second sheet of (1) has a transparent portion (for example, a transparent portion 85b) which is a transparent portion excluding the second spot color transmission portion.
(7) The first sheet of (1) is a guide (notification) character (for notification) as the first spot color transmission portion.
For example, it has a guide information area having a shape including a character (character of "PUSH") and a contour located around this character, and the second sheet of (1) is for guidance (for notification) as a second feature transmission portion. ) (For example, the character "PUSH") has a guidance information area, and the guidance information area of the second sheet includes the outline of the first sheet. The first sheet and the second sheet are arranged so as to overlap each other (predetermined position in the inside).

(8) The first spot color transmission portion and the second spot color transmission portion of (1) are formed at positions where they do not overlap except for at least a part.
(9) The first sheet of (1) has a decorative design area for decoration (for example, a decorative design area representing a star) as a first spot color transmission portion.

(10) The second sheet of (1) is a decorative design area for decoration (as a second spot color transmission portion).
For example, it has a decorative design area that represents a star.
(11) The gaming machine 10 includes a light emitting device 80 of (1) and a control means for controlling the light emitting means (for example, an effect control device 300), and the control means is a light emitting color (color of output light) of the light emitting means. ) Can be switched to a plurality of different emission colors including the complementary color of the first color and the complementary color of the second color at predetermined time intervals to cause the emission means to emit light.

(12) The gaming machine 10 includes a light emitting device 80 of (1) and a control means for controlling the light emitting means (for example, an effect control device 300), and the control means is a light emitting color (color of output light) of the light emitting means. ) Is switched to a plurality of different emission colors (for example, purple, bluish purple, blue, bluish green, green) except for a specific color (for example, yellow and red) at predetermined time intervals to cause the emission means to emit light. Is possible.

(13) The gaming machine 10 includes a light emitting device. The light emitting device is a complementary color of the first color, or a first
A light emitting means capable of emitting light with a complementary color of a second color that is not a complementary color of the color of, and a first light emitting means for transmitting the first color.
It has a special color transmitting portion of, and has a first sheet arranged on the front side where the output light from the light emitting means is irradiated to the light emitting means, and a second special color transmitting portion for transmitting the second color. The second sheet has a second sheet which is arranged so as to be overlapped on the front side with respect to the first sheet, a transmission limiting portion which limits the transmission of light, and a transparent portion which is a transparent portion excluding the transmission limiting portion. A transparent portion of the third sheet is formed at a position overlapping the first spot color transmission portion and the second spot color transmission portion, including a third sheet arranged so as to be overlapped on the front side with respect to the sheet.

(14) The gaming machine 10 includes a light emitting device. The light emitting device is a complementary color of the first color, or a first
A light emitting means capable of emitting light with a complementary color of a second color that is not a complementary color of the color of, and a first light emitting means for transmitting the first color.
It has a special color transmitting portion of, and has a first sheet arranged on the front side where the output light from the light emitting means is irradiated to the light emitting means, and a second special color transmitting portion that transmits the second color. The second sheet has a second sheet which is arranged so as to be overlapped on the front side with respect to the first sheet, a transmission limiting portion which limits the transmission of light, and a transparent portion which is a transparent portion excluding the transmission limiting portion. A third sheet is included so as to be overlapped on the front side with respect to the sheet, and a region where the third sheet overlaps the first spot color transmission portion and a region where the third sheet overlaps the second spot color transmission portion. Form a transparent part of the third sheet.

(15) The gaming machine 10 includes a light emitting device (for example, light emitting devices 80, 80a). The light emitting device has a light emitting means capable of emitting light with a complementary color of a first color or a complementary color of a second color that is not a complementary color of the first color, and a first special color transmitting portion for transmitting the first color. It has one sheet, a second sheet having a second special color transmitting portion that transmits a second color, a transmission limiting portion that limits light transmission, and a transparent portion that is a transparent portion excluding the transmission limiting portion. A transparent portion of the third sheet is formed at a position overlapping the first spot color transmission portion and the second spot color transmission portion, including the third sheet.

[Fourth Embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment will be described. The gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment is characterized in that a light emitting device 95 is provided at the bottom of the center case 40, and the visibility of the light emitting device 95 changes.

First, the arrangement and configuration of the light emitting device 95 will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 79. FIG. 77
Is a front view showing an example of the game board of the fourth embodiment. In FIG. 77, the game board 30 is shown in a simplified manner. FIG. 78 is a top view and a side sectional view showing an example of the light emitting device of the fourth embodiment. Of FIGS. 78, FIG. 78 (a) is a top view of the light emitting device 95, and is shown in FIG. 78.
(B) is a side sectional view of the light emitting device 95 (AA sectional view in FIG. 78A). FIG. 79
Is a side sectional view showing an example of the light emitting device and the peripheral configuration of the fourth embodiment. Of FIGS. 79, FIG. 79 (a) is a side sectional view showing the light emitting device in the first state and the peripheral configuration, and is shown in FIG. 7.
9 (b) is a side sectional view showing the light emitting device in the second state and the peripheral configuration.

As shown in FIG. 77, the light emitting device 95 is the bottom of the center case 40 and is the display device 4.
It is arranged near the center of the lower edge of the display unit (display area) of 1. The light emitting device 95 is shown in FIG. 78 (a).
) And FIG. 78 (b), it has a cylindrical shielding wall 95a and a light emitting portion 95b as a light emitting device main body arranged in the shielding wall 95a. The cylindrical shielding wall 95a represents, for example, a well as an effect, and the display surface of the light emitting unit 95b, which will be described later, represents the inside of the well.

The upper surface of the light emitting unit 95b is a display surface, and the light emitting source such as a built-in LED causes the light emitting unit 95b to have a display surface.
This display surface emits light in the same color as a whole, or makes characters, figures, pictures of characters, etc. partially stand out in different colors to emit light, which is a kind of display means and a decorative means. It corresponds to the production means including. The light emitting unit 95b is, for example, one of the panel decoration devices 46, and is driven and controlled by the main control microcomputer 311 via the panel decoration LED control circuit 332. As the light emitting unit 95b, a light emitting device 80 having the same configuration as that of the light emitting device 80 of the third embodiment (a guide portion or a design portion whose mode is changed as necessary) can also be used.

When the light emitting device 95 is installed horizontally so that the axial direction of the cylindrical shielding wall 95a is vertical, the upper surface of the light emitting portion 95b, which is the display surface of the light emitting portion 95b, is lower than the upper end of the shielding wall 95a. Because it is in a position, for example, the display surface of the light emitting unit 95b cannot be seen from the same height in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction), and the display surface of the light emitting unit 95b can be seen by looking from diagonally above or directly above. It is a light emitting device.

As shown in FIG. 79 (a), for example, the light emitting device 95 is arranged on the inner bottom surface 40d deeper than the stage 40c at the bottom of the center case 40. Stage 40c is
The game ball that has flowed into the warp flow path from the above-mentioned warp port 39a (see FIG. 2) is a portion where a rolling surface that rolls thereafter is formed on the upper surface. A partition wall 40e is formed between the stage 40c and the back bottom surface 40d, and the partition wall 40e forms a partition wall 40e on the back side bottom surface 40.
The game ball does not flow on d.

In the light emitting device 95, for example, as shown in FIG. 79 (a), the lower end portion on the front side may be supported by the partition wall 40e (the lower end portion on the front side may be swingably attached to the partition wall 40e by a hinge). ), It is provided so that the rear side can be lifted and tilted forward. Further, an electromagnetic actuator (drive source) 96 generally called a solenoid or the like is disposed below the rear end portion of the light emitting device 95, and is located at the upper end of the movable shaft 96a (shown in FIG. 79 (b)) of the actuator 96. The rear end of the light emitting device 95 is supported from below.

As is well known, the actuator 96 (solenoid) is fixed (or integrally molded) to the plunger by moving the plunger (magnetic material on the movable side, not shown) by the attractive force of the electromagnet.
Move the movable shaft 96a. In this case, most of the movable shaft 96a of the actuator 96 is buried in the non-operating state (off state in which no current is passed through the coil of the electromagnet), and the actuator 96 is turned on in the operating state (a predetermined current is flowing through the coil of the electromagnet). In the state), the movable shaft 96a
Is a type of solenoid that rises by a predetermined amount. The actuator 96 is controlled by the main control microcomputer 311 via, for example, a panel effect movable body control circuit 334.

Therefore, when the actuator 96 is in the non-operating state, the position (including the posture) of the light emitting device 95 is a steady position (a state in which the actuator 96 is in a horizontal posture) as shown in FIG. 79 (a). (Referred to as the first state), and when the actuator 96 is in the operating state, FIG. 79
As shown in (b), the rear part rises from the steady position and leans forward to a forward leaning position (a state in this position is called a second state).

Since the upper surface of the light emitting unit 95b, which is the display surface of the light emitting unit 95b, is located at a position lower than the upper end of the shielding wall 95a in the steady position, when the light emitting device 95 is in the first state in the steady position, It is hidden behind the shielding wall 95a and is invisible or difficult to see from the observer. For example, in the first state, the player cannot see the display surface (upper surface) of the light emitting unit 95b unless the player looks into the light emitting unit 95b from diagonally above, and cannot observe the display state of the display surface of the light emitting unit 95b. Further, even if it can be observed, the display surface of the light emitting unit 95b is slanted with respect to the line of sight of the player and looks considerably small.

However, when the light emitting device 95 is in the second state in the forward tilted position, the light emitting device 95 is tilted forward so as to be easily seen from the front side as shown in FIG. 79 (b), so that the player who is an observer. Can be observed relatively well. For example, in the second state, the player does not have to look into the light emitting unit 95b from diagonally above, but the display surface (upper surface) of the light emitting unit 95b looks small, and the player looks into from diagonally above. For example, the display surface of the light emitting unit 95b is close to the direction orthogonal to the line of sight of the player and looks relatively large. That is, the visibility of the display surface of the light emitting device 95 (upper surface of the light emitting unit 95b) in the second state is significantly superior to the visibility of the display surface of the light emitting device 95 in the first state. For this reason, for example, a highly reliable production that becomes a big hit (for example,
When a special reach effect) is performed on the display device 41, the light emitting device 9 is linked to this effect.
If control such as converting (switching) 5 from the first state to the second state is performed, the expectations of the player can be raised and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification 1 of the fourth embodiment]
Next, a modification 1 of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 80. FIG. 80 is a side sectional view showing an example of a light emitting device and a peripheral configuration of a modification 1 of the fourth embodiment. Of FIGS. 80, FIG. 80 (a) is a side sectional view showing the light emitting device in the first state and the peripheral configuration, and is shown in FIG.
0 (b) is a side sectional view showing the light emitting device in the second state and the peripheral configuration.

In this modification 1, as shown in FIG. 80 (a), the back bottom surface 40d is tilted forward from the horizontal, and the light emitting device 95 is tilted forward to some extent from the horizontal even in the first state. Then, in the second state in which the actuator 96 is in the operating state, as shown in FIG. 80 (b), the light emitting device 95 tilts with respect to the back bottom surface 40d and further tilts forward.

Therefore, even when the light emitting device 95 is in the first state, the player can observe it. For example, even in the first state, the light emitting unit 95 does not require the player to look into the light emitting unit 95 from diagonally above.
The display surface (upper surface) of b becomes smaller, and if the display surface (upper surface) of the light emitting unit 95b is viewed from diagonally above, the display surface of the light emitting unit 95b becomes closer to the direction orthogonal to the line of sight of the player and is relatively large. appear.

When the light emitting device 95 is in the second state, the light emitting device 9 is shown in FIG. 80 (b).
Since 5 is greatly tilted forward so that it can be easily seen from the front side, it is hardly hidden by the shielding wall 95a.
The observer, the player, can observe relatively well. For example, in the second state, the player does not have to look into the light emitting unit 95b from diagonally above so that the display surface (upper surface) of the light emitting unit 95b looks relatively large and looks into from diagonally above. If it is set to, the display surface of the light emitting unit 95b is oriented in a direction substantially orthogonal to the line of sight of the player and looks even larger. Also in this case, the visibility of the display surface of the light emitting device 95 in the second state is remarkably superior to the visibility of the display surface of the light emitting device 95 in the first state. For this reason, for example, when a highly reliable effect that is a big hit is performed on the display device 41, control such as converting the light emitting device 95 from the first state to the second state in conjunction with this effect can be performed. It is possible to raise the expectations of the player and improve the interest of the game.

[Modification 2 of the fourth embodiment]
Next, the second modification of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 81. FIG. 81 is a side sectional view showing an example of a light emitting device and a peripheral configuration of a modification 2 of the fourth embodiment. Of FIGS. 81, FIG. 81 (a) is a side sectional view showing the light emitting device in the first state and the peripheral configuration, and is shown in FIG.
1 (b) is a side sectional view showing a light emitting device in the second state and a peripheral configuration.

In this modification 2, as shown in FIG. 81 (a), the display surface (upper surface) of the light emitting unit 95b of the light emitting device 95 in the first state is tilted forward from the horizontal. Then, in the second state in which the actuator 96 is in the operating state, as shown in FIG. 81 (b), the light emitting device 95 is tilted and the display surface of the light emitting unit 95b is tilted further forward. Therefore, substantially the same effect as in the case of the above-mentioned modification 1 can be obtained.

[Modification 3 of the fourth embodiment]
Next, a modification 3 of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 82. FIG. 82 is a side sectional view showing an example of the light emitting device and the peripheral configuration of the modified example 3 of the fourth embodiment. Of FIGS. 82, FIG. 82 (a) is a side sectional view showing the light emitting device in the first state and the peripheral configuration, and is shown in FIG.
2 (b) is a side sectional view showing the light emitting device in the second state and the peripheral configuration.

In this modification 3, as shown in FIG. 82A, both lower ends of the shielding wall 95a are supported by the center case 40, and the shielding wall 95a is horizontal to the center case 40 (the axial direction is vertical). It is fixed (in the posture). On the other hand, the light emitting portion 95b is provided so as to be movable up and down along the inner peripheral surface of the shielding wall 95a, and the movable shaft 96a of the actuator 96 arranged between the lower surface side and the back side bottom surface 40d of the light emitting device 95 (FIG. 82). The lower surface of the light emitting portion 95b is supported from below at the upper end of (shown in (b)). Further, the display surface (upper surface) of the light emitting portion 95b of the light emitting device 95 is tilted forward from the horizontal.

The position (vertical position) of the light emitting portion 95b of the light emitting device 95 is a stationary position (position in the vertical direction) which is a position buried in the shielding wall 95a as shown in FIG. 82 (a) when the actuator 96 is in the non-operating state. The state in this position is referred to as the first state), and when the actuator 96 is in the operating state, it rises above the steady position as shown in FIG. 82 (b) and the upper surface of the light emitting unit 95b (
The display surface) is exposed at a high position (the state at this position is called the second state).

When the actuator 96 is in the non-operating state (first state), the upper surface of the light emitting unit 95b, which is the display surface of the light emitting unit 95b, is larger than the upper end of the shielding wall 95a as shown in FIG. 82 (a). Since it is in a low position, it is hidden behind the shielding wall 95a and is invisible or difficult to see from the observer. For example, in the first state, the player cannot see the display surface of the light emitting unit 95b unless he looks into it from diagonally above, and cannot observe the display state of the display surface of the light emitting unit 95b. Further, even if it can be observed, the display surface of the light emitting unit 95b is partially covered with the shielding wall 9.
I can't see it because it's hidden behind 5a.

However, when the light emitting device 95 is in the second state, the light emitting unit 9 is shown in FIG. 82 (b).
Since the display surface of 5b is exposed, the player who is an observer can observe the entire display surface relatively well. For example, in the second state, the display surface of the light emitting unit 95b can be seen small even if the player does not look into it from diagonally above, and if the player looks into it from diagonally above, it emits light. The display surface of the portion 95b is close to the direction orthogonal to the line of sight of the player and looks relatively large. That is, the visibility of the display surface of the light emitting device 95 (upper surface of the light emitting unit 95b) in the second state is significantly superior to the visibility of the display surface of the light emitting device 95 in the first state. Therefore, for example, when a highly reliable effect (for example, a special reach effect) that becomes a big hit is performed on the display device 41, the light emitting device 95 is converted from the first state to the second state in conjunction with this effect. By performing control such as playing (switching), it is possible to raise the expectations of the player and improve the interest of the game.

[Variation Example 4 of the Fourth Embodiment]
Next, a modification 4 of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 83. FIG. 83 is a side sectional view showing an example of the light emitting device and the peripheral configuration of the modified example 4 of the fourth embodiment. Of FIGS. 83, FIG. 83A is a side sectional view showing the light emitting device in the first state and the peripheral configuration, and is shown in FIG.
3 (b) is a side sectional view showing the light emitting device in the second state and the peripheral configuration.

In this modification 4, as shown in FIG. 83A, the lower end of the light emitting portion 95b is supported by the center case 40 (specifically, the convex portion 40f formed on the back bottom surface 40d), and the light emitting portion 95b is supported. It is fixed to the center case 40. On the other hand, the shielding wall 95a is provided so as to be movable up and down along the outer peripheral surface of the light emitting portion 95b, and the upper end of the movable shaft 97a of the actuator 97 arranged in the recess 40g formed in the back bottom surface 40d is the shielding wall 95a. It is fixed to the bottom surface. Further, the display surface (upper surface) of the light emitting portion 95b of the light emitting device 95 is tilted forward from the horizontal.

Here, in the non-operating state (off state in which no current is flowing through the coil of the electromagnet), the actuator 97 is in a state in which the movable shaft 97a is urged by, for example, an urging means and rises by a predetermined amount, and is in an operating state (coil of the electromagnet). Movable shaft 9 in the on state where a predetermined current is flowing to
This is a pull-type solenoid in which most of 7a is sucked and buried. Actuator 9
7 is controlled by the main control microcomputer 311 via, for example, the board effect movable body control circuit 334. Although not shown, a urging means such as a coil spring built in the actuator 97 or a coil spring provided separately from the actuator 97 and a stopper that limits the ascent of the movable shaft 97a or the shielding wall 95a at a predetermined position. As a result, the shielding wall 95a and the movable shaft 97a are configured to be held at a position where the movable shaft 97a is raised by a predetermined amount in a non-operating state.

Therefore, the position (vertical position) of the shielding wall 95a of the light emitting device 95 is the actuator 97.
Is in the non-operating state, as shown in FIG. 83 (a), the light emitting portion 95b is in a steady position (the state in which this position is called the first state), which is the position buried in the shielding wall 95a, and the actuator is engaged. When 97 is in the operating state, as shown in FIG. 83 (b), the position where the upper surface (display surface) of the light emitting unit 95b is exposed (the state in this position is referred to as the second state) is lowered from the steady position. )become.

When the actuator 97 is in the non-operating state (first state), the upper surface of the light emitting unit 95b, which is the display surface of the light emitting unit 95b, is larger than the upper end of the shielding wall 95a as shown in FIG. 83 (a). Since it is in a low position, it is hidden behind the shielding wall 95a and is invisible or difficult to see from the observer. However, when the light emitting device 95 is in the second state, FIG. 83 (
Since the display surface of the light emitting unit 95b is exposed as shown in b), the player who is an observer can observe the entire display surface relatively well. Therefore, the same effect as in the case of the above-mentioned modification 3 can be obtained.

In the fourth embodiment (including the modification) described above, when the light emitting device 95 is converted from the first state to the second state, the timing at which the conversion is performed may be notified. For example, the display device 41 displays the countdown from a predetermined time before the conversion from the first state to the second state, and the conversion is started at the same time when the countdown display becomes zero. or,
The shielding wall 95a may be configured to be capable of emitting light, and the shielding wall 95a may be made to emit light from immediately before the conversion from the first state to the second state (or before a predetermined time) until the return to the first state.

Further, a drive mechanism (including a drive source) for converting the light emitting device 95 from the first state to the second state.
Is not limited to the drive mechanism including the solenoid described above, and may be, for example, a drive mechanism using a stepping motor (pulse motor) or a servo-controlled motor (servo motor).
If the drive mechanism uses a stepping motor or a servomotor, it can be easily changed from the first state to the second state slowly or in multiple stages, or the second state can be set in multiple stages.

Further, the mode of the light emitting device 95 is not limited to a circular well shape, but may be a quadrangular or polygonal well shape, or any other mode. For example, it is difficult to see if the light emitting part representing the ghost character attached to the plate-shaped body representing the door plate falls to the back side of the game board and is hidden behind the shielding wall on the front side in the steady state. (First state), a light emitting device of a type such that the player rises to the front side of the game board and is exposed on the upper side of the shielding wall during a predetermined effect (second state) may be used.

Further, as the light emitting unit 95b, a liquid crystal display or an organic EL (Electronic Luminesce)
nt) Using a device such as a display, not only light emission but also still images and moving images may be displayed on the display surface of the light emitting device 95.

The gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment (including the modified example) described above has the following features on one side.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes an effect means (for example, a light emitting device 95) capable of emitting light or displaying. The staging means can be observed in a first state having a first visibility and a second state having a second visibility that is superior to the first visibility, and the first visibility is Including invisible.

(2) The effect means of (1) has a display surface (for example, the display surface of the light emitting unit 95b) on which light emission or display is performed, and in the first state, the display surface is a shielding means (for example, a shielding wall 95a). The second state is a state in which at least a part of the display surface is visible without being hidden by the shielding means.

(3) The gaming machine 10 of (2) has a drive mechanism (for example, an actuator 9) that converts the first state to the second state by tilting the display surface forward toward the front of the gaming machine from the first state.
A drive mechanism consisting of 6) is provided.

(4) The gaming machine 10 of (2) is driven by a drive mechanism (for example, an actuator 96) that converts the first state to the second state by raising the display surface from the first state with respect to the shielding means. Mechanism) is provided.

(5) The gaming machine 10 of (2) is driven by a drive mechanism (for example, an actuator 97) that converts the first state to the second state by lowering the shielding means with respect to the display surface from the first state. Mechanism) is provided.

(6) The display surface of (2) is in a direction orthogonal to the front surface of the gaming machine in the first state (for example,).
Place in the horizontal direction).
(7) The display surface of (2) is in a direction orthogonal to the front surface of the gaming machine in the first state (for example,).
Place it in a posture tilted forward by a predetermined angle with respect to (horizontal direction).

The above processing function can be realized by a computer. In that case, a program describing the processing contents of the functions that the gaming machine of the embodiment should have is provided. By executing the program on a computer, the above processing function is realized on the computer. The program describing the processing content can be recorded on a computer-readable recording medium. Computer-readable recording media include magnetic storage devices,
There are optical disks, optical magnetic recording media, semiconductor memories, and the like. The magnetic storage device includes a hard disk device (HDD), a flexible disk (FD), a magnetic tape, and the like. Optical discs include DVD (Digital Versatile Disk), DVD-RAM, and CD (Compact Disk) -RO.
There are M / RW (ReWritable) and the like. MO (Magneto-Optical disk) is used as the magneto-optical recording medium.
And so on.

When distributing a program, for example, a DVD or C on which the program is recorded.
Portable recording media such as D-ROMs are sold. It is also possible to store the program in the storage device of the server computer and transfer the program from the server computer to another computer via the network.

The computer that executes the program stores, for example, the program recorded on the portable recording medium or the program transferred from the server computer in its own storage device. Then, the computer reads the program from its own storage device and executes the processing according to the program. The computer can also read the program directly from the portable recording medium and execute the processing according to the program. Further, the computer can sequentially execute the processing according to the received program each time the program is transferred from the server computer connected via the network.

Further, at least a part of the above processing functions is performed by DSP (Digital Signal Processor), A.
SIC (Application Specific Integrated Circuit), PLD (Programmable Logic De)
It can also be realized by an electronic circuit such as vice).

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the disclosed embodiment as a gaming machine, and is not limited to, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, and the like. It is applicable to all gaming machines that use the game balls of the above, and slot machines that are gaming machines that use medals.

It should also be considered that the disclosed embodiments are exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. Further, each configuration of the above-described embodiment and modification may be applied in combination. The scope of the invention is indicated by the claims rather than the description above.
It is intended to include all changes within the meaning and scope of the claims.

Next, the gaming machine 10 of the fifth embodiment will be described.
It should be noted that the gaming machine 10 having a form different from that of the first to fourth embodiments, and having the same configuration as that of the first to fourth embodiments, will be described again with reference numerals.
Hereinafter, embodiments will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
[Fifth Embodiment]
First, the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 84 is a perspective view showing an example of the gaming machine of the fifth embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 of the fifth embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is an outer frame (support frame).
It is assembled to 11 so that it can be opened and closed. The game board 30 (see FIG. 85) is housed in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, a glass frame (transparent member holding frame) 15 provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 that covers the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

In addition, lamps, LEDs, etc. are built into the left and right sides of the glass frame 15 for decoration and production, and notification when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a payout abnormality occurs, the lamp, LED, etc. are displayed as an abnormality notification color (for example). Frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (blinking) in red) and sound (blinking)
For example, a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits a sound effect) is provided. moreover,
A speaker (lower speaker) 19b is also provided in the lower part of the front frame 12. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the contents of the abnormality are notified by voice from the speakers 19a and 19b. note that,
A lamp for notifying the payout abnormality may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

Further, in the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper plate (storage plate) 21 for supplying a game ball to a hitting ball launching device (not shown) and a game ball paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the game machine 10 are provided. An outlet 22 for the upper plate to be discharged, a lower plate (receiver) 23 for storing the game balls discharged when the upper plate 21 is full, an operation unit 24 of the hitting ball launching device, and the like are provided. Furthermore, the upper plate 2
An option setting unit (push button) 25 for setting various options by the player is provided on the upper edge portion of 1. A plurality of selection button switches 25a are provided around the upper surface of the option setting unit 25, and a determination button switch 25b is provided in the center of the upper surface of the option setting unit 25. The option setting unit 25 functions as an effect setting unit in which the player sets the effect mode. In this case, the selection button switch 25a functions as an effect button switch for selecting the effect mode, and the decision button switch 25b functions as a decision button switch for determining the effect mode. Further, on the lower right side of the front frame 12, the front frame 1
A keyhole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the 2 or the glass frame 15 is provided.

When the selection button switch 25a functions as an effect button switch, the gaming machine 1
0 can perform an effect in which the player's operation is intervened based on the player's operation received from the selection button switch 25a and the decision button switch 25b. for example,
The effect of intervening the operation of the player includes an effect in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) in the display device (variable display device) 41 (see FIG. 85), and the game machine 10 is displayed on the display device 41. It is possible to operate the character to be displayed and to stop the identification information in the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41.

Further, on the right side of the option setting unit 25, there is a ball lending button 27 that is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and an operation for ejecting a prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. A discharge button 28, a balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided. In the gaming machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, when the player rotates the operation unit 24, the hitting ball launching device transfers the gaming ball supplied from the upper plate 21 to the gaming area 32 on the front surface of the gaming board 30. Fire towards (see Figure 85). Further, by operating the selection button switch 25a and the decision button switch 25b, the player can, for example, set the volume radiated from the speakers 19a and 19b and set the brightness of the game board 30. ..

Next, the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. 85. FIG. 85 is a front view showing an example of the game board of the fifth embodiment.
On the surface of the game board 30, a substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is formed. The game area 32 is a resin side case 3 provided at each of the four corners of the game board 30.
It is surrounded by 3 and a guide rail 31. In the game area 32, a center case (game effect component) 40 provided with a display device (variable display device) 41 and a second special variable winning device (large winning opening 2) 93 is arranged substantially in the center.

The display device 41 is attached to a recess provided in the lower part of the center case 40 at a position deeper than the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 is formed so as to surround the periphery of the display area of the display device 41, project forward from the display surface of the display device 41, and make it difficult for the game ball to jump from the surrounding game area 32.

The display device 41 is composed of, for example, a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) and a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube). In the area (display area) where the image of the display screen can be displayed, information related to the game such as a plurality of identification information (special symbol), a character that directs the special figure variation display game, and a background image that enhances the effect of the effect is displayed. .. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variablely displayed (variable display), and a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game is performed. In addition, on the display screen, an image for directing based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, etc.)
Fanfare display image, ending display image, etc.) are displayed.

Further, on the upper left side of the center case 40, a board staging device 44 that plays a game by operating is provided. The board effect device 44 can be operated from the state shown in FIG. 85 toward the center of the display device 41.

Further, on the upper right side of the center case 40, a second special variable winning device 93 that can be converted into a state in which a game ball is not accepted and a state in which it is easy to accept the game ball as a result of winning a prize in the second type starting port (starting port 3). Are arranged. The second special variable winning device 93 includes a movable member 93c that can be opened and converted into a state in which a game ball can easily flow in by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side tilts to the right. Closed state where the game ball cannot flow in because it is almost vertical at all times (
It is in a disadvantageous state for the player). And the variable winning device (type 2 starting port) 9
If there is a prize in 2 (limited to the valid state), the large prize opening 2 solenoid 93b (see FIG. 86) as a drive device rotates so that the upper end side tilts to the right, and the second special variable prize is won. The device 93 can be changed to an open state (a state advantageous for the player) in which the game ball easily flows into the device 93. The game ball that has won the second special variable prize device 93 is detected by the large prize opening switch (count switch) 93a (see FIG. 86), and a predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. There is. The second special variable winning device 93 may be provided with a plurality (for example, two) of large winning opening switches 93a.

Further, the game ball winning in the second special variable winning device 93 is distributed into a specific area 93f and a non-specific area 93g by the distribution device 93e. The game ball distributed to the specific area 93f is detected by the specific area switch 93d (see FIG. 86). The distribution device 93e is a rotating body having six receiving portions capable of receiving a game ball, one of which is a specific region 93f and the other five receiving portions are a non-specific region 93g. .. The distribution device 93e is constantly rotationally driven in one direction (for example, clockwise) by the distribution motor 93h (see FIG. 86).

Below the center case 40 in the game area 32, there is a start winning opening 36 (starting winning opening 36) forming a first starting winning opening (starting winning area) that gives a start condition for the first special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game). A mouth 1) is provided. The game ball that has won a prize in the start winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 86). Further, below the starting winning opening 36, an out opening 30a for collecting game balls that did not win in the winning opening or the like is provided.

On the lateral right side (right side game area 32R) of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a normal symbol start gate (normal figure start gate) 34 that gives a start condition of the normal figure variation display game is provided. The game ball that has won the prize in the normal figure start gate 34 (the game ball that passes through the normal figure start gate 34) is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 86).

In addition, it is located below the starting gate 34 in the normal drawing, and on the right side of the center case 40,
An ordinary variable winning device 37 is provided. The ordinary variable winning device 37 is a pair of movable members 3 that can be opened and converted into a state in which a game ball can easily flow in by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side tilts sideways.
7a is provided, and the movable member 37a is always substantially vertical and holds a closed closed state (a state disadvantageous to the player) in which the game ball cannot flow in. Then, when the result of the normal map fluctuation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, the normal electric solenoid 3 as a drive device is used.
7b (see FIG. 86) rotates so that the upper end side tilts sideways, and the normal variable winning device 37
It can be changed to an open state (a state that is advantageous for the player) in which the game ball can easily flow in. The game ball that has won the prize in the ordinary variable prize device 37 is detected by the prize opening switch 35a (see FIG. 86), and a predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. It should be noted that the normally variable winning device 37 may be able to win a prize even in the closed state, and may be more difficult to win in the closed state than in the open state. The ordinary variable winning device 37 corresponds to an ordinary electric accessory (Public electric).

The game ball that has won the ordinary variable winning device 37 is distributed to the operating port 37e and the operating port 37f by the distribution device 37d. The distribution device 37d determines the flow path for guiding the game ball won in the normal variable winning device 37 to the operation port 37e and the flow path for guiding the game ball to the operation port 37f depending on the operating state of the distribution solenoid 37c (see FIG. 86). It is switchable. For example, the sorting device 3
The 7d guides the game ball that has won the normal variable winning device 37 when the distribution solenoid 37c is off to the operating port 37e, and the game ball that has won the normal variable winning device 37 when the distribution solenoid 37c is on. Guide to the operating port 37f.

The operating port 37e changes the variable winning device (non-electric accessory) 91 from the closed state to the open state by the game balls distributed to the operating port 37e. The variable winning device 91 includes a pair of movable members 91a that can be opened and converted into a state in which a game ball can easily flow in by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side falls sideways, and the movable member 91a is always provided. Holds a closed closed state (a state that is disadvantageous to the player) in which the game ball cannot flow in because it is almost vertical. And the working port 37e
When the game balls are distributed to, the upper end side is rotated so as to fall sideways due to the flow force of the distributed game balls, and the game balls are easily flowed into the variable winning device 91 (advantageous for the player). It is designed to be changed to a new state).

The variable winning device 91 forms a second starting winning opening (starting opening 2, starting winning area) that gives a start condition for the second special figure variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game). The game ball that has won a prize in the variable prize device 91 is detected by the start port 2 switch 91b (see FIG. 86), and a predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. Further, the variable winning device 91 changes from the open state to the closed state when the game ball wins in the open state. It should be noted that the variable winning device 91 may be able to win a prize even in the closed state, and may be more difficult to win in the closed state than in the open state.

The operating port 37f changes the variable winning device (non-electric accessory) 92 from the closed state to the open state by the game balls distributed to the operating port 37f. The variable winning device 92 includes a pair of movable members 92a that can be opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side tilts sideways and can be converted into a state in which a game ball can easily flow in, and the movable member 92a is always present. Holds a closed closed state (a state that is disadvantageous to the player) in which the game ball cannot flow in because it is almost vertical. And the operation port 37f
When the game balls are distributed to, the upper end side is rotated so as to fall sideways due to the flow force of the distributed game balls, and the game balls are easily flowed into the variable winning device 92 (advantageous for the player). It is designed to be changed to a new state).

The variable winning device 92 forms a type 2 starting port (starting port 3, starting winning area) that gives a starting condition for the type 2 game. The game ball that has won the variable prize device 92 is the start port 3 switch 92b (FIG. 8).
6) is detected, and a predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. Further, the variable winning device 92 changes from the open state to the closed state when the game ball wins in the open state. It should be noted that the variable winning device 92 may be able to win a prize even in the closed state, and may be more difficult to win in the closed state than in the open state.

Further, below the center case 40 in the game area 32, the game ball is not accepted or easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game and special figure 2 variation display game). A convertible first special variable winning device (large winning opening 1) 38 is arranged. The first special variable winning device 38 has an opening / closing member (opening / closing door) 38c.
Special figure variation display as an auxiliary game Depending on the result of the game, the opening / closing member 38c retracts from the closed state in which the opening / closing member 38c closes the large winning opening (a closed state that is disadvantageous to the player), and the game area 3
The game ball flowing down 2 is converted into an acceptable open state (a state advantageous for the player).
That is, the special variable winning device 38 is a large winning opening 1 solenoid 38b as a driving device (FIG. 8).
It is equipped with a large winning opening that is opened and closed by the opening / closing member 38c driven by (see 6), and is in a big hit game state (special game state) based on the results of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game.
During the big hit game state (special game state) as a result of the special figure 2 variable display game, it is easy for the game ball to flow into the big prize opening by converting the big prize opening from the closed state to the open state. It is designed to give a predetermined game value (prize ball) to the player. Inside the large winning opening (winning area), a large winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 86) is provided as a detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the large winning opening. .. The first
The special variable winning device 38 may be provided with a plurality (for example, two) of large winning opening switches 38a.

Two general winning openings 35 are arranged on the lower left side (left side game area 32L) of the center case 40 in the game area 32, and the lower right side (right side game area 32R) of the center case 40.
Is arranged with one general winning opening 35. The game ball that has won a prize in these general winning openings 35 is detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 86).

Further, a warp port (warp inlet) (not shown) may be provided on the left side of the center case 40. The game ball that has flowed into the warp flow path from the warp port rolls on the stage in the center case 40, and a part of the game ball is guided to the warp exit (not shown). The warp exit is
The game ball located directly above the starting winning opening 36 and guided to the warp exit can easily win the starting winning opening 36.

In the gaming machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, of the gaming areas 32 in which the gaming balls flow down, the left area of the center case 40 is the left gaming area 32L, and the right area of the center case 40 is the right gaming area. The area is 32R. Then, the player adjusts the firing force and launches the game ball to the left game area 32L (so-called left-handed), so that the start winning opening 36, the first special variable winning device 38, and the general winning opening in the left game area 32L are located. It is possible to aim for a prize in 35, and by launching a game ball into the right game area 32R (so-called right-handed), the normal figure start gate 34, the normal variable winning device 37, the second special variable winning device 93, and the variable winning device It is possible to aim for a prize in the general winning opening 35 in the game area 32R on the right side of 91, 92.

Further, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, the lower right of the game board 30), the first special figure change display game, the second special figure change display game, and the normal figure start gate 34, which form a special figure change display game, are reached. A batch display device 50 that displays various information and displays a game with a variable display of a normal map triggered by a prize.
Is provided.

The batch display device 50 includes a round display unit 51 composed of LEDs and the like, a special figure 1 hold display unit 52, a special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, a special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, and a normal symbol display unit. 55, a general drawing hold display unit 56, a status display unit 57, and a special figure 2 hold display unit 58 (see FIG. 89).
.. Details of the batch display device 50 will be described later.

Next, the control system of the gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. 86. FIG. 86 is a block diagram showing an example of a control system for a gaming machine according to a fifth embodiment.
The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100, and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that collectively controls a game, and is a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. CPU (Central Processing Unit) unit 110 having an input port, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, and the like, and a CPU.
It is composed of a data bus 140 or the like that connects the unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130.

The CPU unit 110 includes a gaming microcomputer 111 called an amusement chip (IC (Integrated Circuit)) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and serves as a reference for an operating clock, a timer interrupt, and a random number generation circuit of the gaming microcomputer 111. Oscillator circuit that generates the clock
It has a crystal oscillator) 113 and the like. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 are DCs (Di) generated by the power supply device 400.
rect Current) 32V, DC12V, DC5V, etc. are supplied with a predetermined level of DC voltage to enable operation.

The power supply device 400 generates an AC (DC 32V) DC voltage from a 24V AC power supply (AC).
Alternating Current) -DC 12V, DC 5V from DC converter or DC 32V voltage
Ordinary power supply unit 4 having a DC-DC converter or the like that generates a lower level DC voltage such as
It has a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies power supply voltage to the RAM (Random Access Memory) inside the game microcomputer 111 in the event of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and causes and recovers the power failure in the game control device 100. It is provided with a control signal generation unit 430 and the like that generate and output control signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal to be notified.

In the fifth embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are on a separate board or integrated with the game control device 100, that is, , May be configured to be provided on the main board. Game board 30
And the game control device 100 is to be replaced when the model is changed. Therefore, as in the fifth embodiment, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are mounted on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board. By providing the above, it is possible to exclude the target of replacement and reduce the cost.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 (
In particular, the data supplied to the built-in RAM) and stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or power cutoff. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it drops to 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. This R
When the AM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, a process for forcibly initializing the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200. Is done. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is the game microcomputer 1.
It is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by 11. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a setting value change switch 126 and a setting key switch 127. The set value change switch 126 is, for example, a push switch and detects a pressing operation. The setting key switch 127 inserts a setting key to enable switching between an ON state and an OFF state. The game control device 100 can change the settings related to the game performance, and the settings stored in the RAM are retained even during a power failure or after the power is cut off. For example, the game control device 100 makes it possible to change the hit probabilities of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game according to the setting of 6 stages.

The game control device 100 transitions to a setting change mode in which the setting of the game machine 10 can be changed by turning on the power while the setting key switch 127 is ON and the RAM initialization switch 112 is ON. For example, the game control device 100 makes it possible to cyclically change the settings 1 to 6 by detecting the pressing operation of the setting value change switch 126 while displaying the setting contents on the probability setting value display device 136 in the setting change mode. The probability set value display device 136 is a display device capable of displaying the set value, and is, for example, a one-digit 7-segment LE.
It is D and is mounted on the substrate.

Further, the game control device 100 transitions to the setting confirmation mode in which the setting confirmation of the gaming machine 10 can be performed by turning on the power while the setting key switch 127 is ON and the RAM initialization switch 112 is OFF. .. For example, the game control device 100 displays the setting contents on the probability setting value display device 136 in the setting confirmation mode.

The game microcomputer 111 is a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A.
, Read-only ROM (Read Only Memory) 111B and RA that can be read and written at any time
It is equipped with M111C.

The ROM 111B non-volatilely stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control, and the RAM 111C is a work area of the CPU 111A or a storage area of various signals and random numbers during game control. It is used as. ROM111B or R
As AM111C, an electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable ROM) may be used.

Further, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect content, the presence / absence of the occurrence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a variation pattern random number 1, a variation pattern random number 2, and a variation pattern random number 3 stored as a start memory in the CPU 111A.
Is a table for determining the fluctuation pattern with reference to. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a missed fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is missed, a jackpot fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Further, these pattern tables include tables for determining the latter half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.).
, A table for determining the first half fluctuation pattern, which is a fluctuation pattern before reaching the reach state (first half fluctuation group table, first half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes an advantageous gaming state (special gaming state) for the player when the special result mode is adopted, a part of the plurality of display results has not yet been derived and displayed. Derived A display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the conditions for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state deviates from the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses to the stage before the display result is derived and displayed. Refers to a display mode that does not exist. Further, for example, a state in which variation display is performed by a plurality of variation display areas (so-called full rotation reach) while maintaining a state in which special result modes are aligned is also included in the reach state. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It refers to a display state when at least a part of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition of the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas of the display device. When the variable display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle after display and the result mode is displayed, the left and right variable display areas satisfy the conditions for the special result mode (for example). The state in which the variable display is stopped due to the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the fluctuation display of all the fluctuation display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition of the special result mode in any two of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display regions is satisfied (for example, the same). The state in which the identification information is used, except for the special result mode) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variable-displayed from this reach state.

The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and as reach effects in which the possibility of deriving a special result mode is different (expected value is different), normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), and so on. Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), Special 3
Reach (SP3 reach) and premier reach are set. The expected value increases in the order of "no reach"<"normalreach"<"special 1 reach"<"special 2 reach"<"special 3 reach"<"premierreach". Further, this reach state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived (when it becomes a big hit) in the special figure variable display game. That is, it may be included in the variable display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived (when it is out of order) in the special figure variable display game. Therefore, the state in which the reach state occurs is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B, generates control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, generates and outputs drive signals for the solenoid and the display device, and outputs the game machine 10. Take control of the whole. Further, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a jackpot random number for determining a hit in a special figure variation display game, a jackpot symbol random number for determining a jackpot symbol, and a variation pattern in a special figure variation display game (not shown).
Variable pattern random number for determining (including the execution time of the variable display game in various reach and variable display without reach), random number generation for generating the hit random number for determining the hit of the clock fluctuation display game, etc. A clock generator that generates a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 ms (ms)) for the CPU 111A and a clock that gives an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on the circuit and the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. It is equipped with.

Further, the CPU 111A is the ROM 111B in the process related to the special figure variation display game.
Acquire any one of the fluctuation pattern tables stored in. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result (hit (big hit or small hit) or miss) of the special figure fluctuation display game and the probability state (normal probability state or high probability) of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current game state. A variable pattern table is selected from a plurality of variable pattern tables based on the state), the operating state (time saving operating state) of the normal variable winning device 37 as the current gaming state, the number of start memories, and the like. To get. Here, CP
The U111A serves as a variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when the special figure variation display game is executed.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, ROM, RAM, input interface, output interface, and the like, and is a payout motor of a payout unit provided in the game machine 10 in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100. Is driven, and control is performed to pay out the prize ball. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball lending request signal from the card unit of the ball lending machine attached to the gaming machine 10.
Control to pay out the loan.

The input unit 120 of the game microcomputer 111 has a start port 1 switch 36 in the start winning port 36.
a, Starting port 2 switch 91b in the variable winning device 91, starting port 3 switch 92b in the variable winning device 92, gate switch 34a in the normal starting gate 34, winning port switch 35a, first special variable winning device 38. It is connected to the large winning opening switch 38a, the large winning opening switch 93a of the second special variable winning device 93, and the specific area switch 93d of the second special variable winning device 93, and the high level supplied from these switches is 11V and the low level is low. An interface chip (proximity I /) that inputs a negative logic signal such as 7V and converts it into a 0V-5V positive logic signal.
F) 121 is provided. The detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62 that detects the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine 10 is also input to the proximity I / F 121. Further, since the input range of the proximity I / F 121 is 7V-11V, the lead wire of the sensor or the proximity switch is illegally shorted, the sensor or the switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is cut off. It is configured to be able to detect an abnormal state such as floating and output an abnormality detection signal.

Explaining the winning opening switch 35a, although the winning opening switch 35a is shown by one block in FIG. 86, a plurality of (n) winning opening switches 35a (three in the present embodiment) are actually used. Is provided on the game board 30, and each signal is input to the proximity I / F 121 with different signal lines.

Further, in FIG. 86, the large winning opening switches 38a and 93a are shown by one block, but in reality, a plurality of (x) large winning opening switches 38a (three in this embodiment) and a large winning opening are shown. A switch 93a (one in this embodiment) is provided on the game board 30. Then, these plurality of large winning opening switches 38a and 93a are connected by different signal lines, or are wired on a relay board (not shown) existing between the switch and the game control device 100 (main board), for example. Each of the big winning opening switches 38a and 93a is connected to the game control device 100 by a method called an or (wired OR). The panel radio wave sensor 62 and the magnetic sensor 61 described later may also be connected by a plurality of different signal lines, or may be similarly connected to the game control device 100 by a method called wired or.

The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Proximity I / F
Of the outputs of 121, the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 91b, the starting port 3 switch 92b, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, the large winning port switch 38a,
The detection signals of the grand prize opening switch 93a and the specific area switch 93d are input to the second input port 123. Regarding the signal output (output from the proximity I / F 121) of the start port 1 switch 36a, which is the start port switch of the special figure 1, and the start port 2 switch 91b of the special figure 2, one signal line is shown in FIG. Although it is shown by, there are actually two.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124. Further, the third input port 124 has a detection signal of a magnetic sensor 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the game machine 10, and a glass frame open detection switch provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10. 63 detection signal, detection signal of main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 of the game machine 10, detection signal of setting value change switch 126, detection signal of setting key switch 127, payout control A touch switch signal (a signal based on the input of the touch switch provided on the operation unit 24) from the device 200 is input.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the game control device 100 to the test firing test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the start port 1 switch 36a and
The detection signal of the start port 2 switch 91b and the detection signal of the start port 3 switch 92b are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123.

As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12V in addition to the voltage such as 5V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It has become.

For the data held by the second input port 123, the gaming microcomputer 111 asserts the chip enable signal CE (Chip Enable) (effective level), which is not shown, by decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123. It can be read by changing to). The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, the input unit 120 has a detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 and a payout control device 20.
Frame radio wave invalid signal from 0 (signal output based on the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 detecting radio waves), payout busy signal (whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept commands) (Signal indicating abnormal payout), status signal indicating abnormal payout (status signal indicating abnormal payout)
, Shoot ball out switch signal (signal indicating shortage of game balls before payout), overflow switch signal (game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 in a predetermined amount or more (they are full))
1st input port 122 that takes in the out-ball detection switch signal (the signal that is output when the out-ball is detected) and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Is provided.

The out ball detection switch signal is a signal output from the out sensor each time the out sensor (not shown) detects one out ball of the gaming machine 10. For example, the out ball detection switch signal is provided in the discharge flow path (not shown) between the discharge port (not shown) for discharging the game ball (out ball) from the game machine 10 and the out port 30a. The out-ball detection switch signal is a gaming performance (eg, 60,000 out-balls) per predetermined operation (eg, 60,000 out-balls).
It is used for the calculation of the base), and the calculated game performance is displayed on the performance display device 135. The out-ball detection switch signal may be input to the effect control device 300.
In that case, the out-ball detection switch signal may be used for determining the operating state, which is a trigger for switching to the game effect or the customer waiting screen display. For example, the performance display device 135 is a 4-digit 7-segment LED, and can display the gaming performance in decimal or hexadecimal.

Further, the gaming machine 10 may be provided with a vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration so that the detection signal of the vibration sensor switch is input to the first input port 122 or the third input port 124.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the game microcomputer 111 and the like, and the Schmidt buffer 125 is provided with these inputs. It has a function to remove noise from the signal. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 that receive signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET whose noise has been removed by the Schmidt buffer 125 is
It is directly input to the reset terminal provided on the game microcomputer 111 and supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RESET is output directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test firing test device. It is configured to do. again,
The reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RESET is not supplied to the first to third input ports 122, 123, 124 of the input unit 120. The data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset in order to prevent the system from malfunctioning, but the input unit 120 is set immediately before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from each port is discarded by resetting the gaming microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged in a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. The serial communication from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 is a one-way communication in which a signal cannot be input to the game control device 100 from the effect control device 300 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140, and data for notifying the special symbol information of the variable display game to the test firing test device of the accreditation body (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the jackpot, and the like are transmitted via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass production product) installed in a game store. The detection signal of a switch such as a start port switch that does not need to be processed, which is output from the proximity I / F 121, is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, a detection signal that cannot be supplied to the test firing test device as it is, such as the magnetic sensor 61 and the panel radio wave sensor 62, is once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, the gaming machine plays a game. It is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test firing test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 as an error signal indicating that the state cannot be controlled.
The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not go through the buffer, and the like. ing. The port on the relay board 70 has a game microcomputer 11
The chip enable signal CE (not shown) output from 1 is also supplied, and the signal of the port selectively controlled by the chip enable signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and is connected to the first special variable winning device 38 (
Opening / closing data of the large winning opening 1 solenoid 38b that opens / closes the opening / closing member 38c of the large winning opening 1).
Opening / closing data of the large winning opening 2 solenoid 93b that opens / closes the movable member (opening / closing member) 93c of the second special variable winning device 93 (large winning opening 2), and the normal electric solenoid 37b that opens / closes the movable member 37a of the normal variable winning device 37. Open / close data, operation data of the distribution solenoid 37c that operates the distribution device 37d, operation data of the distribution motor 93h that operates the distribution device 93e, and a first output for outputting display data of the performance display device 135. A port 134a is provided.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a second output port 134b for outputting the display data of the probability setting value display device 136. Further, the output unit 130 has a third output port 134c for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the batch display device 50, and the batch display device 50. 4th output port 1 for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED of
34d is provided.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with information about the gaming machine 10, such as jackpot information, from the external information terminal board 71.
A fifth output port 134e for outputting to is provided. The external information terminal board 71 has
It is equipped with a photo relay and can be connected to, for example, an external device (information collection terminal, game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.) installed in a game store, and information about the game machine 10 is transmitted to the external device via the photo relay. Can be supplied to. A part of the information supplied to the external device is output from the fourth output port 134d. Further, a firing permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 134e to the payout control device 200 via the Schmidt buffer 132.

Further, the output unit 130 has an opening / closing data signal of the large winning opening 1 solenoid 38b output from the first output port 134a, an opening / closing data signal of the large winning opening 2 solenoid 93b, an opening / closing data signal of the general electric solenoid 37b, and distribution. First driver (drive circuit) 138 that generates and outputs a drive signal by receiving the operation data of the solenoid 37c and the operation data of the distribution motor 93h.
a, the batch display device 50 output from the second driver 138b and the fourth output port 134d that output the on / off drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the batch display device 50 output from the third output port 134c. External information terminal board 71 supplies external information signals supplied from the third driver 138c, the fifth output port 134e, and the fourth output port 134d, which output the on / off drive signal of the digit line on the current draw side, to an external device such as a management device. A fourth driver 138d is provided, which receives a display data signal of the performance display device 135 output from the first output port 134a and a fourth driver 138d to output to, and generates and outputs a drive signal of the performance display device 135.

To the first driver 138a, DC32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage so that a solenoid or a motor operating at 32V can be driven. Further, DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment line of the batch display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit wire is for pulling out the digit wire corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A dynamic drive system in which a current is passed through the anode terminal of the LED via the segment wire by the second driver 138b that outputs 12V, and a current is drawn from the cathode terminal via the segment wire by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in, and the LEDs are turned on. The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71, supplies the external information signal with a level of 12V, so that DC12V is supplied. The buffer 133, the first output port 134a, the first driver 138a, etc. are
It may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board. Further, the performance display device 135, or the fifth driver 138e and the performance display device 135 may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the external board (not shown) side instead of the main board. ..

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to an external inspection device 490. Photocoupler 139
Is configured to be capable of bilateral communication so that the game microcomputer 111 can send and receive data to and from the inspection device 490 by serial communication. The transmission and reception of such data is
Since it is performed by using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the first to third input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Next, the configuration of the staging control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 87. FIG. 87 is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of the staging control device according to the fifth embodiment.
The staging control device 300 is an amusement chip (IC) similar to the gaming microcomputer 111.
), And VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for displaying video on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. , Sound source LSI31 that controls the sound output to reproduce various melody, sound effects, etc. from the speakers 19a and 19b.
4 is provided.

The main control microcomputer 311 is a P that stores programs executed by the CPU and various data.
A PROM 321 consisting of a ROM (programmable read-only memory), a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and a FeRAM that can hold stored contents even when power is not supplied in the event of a power failure (FeRAM).
Ferroelectric RAM) 323 and RTC (real-time clock) 338, which is a timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day of the week, time, etc.), are connected. A RAM 311a that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. Further, a WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command (effect command) from the game microcomputer 111, determines the effect content, instructs the VDP 312 about the content of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 of the playback sound, and decorates the lamp. Lighting, drive control of motors and solenoids,
Performs processing such as managing the production time.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging / reducing an image. Further, the VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM 326 used for developing and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325.
Is connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By sending and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be sent in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

A vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30 from the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311.
C, a synchronization signal STS that gives the data transmission timing is input. In addition, VDP312
Waits to notify the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing to VRAM. A signal WAIT or the like is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by an LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) method. From VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, video data and horizontal synchronization signal HSY
The NC and the vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input, and the image generated by the VDP 312 is displayed on the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313.

An audio ROM 327 in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 314.
The main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are connected via the address / data bus 340. Further, the interrupt signal I is transmitted from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311.
NT is to be input. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and is generated by the sound source LSI 314. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 100. An effect control command signal (effect command) such as a decorative special figure hold number command, a decorative special figure command, a variation command, a stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 via this command I / F331. ). Game microcomputer 111 of game control device 100
Operates at DC 5V, and the main control microcomputer 311 of the staging control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V. Therefore, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function.

Further, the staging control device 300 is a board decoration LE that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40).
D control circuit 332, frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the glass frame 15, game board 30 (center case 40). A board effect movable body control circuit 334 for driving and controlling a board effect device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41) is provided. These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340. Even if the glass frame 15 is provided with a frame effect device provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for effect), and is provided with a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device. good.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes a selection button switch 25a and a decision button switch 25b of the option setting unit 25 provided on the glass frame 15, and an effect switch that detects the initial position of the motor in the board effect device 44. A function of detecting the on / off state of 47 (effect motor switch) and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and the effect control device 300.
A switch input circuit 336 having a function of detecting the state of the volume control switch 335 and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 is the staging control device 300 having the above configuration.
DC32V for driving a motor or solenoid, a display device 41 consisting of a liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving a motor or LED, in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the electronic components controlled by the motor. DC5 which is the power supply voltage of command I / F331
In addition to V, it is configured to generate a voltage of DC15V for driving a motor, LED, and speaker. Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, DC 3.3V is based on DC 5V.
And a DC-DC converter for generating DC 1.2V is provided in the staging control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in the reset state. In addition, VDP312 (VDPREST signal) and sound source LSI314 are output from the main control microcomputer 311.
It is supplied to the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) and the control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) that drive and control lamps, motors, and the like, and these are reset. Further, a cooling FAN 45 for cooling various parts of the gaming machine 10 is connected to the staging control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the power of the staging control device 300 is turned on. Further, the circuit board constituting the staging control device 300 corresponds to a sub control board (also referred to as a sub board).

Next, the game control performed in these control circuits will be described with reference to FIG. 88. FIG. 88 is a diagram showing an example of game control executed and controlled by the game control device of the fifth embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 makes it possible to execute a special figure 1 variable display game, a special figure 2 variable display game, a type 2 game, and a normal figure variable display game. The gaming machine 10 is a special figure 1 of these games.
It is possible to derive a hit (big hit) from opening the big winning opening 1 from the variable display game, the special figure 2 variable display game, and the two-kind game.

In the normal gaming state of the gaming machine 10, the player adjusts the firing force to the left gaming area 32L.
The game progresses in a left-handed game aiming at winning a prize in the starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) by firing a game ball.

The game ball that has won the start winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a, and the special figure 1
The start condition of the variable display game (special figure 1 game) is given. The gaming machine 10 stores a predetermined number (for example, “4”) as a starting memory of the start condition of the special figure 1 variation display game for each winning of the start port 1 switch 36a. The gaming machine 10 digests the start memory every time the special figure 1 variation display game is executed, and derives a result that is out of order or hit. If the execution result of the special figure 1 variation display game is out of order, the gaming machine 10 executes the next special figure 1 variation display game when there is a start memory, and waits for a prize in the start port 1 when there is no start memory. When the execution result of the special figure 1 variation display game is a hit, the gaming machine 10 executes a hit game (big hit, special game state) in which the big winning opening 1 is opened a predetermined number of times.

When the gaming machine 10 ends the hit game in which the large winning opening 1 is opened, the gaming machine 10 transitions from the normal gaming state to the general electric support gaming state. The normal game state is a game state in which the player has an advantage in advancing the game because the chance of winning a prize in the normal variable winning device 37 (normal electric accessory, normal electric) is increased as compared with the normal game state.

In the pachinko machine 10, the player adjusts the firing force and launches the gaming ball to the right gaming area 32R in the pachinko support gaming state, so that the normal symbol start gate (pachinko start gate) 34,
The game progresses in a right-handed game aiming at winning a prize in the normal variable winning device 37 or the variable winning devices 91 and 92.

The game ball that has won the prize at the Fuzu start gate (Fuzu gate) 34 (the game ball that passes through the Fuzu start gate 34) is detected by the gate switch 34a, and the Fuzu variation display game (Fuzu game).
Gives the start condition of. The gaming machine 10 stores a predetermined number (for example, "4") as a starting memory of the start condition of the normal map variation display game for each winning of the normal map start gate 34, up to the upper limit. The gaming machine 10 digests the starting memory every time the game is executed, and derives a result that is out of order or hit. If the execution result of the normal map variation display game is out of order, the gaming machine 10 executes the next normal map variation display game when there is a start memory, and waits for a prize in the normal map start gate 34 when there is no start memory. When the execution result of the normal fluctuation display game is a hit, the gaming machine 10 executes a hit game in which the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (Public machine) is opened.

The game balls that have won the ordinary variable winning device 37 are distributed into the operating port 37e (operating port 1) and the operating port 37f (operating port 2) by the distribution device 37d. Of the game balls that have won the normal variable winning device 37, the game balls distributed to the operating port 37e change the variable winning device (non-electric accessory, starting port 2) 91 from the closed state to the open state depending on the flow force. .. The variable winning device 91, which is in the open state in advance, maintains the open state even if there is a game ball distributed to the operating port 37e.

The game ball that has won the variable prize device 91 is detected by the start port 2 switch 91b, and gives the start condition of the special figure 2 variable display game (special figure 2 game). Further, the game ball that has won the variable winning device 91 in the open state changes the variable winning device 91 from the open state to the closed state. The gaming machine 10 stores a predetermined number (for example, “4”) as a starting memory of the start condition of the special figure 2 variation display game for each winning of the start port 2 switch 91b. The gaming machine 10 digests the starting memory every time the special figure 2 variation display game is executed, and derives a result that is out of order or hit. If the execution result of the special figure 2 variation display game is out of order, the gaming machine 10 executes the next special figure 2 variation display game when there is a start memory, and waits for a prize in the start port 2 when there is no start memory. When the execution result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a hit, the gaming machine 10 executes a hit game (big hit, special game state) in which the big winning opening 1 is opened a predetermined number of times.

It should be noted that the gaming machine 10 executes the special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 1 variable display game and special figure 2 variable display game) a specified number of times (for example, 100 times) in the normal electric support gaming state. Transition from the support game state to the normal game state. That is, the gaming machine 10 is in the normal electric support gaming state until the execution result of the special figure variation display game derives the deviation of the specified number of times, and when the deviation exceeds the specified number of times or before the deviation of the specified number of times is reached. When a hit is derived, the game transitions from the normal game state to the normal game state.

It should be noted that the gaming machine 10 has a small chance of executing the special figure 1 variable display game in the right-handed game.
Since the special figure 2 variable display game is designed to have a large execution opportunity, the specified number of times of the special figure variable display game in the normal electric support gaming state is consumed by the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game.

Further, among the game balls that have won the ordinary variable winning device 37, the game balls distributed to the operating port 37f are variable winning devices (non-electric accessory, type 2 starting port, starting port 3) 92 depending on the flow force.
Is changed from the closed state to the open state. The variable winning device 92, which is in the open state in advance, is
Even if there is a game ball distributed to the operating port 37f, the open state is maintained.

The game ball that has won the variable winning device 92 is detected by the starting port 3 switch 92b, and is the second.
Gives the start condition of the seed game (type 2 game). Further, the game ball that has won the variable winning device 92 in the open state changes the variable winning device 92 from the open state to the closed state. In the second type game, the large winning opening 2 is opened when the starting opening 3 is won, and the large winning opening 1 is opened on condition that a specific area in the large winning opening 2 is won. It is a game that makes it possible to derive.

The gaming machine 10 obtains the start condition of the second type game and obtains the second special variable winning device (large winning opening 2) 9
3 is released a predetermined number of times. The game ball that won the second special variable prize device 93 is the distribution device 9.
It is divided into a specific region 93f and a non-specific region 93g by 3e. In the second type game, when the game ball won in the second special variable winning device 93 is distributed to the non-specific area 93 g, and when the game ball is not won in the second special variable winning device 93, the game result is , Means that the outlier was derived. On the other hand, when the game ball won in the second special variable winning device 93 is distributed to the specific area 93f (winning in the specific area 93f), the game result means that the hit is derived.

It should be noted that the gaming machine 10 does not transition from the normal electric support gaming state to the normal gaming state even if the execution result of the second type game is out of alignment in the general electric support gaming state.

In addition to having a derivation opportunity to open the large prize opening 1 based on the execution result of the special figure 2 variable display game in the normal electric support game state, such a game machine 10 also has a large prize in the second type game. Have a derivation opportunity to open the mouth 1.

In addition, for the sake of simplicity, the description of the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game in the normal electric support gaming state is omitted, but the gaming machine 10 has an opportunity to execute the special figure 1 variable display game. Can execute the special figure 1 variable display game even in the normal electric support game state. When both the start memory of the special figure 1 variable display game and the start memory of the special figure 2 variable display game exist, the gaming machine 10 has priority over the start memory of the special figure 1 variable display game. The start memory of the variable display game can be digested. It should be noted that the gaming machine 10 has priority over the start memory of the special figure 1 variable display game, and instead of digesting the start memory of the special figure 2 variable display game, the special figure 1
Alternate digestion of the start memory of the variable display game and the start memory of the special figure 2 variable display game, winning order digestion, and the like may be adopted.

Further, the gaming machine 10 exclusively executes the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game and the variable display of the special figure 2 variable display game, and does not execute them at the same time. On the other hand, the gaming machine 10 does not prohibit the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game and the simultaneous execution of the two types of games, or the variable display of the special figure 2 variable display game and the simultaneous execution of the two types of games. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 prevents hits from occurring at the same time as a result of simultaneous execution of the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game and the two types of games.

For example, the gaming machine 10 suppresses the execution of the second type game when the special figure 1 variable display game first derives a hit. Further, the gaming machine 10 may suppress the execution of the two types of games from the variable display when the special figure 1 variable display game is in the variable display and the variable display result derives a hit. It should be noted that the gaming machine 10 does not suppress the execution of the second type game when the special figure 1 variable display game is in the variable display and the variable display result derives the deviation.

Suppression of the execution of the type 2 game can be realized by invalidating the start condition of the type 2 game and invalidating the winning of the specific area 93f. In addition, the gaming machine 10 replaces the suppression of the execution of the two-type game.
The execution of the two-kind game may be suspended, or the establishment of the start condition of the two-kind game may be stored as a reservation of the execution right up to a predetermined number.

Further, the gaming machine 10 suppresses the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game when the type 2 game first derives the hit. The gaming machine 10 may interrupt the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game in the wake of the hit of the two types of games. The interruption timing of the variation display may be interrupted at the same time as winning a prize in the specific area 93f, or may be interrupted after waiting for the establishment of a predetermined trigger such as the passage of a predetermined time. Further, the gaming machine 10 may wait for the end of the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game even if the two types of games are hit. In this case, the gaming machine 1
0 waits for the next fluctuation start of the special figure 1 variation display game, and waits for the hit end of the two-kind game. When the variation display result of the special figure 1 variation display game is a hit, the gaming machine 10 waits for the hit of the special figure 1 variation display game and waits for the end of the hit of the two types of games. At this time, the gaming machine 10 has a special figure 1.
During the hit of the variable display game, it may be notified that the hit of the special figure 1 variable display game is waiting.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 also hits the special figure 2 variable display game at the same time as a result of the variable display of the special figure 2 variable display game and the simultaneous execution of the two types of games in the same manner as the special figure 1 variable display game. Can be prevented from occurring.

Next, the configuration of the batch display device will be described with reference to FIG. 89. FIG. 89 is a diagram showing an example of a batch display device according to a fifth embodiment. The batch display device 50 has a 7-segment LED_d.
It includes 1 and 7 segment LEDs_d2, and 16 LEDs from LED_d3 to LED_d18. The batch display device 50 includes a 7-segment LED_d1 and a 7-segment LED.
Various statuses are displayed depending on the lighting mode of _d2 and LED_d3 to LED_d18.

The batch display device 50 distributes various status display functions from the 7-segment LED_d1 and the 7-segment LED_d2, and from the LED_d3 to the LED_d18, so that the round display unit 51, the special figure 1 hold display unit 52, and the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53. A special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, a normal symbol symbol display unit 55, a normal figure hold display unit 56, a status display unit 57, and a special figure 2 hold display unit 58 are provided. The round display unit 51 has four LEDs, LEDs_d3 to LED_d6.
The number of rounds in the special figure game is displayed according to the lighting mode of. The special figure 1 hold display unit 52 displays the number of holds in the special figure 1 game according to the lighting mode of the two LEDs of LED_d11 and LED_d12. The special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 has eight Ls of the 7-segment LED_d1.
The symbol in the special figure 1 game is displayed according to the lighting mode of the ED (7 segment LEDs and 1 dot LED). The special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 displays the symbol in the special figure 2 game according to the lighting mode of eight LEDs (seven segment LEDs and one dot LED) of the seven-segment LED_d2. The normal symbol display unit 55 displays a symbol in the normal symbol game according to the lighting mode of the three LEDs of LED_d8, LED_d10, and LED_d18. The normal figure hold display unit 56 displays the number of hold in the normal figure game according to the lighting mode of the two LEDs, LED_d15 and LED_d16. The status display unit 57 includes LED_d7 and LE.
The gaming state in the special figure game is displayed by the lighting mode of the three LEDs of D_d9 and LED_d17. The special figure 2 hold display unit 58 displays the number of holds in the special figure 2 game according to the lighting mode of the two LEDs of LED_d13 and LED_d14.

Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the game microcomputer 111 mainly includes a main process and a timer interrupt process performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 ms).

Here, the general map variation display game described briefly will be described in detail again. Game control device 1
In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of 00, a random value for hit determination in the normal figure is extracted and stored in the ROM 111B based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal figure start gate 34. The process of determining the hit / miss of the normal map fluctuation display game is performed by comparing with the determination value. Then, on the general symbol display unit 55 of the batch display device 50,
After displaying the identification symbol (identification information) in a variable manner for a predetermined time, the process of displaying the normal map variable display game in which the identification symbol (identification information) is stopped and displayed is performed. When the result of this normal figure fluctuation display game is a hit, a special result mode corresponding to each of the first hit stop symbol to the third hit stop symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display unit 55, and the normal electric solenoid 37b is displayed. Is operated, and the movable member 37a of the normal variable winning device 37 is controlled to be opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds) as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37a). If the result of the normal map variation display game is out of sync, the normal map symbol display unit 55 is controlled to display the result mode of the out of alignment.

Further, the start winning prize (starting memory) is memorized based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning opening 36, and based on this starting memory, the first special figure variation display game The random value for big hit determination is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and the process of determining the hit / miss of the first special figure variation display game is performed.

Further, the start memory is memorized based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 2 switch 91b provided in the variable winning device 91, and based on this start memory, the jackpot determination random of the second special figure variation display game. The numerical value is extracted and compared with the judgment value stored in the ROM 111B, and the second
Special figure fluctuation display Performs processing to determine the hit / miss of the game.

Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command, effect command) including the determination results of the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game to the effect control device 300. do. Then, after displaying the identification symbol (identification information) on the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 and the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 of the batch display device 50 for a predetermined time, a process of displaying a special symbol variation display game to be stopped and displayed. To do. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a game control means for controlling the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball flowing down the game area 32 into the starting winning area (starting winning opening 36, variable winning device 91).

Further, the effect control device 300 performs a process of displaying the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game on the display device 41 based on the control signal from the game control device 100. Further, the effect control device 300 performs processing such as setting the effect state, outputting sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, and controlling light emission of various LEDs based on the control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as an effect control means for controlling the effect related to the game (variable display game, etc.).

Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit or a small hit, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 displays a special result mode or a small hit result mode on the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 or the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54. Is displayed, and a process of generating a special game state or a small hit game state (that is, a process of executing a special game or a small hit game) is performed. In the process of generating a special gaming state due to the result of the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game being a big hit, the CPU 111A has, for example, the first special variation by the large winning opening 1 solenoid 38b. The opening / closing member 38c of the winning device 38 is opened to control the inflow of the game ball into the large winning opening. In this special gaming state, the CPU 111A is subject to either a condition that a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls wins in the large winning opening, or a predetermined opening time elapses from the opening of the large winning opening. One round is to open the big prize opening until it is achieved.
Control (cycle game) is performed to continue (repeat) this a predetermined number of rounds. again,
In the process of generating a small hit game state due to a small hit as a result of the first special figure variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) or the second special figure variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game). The CPU 111A controls, for example, to open the opening / closing member 38c of the first special variable winning device 38 by the large winning opening 1 solenoid 38b so that the game ball can flow into the large winning opening.

The opening / closing operation pattern (opening / closing operation mode) of the large winning opening performed in these small hit game states is, for example, an operation of keeping the opening / closing member in the open state for 200 msec four times at 1500 msec intervals. As described above, the game control device 100 serves as a large winning opening opening / closing control means for controlling the opening / closing of the large winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of order, the CPU 111A controls to display the result mode of the out of place on the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 and the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 of the batch display device 50.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the end of the special game state based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. This high probability state is
The probability of a hit result in the special figure fluctuation display game is higher than that of the normal probability state.
Further, regardless of the high probability state based on the result mode of either the first special figure fluctuation display game or the second special figure fluctuation display game, the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure Both variable display games are in a high probability state.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a normal electric support state (specific game state, high probability state of normal figure) as a game state after the end of the special game state based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. There is. In this normal power support state, the probability of winning the normal figure fluctuation display game (normal figure probability) is set to a high probability higher than 0, which is the normal probability (normal figure low probability state) (normal figure high probability state). It is possible to do. As a result, the opening time of the normal variable winning device 37 per unit time is controlled to be longer than that in the case where the normal variable winning device 37 is in the low probability state of the normal figure. Here, in the normal variable winning device 37 in the present embodiment, the normal figure probability is set to "0" so as not to open the movable member 37a in the normal gaming state.

Further, in the normal power support state, the execution time (normal map fluctuation time) of the normal map fluctuation display game is, for example, 500 msec, and the normal map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is.
For example, when it becomes 600 msec and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened as a result of the normal fluctuation display game, the opening time (normal power opening time) and the number of times of opening (for example, 500 m) of the first hit stop symbol Second hit stop symbol opening time (normal power opening time) and number of times of opening (for example, 1700 ms x 2 times), third hit stop symbol opening time (normal power opening time) and number of times of opening (For example, 1700 ms x 3 times) can be set.

In addition, the execution time, the normal figure stop time, the normal electric opening number, and the normal electric opening time of the normal figure fluctuation display game are set as appropriate so as to control the normal fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 to be in the normal electric support state. For example, in the normal electric support state, the execution time (normal figure fluctuation time) of the above-mentioned normal figure fluctuation display game is controlled to be a second variable display time shorter than the first variable display time. It is possible (for example, 10000 msec is 1000 msec). Further, in the normal electric support state, it is possible to control the normal figure stop time for displaying the result of the normal map fluctuation display game to be the second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 m). Seconds are 704 ms). Further, in the normal power support state, when the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened as a result of the normal fluctuation display game, the opening time (normal power opening time) is set to the normal state (normal power low probability state). It is possible to control the second opening time to be longer than the first opening time (for example, 100 msec is 1352 msec). In addition, in the normal electric support state, the normal variable winning device 3 is used for one hit result of the normal variable display game.
It is possible to set the number of times of opening of 7 (the number of times of opening the normal electric power) to the number of times of the second opening (for example, 4 times) larger than the number of times of the first opening (for example, 2 times). Further, in the normal electric support state, the probability of hitting the result of the normal figure fluctuation display game (normal figure probability) is higher than the normal probability in the normal operation state (normal figure low probability state, for example, 1/251). It is possible to have a high probability (normal high probability state, for example, 250/251).

In the normal fluctuation support state, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened by changing any one or more of the normal fluctuation time, the normal chart stop time, the number of normal power opening times, the normal power opening time, and the normal power probability. The time to change the state to is longer than usual. It is also possible to set multiple types of time saving states that change different things. Further, in the case of a hit, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first open mode and the second open mode may be different. Further, the high probability state and the time saving state can be generated independently, both can be generated at the same time, or only one can be generated. In addition, the general electric support state can also be referred to as a time saving state, general electric support, or electric support.

[Main processing]
First, the main processing of the game control device of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 94. FIG. 90 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of the main process of the game control device according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 91 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of the main process of the game control device according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 92 is a diagram (No. 3) showing a flowchart of the main process of the game control device according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 93 is a diagram (No. 4) showing a flowchart of the main process of the game control device according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 94 is a diagram (No. 5) showing a flowchart of the main process of the game control device according to the fifth embodiment.

The main process is started by the control unit (gaming microcomputer 111) when the power is turned on. In this main process, first, a process for disabling interrupts (step S1) is performed, and then a stack pointer setting process for setting a stack pointer, which is the start address of an area for saving values such as registers when an interrupt occurs. (Step S2) is performed. Next, register bank 0 is specified (step S3), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S4). RAM 11
The range of the address of 1C is 0000h to 01FFh, and the upper level is 00h or 01h. In step S4, 00h, which is on the head side of the address range of the RAM 111C, is set.

Next, the firing stop signal is output and the firing permission signal is set to the prohibited state (step S5).
.. The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing stop signal, and the firing of the game ball is prohibited.

After that, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) is read into the first register (for example, the B register) (step S6), and then the state of the input port 3 (third input port 124) is read into the second register (for example, the B register). Read into the C register) (step S7).

Here, the predetermined bit of the first register is masked and the other bits are cleared (step S8). For example, only the second bit of the B register corresponding to the detection signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 is held, and the 0th bit, the 1st bit, and the 3rd bit to the 7th bit are cleared. Then, the predetermined bit of the second register is masked and the other bits are cleared (step S9). For example, only the 4th bit of the C register corresponding to the detection signal from the setting key switch 127 is held, and the 0th to 3rd bits and the 5th to 7th bits are cleared.

The information in the first register is integrated into the second register, and the information held by the second register is stored in RAM1.
It is retained as reference information that does not rely on 11C (step S10). For example, the logical sum of the B register and the C register is stored in the C register, and the C register is held as a status reference register.

For example, the value "00000000B" of the state reference register (C register) is "0" after the 0th bit and the 1st bit, the 3rd bit and the 5th bit to the 7th bit are cleared, and the second bit is. It indicates that it is “0” corresponding to the detection signal on from the RAM initialization switch 112, and that the fourth bit is “0” corresponding to the detection signal on from the setting key switch 127. That is, the value "0000000000B" of the status reference register indicates a setting change state in which the RAM initialization switch 112 is ON (ON) and the setting key switch 127 is ON (ON).

Further, the value "00010000B" of the status reference register is the 0th bit and the 1st bit.
The 3rd bit and the 5th to 7th bits are cleared to be "0", and the 2nd bit is RA.
It indicates that it is “0” corresponding to the detection signal on from the M initialization switch 112, and that the fourth bit is “1” corresponding to the detection signal off from the setting key switch 127. That is,
The value "00010000B" of the status reference register indicates a RAM initialization state in which the RAM initialization switch 112 is ON (ON) and the setting key switch 127 is OFF (OFF).

Further, the value "00000100B" of the status reference register is the 0th bit and the 1st bit.
The 3rd bit and the 5th to 7th bits are cleared to be "0", and the 2nd bit is RA.
It indicates that it is “1” corresponding to the detection signal off from the M initialization switch 112, and that the fourth bit is “0” corresponding to the detection signal on from the setting key switch 127. That is,
The value "00000100B" of the status reference register indicates a setting confirmation state in which the RAM initialization switch 112 is OFF (OFF) and the setting key switch 127 is ON (ON).

Further, the value "000010100B" of the status reference register is the 0th bit and the 1st bit.
The 3rd bit and the 5th to 7th bits are cleared to be "0", and the 2nd bit is RA.
It indicates that it is “1” corresponding to the detection signal off from the M initialization switch 112, and that the fourth bit is “1” corresponding to the detection signal off from the setting key switch 127. That is,
The value "000010100B" of the status reference register indicates a power recovery (power failure recovery) state in which the RAM initialization switch 112 is OFF (OFF) and the setting key switch 127 is OFF (OFF).

As a result, the detection signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 and the detection signal from the setting key switch 127 are held in the C register. Since the storage position (second bit) of the detection signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 in the B register and the storage position (fourth bit) of the detection signal from the setting key switch 127 in the C register are different, the B register and C are different. Even by the logical sum of the registers, the detection signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 and the detection signal from the setting key switch 127 are stored without being lost.

After that, a process of setting the power-on delay timer is performed (step S11). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, a slave control means (for example, a payout control device 200, an effect control device 300, etc.) that performs various controls according to an instruction from the game control device 100 that is the main control means, etc. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for the program of the slave control device) to start normally is set. As a result, the game control device 10 is tentatively turned on when the power is turned on.
It is possible to prevent the subordinate control means from missing the command by sending the command to the subordinate control means before 0 rises first and the slave control means starts up. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a standby means for setting a predetermined waiting time for delaying the activation of the main control means and waiting for the activation of the slave control means when the power is turned on.

In addition, when timing the power-on delay timer, the validity of the data held in the RAM area is determined (
It is performed using a storage area (RAM area or register that is not subject to validity judgment) that is not subject to checksum calculation). As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of a RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area for calculation, so that it is possible to prevent the control at the time of turning on the power from becoming complicated.

The detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 is stored in the second register (C register), but the detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 is stored before the start of the standby time. You can reliably save the operation. That is, if the state of the RAM initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the RAM initialization switch 112 can be operated after the standby time has elapsed, or the RAM initialization switch can be operated from the power-on to the standby time. It is necessary to continue to operate 112. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by performing the operation immediately after turning on the power without performing such annoying operations, and the initialization operation performed at the time of turning on the power. Can be prevented from being unacceptable.

Further, the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is stored in the second register (C register), but by storing it before the start of the standby time, the operation of the setting key switch 127 can be performed. It can be detected reliably. That is, the setting key switch 12 after the waiting time has elapsed.
When the state of 7 is read, the setting key switch 127 is waited for the elapse of the waiting time.
It is necessary to operate the setting key switch 127 from the power-on to the elapse of the standby time. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by performing the operation immediately after turning on the power without performing such annoying operations, and the setting change operation performed at the time of turning on the power or It is possible to prevent the situation where the setting confirmation operation is not accepted.

Next, a process for setting a power-on delay timer (for example, about 3 seconds) (step S11).
), And the process of timing the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power outage during the standby time ()
Steps S12 to S16) are performed. First, the number of times (for example, twice) to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus is set (step S12), and whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on or not is set. A determination is made (step S13).

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S13; Y), it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks set in step S12 (step S1).
4). Then, when the power failure monitoring signal is not continuously turned on for the number of checks (step S14; N), the process returns to the determination of whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S13). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks (step S14;
Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the power of the gaming machine 10 is waited to be cut off. In this way, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal continues to be received for a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent false detection of a power failure due to noise or the like, and appropriately deal with problems when the power is turned on. be able to.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to deal with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the start of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM 111C is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power cutoff are retained.
When a power failure occurs here, it is not necessary to perform backup processing or the like. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM 111C, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S13; N), that is, when a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated to "-1" (step S15), and the timer value is "0". (Step S16). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step S16; N), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the check count of the power failure monitoring signal (step S12). Also, the value of the timer is "0".
(Step S16; Y), that is, when the waiting time has ended, the RAM 11
Allow read / write RWM (Read Write Memory) access such as 1C or EEPROM (step S17), and output off-data to all output ports (set to no output).
(Step S18).

Next, the serial port (the port that is pre-installed in the game microcomputer 111,
Set (used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200) (step S19).
).

In step S20, a process of activating a CTC circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed.

In step S21, a process of setting the RAM error flag is performed. It should be noted that the set of the RAM abnormality flag is provisional and may be updated in the process of inspecting the RAM abnormality which is executed later.

In step S22, it is determined whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah). If the value of the power failure inspection area 1 is normal (step S22; Y), it is determined whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step). S23), power failure inspection area 2
If the value of is normal (step S23; Y), the checksum calculation process (step S24) for calculating the checksum of the predetermined area in the RWM is performed.

In the checksum calculation process, the sum of the data in the game control work area and the data in the status display work area may be calculated as a checksum, or the data in the game control work area and the status display work may be calculated. The checksum may be calculated separately from the data in the area, or the checksum may be calculated only from the data in the game control work area. The game control work area is a work area used for game control in the storage area in the RWM. The status display work area is a work area used for status display in the storage area in the RWM.

Next, it is determined whether or not the checksum calculated in step S24 and the checksum when the power is turned off match (step S25), and when it is determined that the checksums match (normal) (step S25; Y) clears the RAM abnormality flag tentatively set in step S21 (step S26).

When it is determined that the checksums do not match (is not normal) (step S25;
In N), by passing step S26 and shifting to step S27, the RAM abnormality flag tentatively set in step S21 becomes deterministic. Even if it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step S22; N or step S23; N), it is tentatively set in step S21 by passing step S26 and moving to step S27. The RAM error flag is deterministic.

In step S27, the setting key switch 12 refers to the second register (C register).
It is determined whether or not the detection signal of 7 is on and the detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 is on. If the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is on and the detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 is on, the process proceeds to step S33, the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is on, and the detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 is on. If not on, step S
Proceed to 28.

Since the game control device 100 holds the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 and the detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 in the second register (C register), the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 and the RAM initialization The detection signal of the switch 112 can be determined at the same time. Further, the game control device 100 has a detection signal of the setting key switch 127 and RAM.
Since the detection signal of the initialization switch 112 is held in the second register (C register),
The detection signal of the setting key switch 127 and the detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 before the validity determination of the RAM can be determined.

In step S28, the control unit determines whether or not the RAM abnormality flag is on. The control unit proceeds to step S30 when the RAM error flag is on (that is, when the RAM error flag is set), and when the RAM error flag is not on (that is, RAM).
If the abnormality flag is cleared), the process proceeds to step S29.

In step S29, the control unit determines whether or not the setting change mode flag is on. The control unit proceeds to step S48 when the setting change mode flag is on, and proceeds to step S30 when the setting change mode flag is not on.

Steps S30 to S32 are processes executed when the RAM is abnormal or when the power is shut off during the setting and the RAM is restarted without being cleared. Step S3
At 0, the control unit transmits a command for notifying the main abnormality error to the effect control device 300.
As a result, the effect control device 300 performs the effect control corresponding to the command of the main abnormality error notification. For example, the staging control device 300 receives a command for notifying a main abnormality error, displays a message informing the restart with RAM clear on the display device 41, or outputs sound from the speakers 19a and 19b. Further, the effect control device 300 receives the command for notifying the main abnormality error, and notifies the main abnormality error by the frame decoration device 18, the board decoration device 46, and the board effect device 44.

In step S31, the control unit displays the 7-segment display data when the game is stopped by the performance display device 135.
Output to. At this time, the control unit can display the status corresponding to the main abnormality error on the performance display device 135. Further, the control unit outputs the 7-segment display data when the game is stopped to the probability setting value display device 136. At this time, the control unit can display a numerical value or a character that is not in the probability set value on the probability set value display device 136. The control unit is L when the game is stopped.
The 7-segment display data including the ED display data may be output to the batch display device 50. At this time, the control unit may turn off or turn on all the batch display devices 50.

In step S32, the control unit outputs the on-data of the security signal to the external information terminal board 71.
Output from. At this time, the control unit turns off the output data of other signals output from the external information terminal board 71. The control unit repeatedly executes steps S31 and S32 and waits for the power to be cut off. That is, the gaming machine 10 outputs a security signal from the external information terminal board 71 until the power is cut off. Further, the gaming machine 10 waits until the power is cut off.
No signal other than the security signal is output from the external information terminal board 71.

The control unit does not prohibit RAM access in the repeated execution of steps S31 and S32 until the power is cut off. As a result, the gaming machine 10 has NMI (No.
n-Maskable Interrupt) The return address can be stored in RAM when it occurs, reducing the risk of program runaway. In this way, the control unit waits for the power to be cut off in step S31.
And the stored contents of the RAM during repeated execution of step S32 are not protected by prohibiting RAM access, but since clearing the RAM at the time of restart is a condition for starting the game control, the risk that the stored contents of the RAM are not protected is limited. There is. That is, the gaming machine 10 obtains the effect of reducing the risk of program runaway while limiting the risk that the stored contents of the RAM are not protected. Further, the control unit does not prohibit RAM access in the repeated execution of step S31 and step S32 until the power is cut off, so that the control unit does not prohibit RAM access, so that step S31 and step S32
In, the subroutine can be called to improve the program efficiency.

Steps S33 to S36 are processes related to preparation for setting change, and step S
At 27, the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is turned on and the RAM initialization switch 11
This is a process executed when the detection signal of 2 is on.

In step S33, the control unit determines whether or not the RAM abnormality flag is on. The control unit proceeds to step S34 when the RAM error flag is on, and proceeds to step S35 when the RAM error flag is not on.

In step S34, the control unit clears the set value because the RAM error flag is on. The setting value may be cleared by setting an invalid value as the setting value, or by setting the most disadvantageous value for the player from the viewpoint of fraud countermeasures.

In step S35, the control unit performs a process of setting the setting change mode flag. The setting change mode flag is a flag indicating whether or not the game machine 10 is changing the setting. The setting change mode flag is set when the setting is being changed, and the setting change mode is in progress when the setting is not being changed. The flag is cleared (reset).

In step S36, the control unit transmits the command for which the setting is being changed to the effect control device 300. As a result, the effect control device 300 performs the effect control corresponding to the command whose setting is being changed. For example, the staging control device 300 receives a command during the setting change and displays a message indicating that the setting is being changed on the display device 41, or the speakers 19a, 1
Sound is output from 9b. Further, the effect control device 300 receives the command during the setting change, and notifies the frame decoration device 18, the board decoration device 46, and the board effect device 44 that the setting is being changed.

Step S37 is a process executed after the setting change preparation (step S33 to step S36) or after the setting confirmation preparation (step S49, step S50). In step S37, the control unit sets the security signal control timer to 128 ms. As a result, the gaming machine 10 outputs a security signal at least until the security signal control timer is timed up.

Steps S38 to S40 are processes related to waiting for the end of setting change or waiting for the end of setting confirmation. By setting the output of the security signal in step S37, the gaming machine 10 makes it possible to grasp from the outside the execution of the process related to the setting change end waiting or the setting confirmation end waiting.

After enabling the interrupt (step S38), the control unit refers to the second register (C register) and determines whether or not the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is off (step S).
39). The control unit is in step S5 when the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is off.
The process proceeds to step 5, and if the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is not off, the process proceeds to step S40.

In step S40, the control unit determines whether or not a power failure has occurred. The control unit is
The occurrence of a power failure can be determined by continuously detecting the power failure monitoring signal for a predetermined time. The control unit proceeds to step S41 when a power failure occurs, and step S when a power failure does not occur.
Proceed to 39. That is, the control unit waits for the setting key to be turned off until the power failure occurs, with the interrupt enabled in step S38.

When the control unit determines that a power failure has occurred, the process for disabling interrupts (step S4).
1) Perform the process of outputting off-data to all output ports (step S42).
After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step S43).
), The power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step S44).
Further, a checksum calculation process (step S45) for calculating the checksum when the power of the RWM is turned off, and a process for saving the calculated checksum in the checksum area (step S46).
), Then the process of prohibiting access to the RAM (step S47) is performed, and then the power of the gaming machine is waited to be cut off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is turned off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power is cut off is correctly backed up. It can be determined at the time of re-input.

Step S48 is executed when it is determined in step S29 that the setting change mode flag is on. In step S48, the control unit refers to the second register (C register) and determines whether or not the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is on. The control unit
If the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is on, the process proceeds to step S49, and if the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is not on, the process proceeds to step S51.

Step S49 and step S50 are processes related to preparation for setting confirmation. Step S4
In 9, the control unit performs a process of setting a flag in the setting confirmation mode. The setting confirmation mode flag is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming machine 10 is confirming the setting. The setting confirmation mode flag is set when the setting is being confirmed, and the setting confirmation mode is in progress when the setting is not being confirmed. The flag is cleared (reset). In step S50, the control unit transmits the command for which the setting is being confirmed to the staging control device 300. As a result, the staging control device 300 performs staging control corresponding to the command being confirmed for setting. For example, the staging control device 300 receives a command during setting confirmation, displays a message indicating that the setting is being confirmed on the display device 41, or outputs sound from the speakers 19a and 19b. In addition, the staging control device 3
00 receives the command during the setting confirmation, and notifies that the setting is being confirmed by the frame decoration device 18, the board decoration device 46, and the board effect device 44. After this, the control unit proceeds to step S37.

On the other hand, when the control unit determines in step S48 that the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is not on, the control unit executes step S51. In step S51, the control unit refers to the second register (C register) and determines whether or not the detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 is on. The control unit proceeds to step S52 when the detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 is on, and proceeds to step S58 when the detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 is not on. That is, the gaming machine 10 proceeds to execute the process related to RAM initialization (RAM clear) by the activation detection accompanied by the pressing operation of the RAM initialization switch 112, and R
The process proceeds to the execution of the process related to the power failure recovery by the activation detection without pressing the AM initialization switch 112.

Next, the process related to RAM initialization performed in step S52 and subsequent steps will be described. R
In the process related to AM initialization, the control unit clears the RAM area other than the set value to 0 (zero clear) (step S52), and saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (step S52).
Step S53). For example, the control unit sets the RAM clear start address 2 as the start address at the time of RAM clear, and clears the target area (game control work) in the storage area (area not including the access prohibited area) of the RWM (for example, RAM111C). Clear the data in the area) to zero.

Since the setting change mode flag and the setting confirmation mode flag are included in the data in the clear target area, they are cleared by zero clearing the data in the clear target area.

In step S54, the control unit transmits a command at the time of RAM initialization to the effect control device 300. As a result, the effect control device 300 performs effect control corresponding to the command at the time of RAM initialization. For example, the effect control device 300 receives a command at the time of RAM initialization, displays a message informing that the RAM has been initialized on the display device 41, or outputs sound from the speakers 19a and 19b. Further, the staging control device 300 receives the command for initializing the RAM, and indicates that the RAM has been initialized by the frame decoration device 18 or the board decoration device 4.
6. Notify by the board effect device 44.

Further, when the control unit detects that the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is off after executing the process related to the setting change end waiting or the setting confirmation end waiting (step S38 to step S40), the control unit performs step S55. Run. After disabling interrupts (step S55), the control unit transmits a command to end the notification to the effect control device 300 (step S).
56).

As a result, the effect control device 300 ends the notification that the setting is being changed, which is started by receiving the command during the setting change, or the notification that the setting is being confirmed, which is started by receiving the command being confirmed. ..

Next, the control unit refers to the setting change mode flag and determines whether or not the setting change mode is in progress (step S57). When the control unit is in the setting change mode, step S5
Proceed to step 2 to execute the process related to RAM initialization. On the other hand, when the setting change mode is not in progress, the control unit proceeds to step S58 and executes a process related to power failure recovery.

In step S58, the control unit executes a power failure recovery process. The power failure recovery process saves the initial value at the time of power failure recovery in the area to be initialized, determines whether or not the special figure game is in high probability by referring to the special figure status, and the special figure game is in high probability. In the case of, the process of saving the on-information in the high-probability notification flag area and saving the on-data of the high-probability notification LED in the segment area is included.

The area to be initialized in the power failure recovery process is a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, a setting change mode flag, a setting confirmation mode flag, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. In the power failure recovery process, the busy signal status area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept the command, is also cleared, and the state of the payout busy signal is confirmed. It is considered to be an indefinite state indicating that it has not been done. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area that stores the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and the state of the touch switch signal is set to an indefinite state indicating that the state has not been determined.

Next, the control unit transmits a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the special figure game processing number to the staging control board (staging control device 300) (step S59), and proceeds to step S60. In step S59, the model designation command, the special figure 1 hold number command, the special figure 2 hold number command,
Send multiple commands such as probability information command, probability setting value information command, and screen specification command. Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, information on the number of times of production and information on the number of times of high probability are transmitted. The screen-specified command is that the control states of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are both normally being processed (during fluctuation, during jackpot (first special game state)).
If it is in a small hit (a state that is neither of the second special game states), it is a command to instruct the display of the customer waiting demo screen, and in other cases, it is a command to display the recovery screen. It is a command to do.

In step S60, the control unit performs a process of starting and setting the random number generation circuit. After that, the values of the predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of turning on the power are extracted, and the corresponding initial value random numbers (big hit symbol initial value random number, small hit symbol initial value random number, hit initial) are extracted. After saving in a predetermined area of the RWM as the initial value (start value) of the value random number and the winning symbol initial value random number (step S61), the interrupt is permitted (step S62).

Subsequently, the control unit performs an initial value random number update process (step S63) for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers. This initial value random number update process is a process of updating (incrementing) each initial value random number by, for example, "+1". In this way, the gaming machine 10 makes it possible to increase the randomness of the random numbers by continuously updating the initial value random numbers as long as time permits in the main process.

Here, the control unit temporarily disables interrupts (step S64), executes the performance display editing process (step S65), and permits interrupts after executing the performance display editing process (step S66). The performance display editing process is a process related to base calculation and display. Since the processing load of the performance display editing process is relatively high, the control unit prohibits interrupts to derive the processing result more quickly. As a result, the gaming machine 10 guarantees the derivation of the processing result of the performance display editing process by the time the gaming state is updated by the timer interrupt.

In step S67, the control unit determines whether or not a power failure has occurred. The control unit is
The occurrence of a power failure can be determined by continuously detecting the power failure monitoring signal for a predetermined time. The control unit proceeds to step S41 when a power failure occurs, and step S when a power failure does not occur.
Proceed to 63.

That is, the control unit repeatedly executes the processes from step S63 to step S67 unless a power failure occurs. Specifically, when a power failure has not occurred, the control unit repeatedly performs initial value random number update processing, performance display editing processing, and power failure monitoring signal check (loop processing).

Then, an interrupt is permitted before the initial value random number update process (step S63) (step S).
66) As a result, if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process will be executed with priority, and the timer interrupt will be waited for by the initial value random number update process, which will put pressure on the interrupt process. Can be avoided.

Similarly, the interrupt is disabled before the performance display editing process (step S65) (step S6).
4) As a result, the performance display editing process is executed in preference to the timer interrupt.
It is possible to avoid pressure on the performance display editing process.

From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) that comprehensively controls the game, and the subordinate control means (payout control device 200, that performs various controls according to the instructions from the main control means).
In a gaming machine provided with an effect control device (300, etc.), the main control means waits for setting a predetermined standby time for delaying the start of the main control means and waiting for the start of the slave control means when the power is turned on. A means (game control device 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined standby time are provided.

Further, a power supply device 400 for supplying electric power to various devices is provided, the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) is provided. , It is determined that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) includes a RAM 111C capable of storing data and a RAM 111C.
An initialization operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112) that can be operated from the outside, and an initialization means (game control device 100) that initializes the data stored in the RAM 111C based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. And, the operation state of the initialization operation unit is read before the start of the waiting time.

The game control device 100 has a function (second initialization process) of distinguishing between the initialization process (first initialization process) at the time of data abnormality and the initialization process (second initialization process) at the time of initialization operation. (1) Initialization means, 2nd initialization means), so that the optimum and lean initialization processing according to the situation can be realized.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) includes a RAM 111C capable of storing data and a RAM 111C.
Setting operation unit that can be operated from the outside (setting value change switch 126, setting key switch 12)
7) and a setting changing means (game control device 100) for changing the setting value stored in the RAM 111C based on the operation of the setting operation unit are provided to enable the setting change and the setting display unit (setting display unit). The setting (set value) can be confirmed by providing the probability set value display device 136). Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is a RAM after the lapse of the standby time.
This means that access to 111C is permitted.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) prohibits access to the RAM (RAM111C) (step S47) and waits for the execution of all the processes to be stopped.
The loop after step S47) and the RAM error standby process (loop in steps S31 and S32) that waits for the execution of all processes to be stopped while permitting access to the RAM (RAM111C) (step S17). Make it feasible.

Here, the standby process when a power failure occurs and the standby process when a RAM is abnormal will be described. The power failure standby process is a loop process that is executed after the access to the RAM is prohibited in step S47 of the main process and waits for the execution of all the processes to be stopped. Further, since the standby process at the time of power failure is executed after the interrupt is prohibited in step S41 of the main process, an interrupt (timer interrupt) that is not an NMI interrupt is prohibited. The standby process when a power failure occurs is NMI.
About interrupts NMI interrupts can occur because interrupts cannot be disabled. However, since the standby process when a power failure occurs is a process executed when a power failure occurs, there is little risk that an NMI interrupt will occur during the execution of the process. Further, the standby process when a power failure occurs is a standby process that does not accompany abnormality notification. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can allocate the electric power up to the power cutoff to the power failure processing. The gaming machine 10 prohibits access to the RAM during the standby process when a power failure occurs, thereby reducing the risk that the stored contents of the RAM will change due to an unstable voltage.

The RAM error standby process is a loop process that is executed after the access to the RAM (RWM) is permitted in step S17 of the main process, and waits for the execution of all the processes to be stopped.
Further, since the RAM error standby process is executed after the interrupt is prohibited in step S1 of the main process, an interrupt that is not an NMI interrupt (timer interrupt) is prohibited. Note that the standby process when a power failure occurs is N because interrupts cannot be disabled for NMI interrupts.
MI interrupts can occur. Since the RAM error standby process is a process of waiting for the power to be cut off, the risk of an NMI interrupt occurring during the execution of the process is greater than that of the power failure standby process.
However, in the RAM error standby process, the return address can be stored in the RAM because access to the RAM is permitted even if an NMI interrupt occurs, and the risk of program runaway due to the occurrence of an NMI interrupt is small. Further, since the gaming machine 10 transmits the main abnormality error notification command to the effect control device 300 in step S30, the effect control device 300 performs the abnormality notification in parallel during the execution of the RAM abnormality standby process. Can be done. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can be expected to be restarted promptly.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt processing of the game control device 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 95. Figure 9
5 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing according to the fifth embodiment. This timer interrupt process is performed in the above-mentioned main process from the time when the interrupt is enabled until the interrupt is disabled (step S38 to step S41, step S38 to step S55, step S66 to step S64, step S66). To step S41)
This is the interrupt processing that occurs in. The timer interrupt process is a process executed by the CPU 111A.

The timer interrupt process is started by inputting a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator to the CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and the timer interrupt process is started.

When the timer interrupt processing is started, first, register bank 1 is specified (step S7).
1). Switching to the register bank 1 is equivalent to performing a register save process of transferring the value held in a predetermined register (for example, the register used in the main process) to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, the D register) (step S72). In step S72, the same processing as in step S4 in the main processing is performed, but the register banks are different.

Next, input from various sensors and switches, input of signals, that is, input processing (step S73) for reading the state of each input port is performed. In step S74, the control unit refers to the setting change mode flag and the setting confirmation mode flag, and determines whether or not the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is in progress. The control unit proceeds to step S75 when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is in progress, executes the setting change / confirmation process, and ends the timer interrupt process. The setting change / confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 95.
On the other hand, the control unit proceeds to step S76 when neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is in progress.

In step S76, the control unit executes an output process for controlling the drive of an actuator such as a solenoid (large winning opening 1 solenoid 38b, solenoid solenoid 37b) based on the output data set in various processes.

When the firing stop signal is output in step S5 in the main processing, the firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permitted state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, the signal is not processed. In addition, the launch permission signal is the game control device 1.
A first signal indicating the state of launch permission seen from 00, and a second signal (launch permission signal) indicating the state of launch permission seen from the payout control device 200 are also generated in the payout control device 200 and fired. It is output to the control device. That is, two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device.
If both are permitted to fire, the game ball is configured to be ready to fire.

Next, the control unit issues a command set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 20.
Issue command transmission process (step S77) to output to 0, random number update process 1 (step S7)
8), the random number update process 2 (step S79) is executed. Here, the random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number, which are the targets of the initial value random number update process. .. In addition, the random number update process 2 is
It is a process of updating the fluctuation pattern random number for determining the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display game of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2. In addition to the random number update process 1 or the random number update process 1, the random number update process 2 may stop the random number update during the setting change or change the update cycle.

Next, the control unit includes a start port 1 switch 36a, a start port 2 switch 91b, a start port 3 switch 92b, a gate switch 34a in the normal drawing, a winning port switch 35a, and a large winning port switch 38.
Winning port switch / status monitoring process that monitors whether there is a normal signal input from a, 93a, and the specific area switch 93d, and monitors errors (whether the front frame or glass frame is open, etc.) Step S80) is performed. Further, the start port switch monitoring process for monitoring the winning of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 91b, and the start port 3 switch 92b (
Step S81) is performed. In the start port switch monitoring process, if the game ball is won in the start winning opening 36 forming the first starting winning opening or the variable winning device 91 forming the second starting winning opening, various random numbers (big hit random numbers, etc.) are generated. Extraction is performed, and the game result is preliminarily determined based on the prize at the stage before the start of the special figure variation display game.

Next, the control unit has a special figure 1 game process (step S82) for performing processing related to the special figure 1 variable display game, a special figure 2 game process (step S83) for performing processing related to the special figure 2 variable display game, and a second type. Two-kind game processing that performs processing related to the game (step S84)
, The normal map game process (step S85) for performing the process related to the normal map fluctuation display game is executed.

Next, a segment LED (for example, a special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 of the batch display device 50) provided on the game machine 10 and displaying various information related to the display of the special figure variation display game and the game is LE.
Segment LED editing process (step S86) that drives D) to display the desired content.
), Magnet fraud monitoring process (step S87) that checks the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61 and determines whether there is an abnormality, and process that checks the detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 62 and determines whether there is an abnormality. Perform the radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S88). Then, an external information editing process (step S89) and a performance display device control process (step S90) for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer are performed, and the timer interrupt process is terminated.

Here, in the fifth embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting interrupt) and the process of restoring the register bank designation (that is, the process of designating register bank 0) are interrupts. It is automatically performed at the time of return (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Depending on the CPU used, there are also gaming machines that need to be instructed to execute a process of restoring the interrupt disabled state or a process of restoring the register bank designation.

[Main processing]
Next, the main process of the staging control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 96. FIG. 96 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the main process in the staging control device according to the fifth embodiment.

The main process is a process executed by the control unit (CPU311) of the staging control device 300 when the power supply of the gaming machine 10 is started.
[Step D11] The control unit disables interrupts.

[Step D12] The control unit performs initial settings of the CPU 311.
[Step D13] The control unit performs the initial setting of VDP312.
[Step D14] The control unit permits interrupts.

[Step D15] The control unit permits the generation of display data. That is, the control unit is V
Allows the display circuit in the DP 312 (not shown) to access the VRAM (not shown) in the VDP 312 and generate display data.

[Step D16] The control unit sets a random number seed. This is a process of setting a pseudo-random number generation sequence using, for example, a sland function. Here, the control unit may use a fixed value such as 0 (zero) as an argument given to the sland function, or use a value created based on the ID value of the CPU or the like so as to be different for each gaming machine. You may.

[Step D17] The control unit is the RWM (for example, RAM 322) of the staging control device 300.
The initial value at the time of power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (for example, the effect flag area (the storage area used as various flags described later in the control process of the effect control device 300)).

[Step D18] The control unit clears the WDT (watchdog timer).
[Step D19] The control unit executes the effect button input process. The effect button input process is a process for editing when the effect buttons (selection button switch 25a and enter button switch 25b) are operated when they are enabled. Since the effect button does not turn on and off at high speed, the control unit may perform the process of detecting the input of the effect button in the effect button input process or in a short-cycle timer interrupt (not shown). good.

[Step D20] The control unit executes the hall / player setting mode process. Hall / player setting mode processing includes setting the changeable range of LED and display device 41 such as brightness and volume, and setting the changeable range.
This is a process for accepting operations such as changing the brightness and volume of the LED and the display device 41 by the player.

[Step D21] The control unit executes a random number update process. Random number update processing is, for example, r
This is a process of updating the pseudo-random number at least once in each control cycle of the main process using the and function. Since the random function generates a random number based on the specified generation sequence each time the recalculation is performed, the control unit can obtain the random number only by executing the random function. A counter that increments by "1", such as the main board (game control device 100), may be used as a random number.

[Step D22] The control unit executes a received command check process. The received command check process is a process of analyzing a command received from the game control device 100 in units of a predetermined number.

[Step D23] The control unit executes the effect display editing process. The staging display editing process is V
This is a process for setting various commands and their parameters for instructing the DP 312 of the drawing contents on the display device 41. For example, the control unit sets commands in a table shape in the effect display editing process.

[Step D24] The control unit executes the drawing command preparation end setting. The drawing command preparation end setting is a process for setting that all commands for the VDP 312 set in the effect display editing process have been prepared.

[Step D25] The control unit determines whether or not it is the frame switching timing, proceeds to step D26 if it is the frame switching timing, and waits for the frame switching timing if it is not the frame switching timing. Here, the frame switching timing is a V blank interrupt (
It is a timing that arrives at a time interval corresponding to a processing cycle (for example, 1/30 second ≈ 33.333 ms) created based on a cycle (for example, 1/60 second) of a V-sync interrupt. The V blank interrupt is generated every time the VDP 312 completes one scan of the entire screen for drawing. As described above, the generation cycle of this V blank interrupt is, for example, 1/60 second. In the case of this embodiment, when the same drawing is repeated twice and a V blank interrupt occurs twice, frame switching is performed, and the frame switching timing cycle is twice the cycle of the V blank interrupt (for example, 1/60 second). (For example, 1/30 second ≒ 33.33 ms
)become. However, the present invention is not limited to this mode, and the frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed. For example, frame switching (image update) may be performed at a cycle of 1/30 second or more, or less than 1/30 second. Frame switching may be performed at intervals.

By the frame switching timing determination processing, the subsequent processing (steps D26 to D31, and subsequent steps D18 to D24) is executed at this frame switching timing for each processing cycle. The time management that needs to be synchronized with the effect content is performed in this frame unit (that is, the processing cycle unit). When the processing cycle is 1/30 second, for example, 3 frames have 100 ms. This is the same as the main board (game control device) managing the time in units of 4 ms of the timer interrupt cycle.

[Step D26] The control unit follows the command set in step D23 to VDP3.
Instruct 12 to draw the screen. For example, the control unit sequentially transmits commands set in a table shape and instructs VDP 312 to draw a screen.

[Step D27] The control unit executes the sound control process. The sound control process is a process related to volume control of the sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b).

[Step D28] The control unit executes the decoration control process. The decoration control process is a process for controlling various LEDs and the like such as the board decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18.
[Step D29] The control unit executes the movable body control process. The movable body control process is a process for controlling a movable body (for example, a board effect device 44) including various motors and SOLs (solenoids).

[Step D30] The control unit executes the launch information control process. The launch information control process sets launch-related information based on the launch status flag, and also produces a special map rotation state (the number of special map fluctuations per game for a predetermined amount of money (that is, a predetermined number of balls to be rented)). It is a process to perform mode correction of.

[Step D31] The control unit executes the information disclosure process. The information disclosure process is a process of disclosing performance information regarding game performance to a player.
The control unit returns to step D18 after executing step D31, and thereafter, step D1.
The processing of steps 8 to D31 is repeatedly executed. That is, steps D18 to D
The loop process (31) is repeatedly executed in the above process cycle after the effect control device 300 is started.
In some cases, it is called main loop processing).

The control unit executes the processes of steps D27 to D29 in the main loop process in order to match the effect of the screen, and signals and data (particularly various LEDs and motors) generated or set by these control processes are used. The process of actually outputting the drive control signal, etc. to the port is performed in a short-cycle timer interrupt (not shown). However, when an IC specialized for controlling various devices is used, there is a case where a signal or the like is not output by a timer interrupt only by instructing by serial communication or the like.

Next, the display of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game on the display device 41 will be described with reference to FIG. 97. FIG. 97 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display screen using a decorative symbol in the display device of the fifth embodiment.

The display screen 500 shown in FIG. 97 (1) is a display content of the display device 41 in which the symbol is stopped in the variable display game. The display screen 500 has two sets of decorative patterns and a special figure 1 hold number display 503.
, The special figure 2 hold number display 504, hold display 505, and hold digestion display 506 are included in the display contents.

The two sets of decorative symbols include a large symbol group 501 as the first decorative symbol and a small symbol group 502 as the second decorative symbol. The large symbol group 501 is in charge of game production for the purpose of improving the interest. Therefore, the large symbol group 501 is displayed large in the substantially central portion of the display device 41. Large symbol group 501
Includes the left symbol 501L, the middle symbol 501C, and the right symbol 501R. The left symbol 501L, the middle symbol 501C, and the right symbol 501R of the display screen 500 all indicate that the corresponding special symbol variation display game is in the symbol stop state.

In general, the large symbol group 501 starts to fluctuate in the order of the left symbol 501L, the right symbol 501R, and the middle symbol 501C, and stops (including temporary stop) in the order of the left symbol 501L, the right symbol 501R, and the middle symbol 501C. Therefore, in many cases, the large symbol group 501 forms a reach mode with the left symbol 501L and the right symbol 501R, and waits for the middle symbol 501C to stop to form a hit mode.

The small symbol group 502 is in charge of notifying the variable display state for the purpose of improving the ease of grasping the game state of the player. Therefore, the small symbol group 502 is displayed small on the peripheral edge of the display device 41 so as to ensure visibility without interfering with the display effect of the large symbol group 501. The small symbol group 502 is
Includes left symbol, middle symbol and right symbol. The left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol in the small symbol group 502 of the display screen 500 indicate that the corresponding special symbol variation display game is in the symbol stop state.

In general, the large symbol group 501 is displayed larger than the small symbol group 502, the degree of freedom in the display position is high, and the display mode can be greatly changed. On the contrary, the small symbol group 502 is
It is displayed smaller than the large symbol group 501, and the degree of freedom in the display position is low (for example, the position is fixed).

The special figure 1 hold number display 503 displays the hold storage number (starting memory number) of the special figure 1 game. The special figure 2 hold number display 504 displays the hold storage number of the special figure 2 game. The hold display 505 can clearly indicate the number of hold storages of the special figure variation display game and notify the degree of expectation for the game result for each hold storage according to the display mode. The hold storage number displayed by the hold display 505 corresponds to the sum of the hold storage number displayed by the special figure 1 hold number display 503 and the hold storage number displayed by the special figure 2 hold number display 504. The hold digestion display 506 can indicate that the special figure variable display game is in the variable display state and notify the degree of expectation for the game result depending on the display mode.

On the display screen 500, the number of reserved memory of the special figure 1 game indicated by the special figure 1 hold number display 503 is "0".
Since the number of reserved storages of the special figure 2 game shown in the special figure 2 holding number display 504 is “0”, the number of reserved storages indicated by the special drawing 2 holding number display 505 is also “0”. Further, the display screen 500 indicates that the special figure variation display game is stopped by the hold digestion display 506.

Further, in the gaming machine 10, the large symbol group 501 and the small symbol group 502 are each composed of three-digit symbols, but the gaming machine 10 may have any number of digits as long as it includes one or more symbols. In addition, the gaming machine 10 is
Although the large symbol group 501 and the small symbol group 502 have the same number of digits of the symbol, the large symbol group 501 and the small symbol group 502 may have different numbers of digits of the symbol.

Further, even if the gaming machine 10 changes the transparency of the symbol for the large symbol group 501 between the variable display and the stop display, or during the variable display (for example, the transparency is changed from 0% to 50%), the game machine 10 may change the transparency. For the small symbol group 502, the transparency of the symbol can be fixed (for example, the transparency is fixed to 0%). As a result, the gaming machine 10 can secure the visibility of the small symbol group 502 while ensuring the variety of display effects for the large symbol group 501, and facilitate the grasp of the gaming state of the player.

The display screen 507 shown in FIG. 97 (2) is the display content of the display device 41 during the symbol variation in the variation display game. On the display screen 507, the number of reserved memory of the special figure 1 game indicated by the special figure 1 reserved number display 503 is "1", and the number of reserved stored numbers of the special figure 2 game indicated by the special figure 2 reserved number display 504 is "0". Therefore, the number of hold storages indicated by the hold display 505 is also "1". Further, the display screen 507 indicates that the special figure variation display game is undergoing symbol variation by the hold digestion display 506. The left symbol 501L, the middle symbol 501C, and the right symbol 501R of the display screen 507 all indicate that the corresponding special symbol variation display game is in the symbol variation state. Further, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol in the small symbol group 502 of the display screen 507 indicate that the corresponding special symbol variation display game is in the symbol variation state.

Next, a hit derived in the special figure 1 game (first hit), a hit derived in the special figure 2 game (second hit), and a hit derived in the second type game (third hit). Hit)
Regarding the display screen (effect display screen) of the hit effect in the display device 41, which is common to the above.
This will be described with reference to FIGS. 98 and 99. FIG. 98 is a diagram showing an example (No. 1) of the effect display screen in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 99 is a diagram showing an example (No. 2) of the effect display screen in the fifth embodiment.

The display screen 510 shown in FIG. 98 (1) is an effect display screen corresponding to the fanfare effect. The display screen 510 includes the effect guide 511, the launch direction guide 512, the effect element 513, and the jackpot symbol guide 514 in the display contents.

The staging guide 511 guides the winning name (for example, “staging bonus”) corresponding to the jackpot type. The launch direction guide 512 informs the player that the launch direction of the hit ball is in the right game area by means of the message "right strike" and a pictogram (arrow pointing to the right side). The gaming machine 10 displays the launch direction guide 512 at the same display position as in other gaming states (for example, during normal electric support) in which the launch direction of the hit ball is in the right gaming area, so that the player can guide the launch direction 512. It reduces the risk of overlooking. The effect element 513 is a display element that produces a fanfare, and includes, for example, a character, a message, a movie, and the like. Big hit design guide 5
14 displays the symbol from which the jackpot is derived. For example, the jackpot symbol guide 514 indicates that the jackpot is based on the three-digit symbol "3".

The display screen 515 shown in FIG. 98 (2) is a winning effect display screen. Display screen 515
Is an effect guide 511, a launch direction guide 512, an effect element 513, and a round guide 516.
, The number of hits guide 519, the winning prize ball guide 520, the music guide 521, and the operation guide 523.
And are included in the displayed contents.

The staging guide 511 guides the hit name corresponding to the jackpot type in a smaller area than during the fanfare. The round guide 516 guides the number of rounds by the number of petals 517 corresponding to the number of rounds. The round guide 516 indicates that the effect bonus is 8 rounds by displaying 8 dark-colored petals 517.

The hit count guide 519 displays the hit count (for example, "first time"). Winning prize ball guide 5
20 displays the number of prize balls won this time. The gaming machine 10 indirectly guides the number of prize balls to "1000 pt" instead of the notation such as "1000" or "1000 shots" that directly guides the number of prize balls from the viewpoint of suppressing the gambling spirit. Etc. are adopted. The music guide 521 guides the music titles that can be selected during the hit. The operation guide 523 guides the selection operation of the music title. The operation guide 523 includes, for example, a pictogram showing an overview of the operation unit (push button 25) and an operation guide message.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can proceed with the big hit while letting the player select the music that is being hit. Further, the gaming machine 10 can make the player feel the progress of the round during the jackpot without informing the player of the specific number of rounds in the jackpot.

The big hit types are the derivation of the hit in the special figure 1 game (first hit route), the derivation of the hit in the special figure 2 game (the second hit route), and the derivation of the hit in the second type game (the first). It may be different from the hit route of 3).

The display screen 525 shown in FIG. 99 (1) is an effect display screen corresponding to the first "selected song and corresponding movie effect". The display screen 525 includes a production guide 511, a launch direction guide 512, a round guide 516, a hit count guide 519, a winning prize ball guide 520, and a music guide 52.
1, the music lyrics guide 522, and the corresponding movie 526 are included in the display contents.

The music guide 521 guides the music to be output as a sound during the hit. The music lyrics guide 522 guides the lyrics of the selected music in cooperation with the performance of the music. The corresponding movie 526 displays a movie corresponding to the performance of the music. The round guide 516 guides the round progress of the effect bonus by changing the dark-colored petals 517 to the light-colored petals 518 and displaying them in accordance with the round progress. For example, the round guide 516 informs that three rounds have progressed and the remaining five rounds. The corresponding movie 526 is one of the staging elements 513.

The display screen 527 shown in FIG. 99 (2) is an effect display screen corresponding to the ending effect. The display screen 527 includes a launch direction guide 512, a staging element 513, and a winning prize ball guide 5.
28 and the total prize ball guide 529 are included in the displayed contents. The winning prize ball guide 528 displays the number of winning prize balls acquired during one hit. The total winning prize ball guide 529 displays the number of winning prize balls acquired during consecutive hits. In addition, the winning prize ball guide 528 and the total winning prize ball guide 529 may be calculated only for the prize balls based on the large prize opening, or may be accumulated including the prize balls based on the general winning opening. good.

It should be noted that the gaming machine 10 interrupts the progress of the special figure 1 game or the special figure 2 game while executing the hit effect derived in the second type game, and after the interruption is resumed, the special figure 1 game or the special figure 2 game. In the case of a hit as a result of, the hit that is executed as a result of the special figure 1 game or the special figure 2 game in the hit effect (including the interval effect and the ending effect) derived in the second type game is notified in advance. You may.

Next, regarding the display screen (effect display screen) of the normal electric support state in the display device 41,
This will be described with reference to FIG. 100. FIG. 100 is a diagram showing an example of an effect display screen in the normal electric support state of the fifth embodiment.

The display screen 530 shown in FIG. 100 (1) is an effect display screen corresponding to the normal electric support state. The display screen 530 has two sets of decorative symbols (large symbol group 501, small symbol group 502), special figure 1 hold number display 503, special figure 2 hold number display 504, hold display 505, and hold digestion display 5.
The display contents include 06, the staging guide 531 and the launch direction guide 512. The production guide 531 guides the production name (for example, "Public support") corresponding to the normal power support state.

In the right-handed game, the gaming machine 10 executes the variable display game mainly on the special figure 2 variable display game among the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game. However, the gaming machine 10
May simultaneously execute a variable display game and a two-type game in a right-handed game.

The display screen 532 shown in FIG. 100 (2) is an effect display screen corresponding to the normal electric support state, and is an effect display screen when the variable display game and the two types of games are simultaneously executed. The display screen 532 has a small symbol group 502, a special figure 1 hold number display 503, and a special figure 2 hold number display 504.
, Hold display 505, hold digestion display 506, staging guide 531, and launch direction guide 512.
And 2 types of game guide 533 are included in the display contents. The gaming machine 10 displays the two-type game guide 533 instead of the large symbol group 501 displayed on the display screen 530.

The type 2 game guide 533 is a display that guides the game progress and the game method of the type 2 game. 2
The seed game guide 533 is displayed when the execution opportunity of the second kind game is established. For example, the type 2 game guide 533 is displayed triggered by the detection of the game ball at the start port 3 switch 92b. The type 2 game guide 533 includes the game ball image 534 and the large winning opening 2 image 535 in the display contents, and the player aims to win the game ball in the second special variable winning device (large winning opening 2) 93. I will guide you to. Further, the type 2 game guide 533 includes a game ball image 536, a large winning opening 2 image 535, a distribution device image 537, and a specific area image 538 in the display contents, and the game ball winning the large winning opening 2. However, if the player enters the specific area 93f (V) via the distribution device 93e, the player is informed that the game is a hit (big hit).

Although the type 2 game guide 533 is displayed when the execution opportunity of the type 2 game is established, it may be displayed when the operating port 37f is won.
As a result, the gaming machine 10 can suitably guide the game of the two types of games to the player even during the special figure variation display game. The gaming machine 10 can secure the progress guidance of the special figure variation display game by the small symbol group 502.

Next, the control of the distribution device 37d and the game characteristics provided by the control result of the distribution device 37d will be described with reference to FIG. 101. FIG. 101 is a diagram showing an example of control of a distribution device provided in a normal electric machine according to a fifth embodiment and game performance provided by the control result.

The distribution device 37d shown in FIG. 101 (1) is a distribution solenoid 3 that drives the distribution device 37d.
7c indicates an on state. When the distribution solenoid 37c is on, the distribution device 37d distributes the game ball that has won the normal variable winning device 37 to the operating port 37e. The game ball distributed to the operating port 37e changes the variable winning device 91, which gives an opportunity to start the variable display game in FIG. 2, from the closed state to the open state.

The distribution device 37d shown in FIG. 101 (2) is a distribution solenoid 3 that drives the distribution device 37d.
7c indicates an off state. When the distribution solenoid 37c is off, the distribution device 37d distributes the game ball that has won the normal variable winning device 37 to the operating port 37f. The game ball distributed to the operating port 37f changes the variable winning device 92, which gives an opportunity to start the second type game, from the closed state to the open state.

FIG. 101 (3) shows the control state of the normal electric solenoid 37b and the distribution solenoid 37c.
The normal fluctuation winning device 37 is changed from the closed state to the open state by the normal fluctuation display game deriving a hit. The ordinary variable winning device 37 is a universal solenoid 3
It is in the closed state when 7b is off, and is in the open state when the normal electric solenoid 37b is on.
The normal electric solenoid 37b is controlled to be on in the period TB from timing t0 to timing t2 based on the fact that the normal figure fluctuation display game derives a hit, and is controlled to be turned off in the period TC from timing t2 to timing t3. .. The gaming machine 10 sets the period TA consisting of the period TB and the period TC as the hit period of one normal figure game, and waits for the timing t3 to enable the execution of the next normal figure variation display game.

The distribution solenoid 37c starts a predetermined operation when the normal figure fluctuation display game derives a hit. The distribution solenoid 37c has a period TD from timing t0 to timing t1.
Is one cycle. The period TD includes an on period TE and an off period TF. The period TD starts with the on period TE and ends with the off period TF. The distribution solenoid 37c operates in three cycles in synchronization with the normal electric solenoid 37b during the hit period of the normal drawing game.

Although the distribution solenoid 37c is supposed to operate in synchronization with the normal electric solenoid 37b during the hit period of the normal drawing game, it may operate asynchronously. For example, the distribution solenoid 37c may perform steady operation after the initialization process is completed after the power is turned on. Further, although the distribution solenoid 37c is supposed to perform three cycles of operation during the hit period of the normal drawing game, even if it performs one cycle, less than one cycle, and two or more cycles not limited to three cycles. good. Further, the period TE and the period TF may have the same magnitude, or one may be larger than the other.

In FIG. 101 (4), the actuating port 37e (actuating port 1) and the actuating port 37f (acting port 1) by the distribution device 37d are shown.
The fraction rate of the operating port 2) is shown. The distribution device 37d distributes the game balls that have won the ordinary variable winning device 37 to the operating port 37e at a rate of 50%, and the operating port 37 at a rate of 50%.
Allocate to f.

FIG. 101 (5) shows the expected number of operations of the special figure fluctuation display game (special figure game) and the second type game (type 2 game) in the normal electric support state when the number of times of normal electric support (time reduction number) is 50 times. Is shown. Since the gaming machine 10 has 50 times of time reduction, that is, the end condition of the normal electric support state is 50 times of variable display of the special figure game, the expected number of operations of the special figure game (expected number of times of variable display) is also 50 times. Become. The game ball that won the normal variable prize device 37 during the normal electric support state
Since the game is divided into the actuating port 1 and the actuating port 2 at a ratio of 50:50, the expected number of operating times of the two-type game is also 50 times. Since both the special figure game and the two-kind game are winning opportunities, the gaming machine 10 can provide 100 winning opportunities with 50 times of time reduction. Such a gaming machine 10 can produce a variety of achievements of the end condition of the general electric support control and can produce an unexpectedness.

The gaming machine 10 may have different values for the hits derived by the special figure game and the hits derived by the two-kind game. Further, the value of the hit derived by the special figure 1 game and the value of the hit derived by the special figure 2 game may be different. In addition to the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the hit, the value of the hit depends on the presence or absence of probability fluctuations, the end conditions when there are probability fluctuations, the presence or absence of Fuden support, the end conditions when there is Fuden support, etc. You can make a mistake. Such a gaming machine 10 is
It is possible to produce diversity and unexpectedness for achieving the end conditions of the Fuden support control, and to further improve the interest.

Next, the control of the distribution device 37d and the modified example 1 of the game property given by the control result of the distribution device 37d will be described with reference to FIG. 102. FIG. 102 is a diagram showing an example of the control of the distribution device provided in the normal electric power of the modified example 1 of the fifth embodiment and the game property given by the control result.

FIG. 102 (1) shows the control state of the normal electric solenoid 37b and the distribution solenoid 37c.
The normal fluctuation winning device 37 is changed from the closed state to the open state by the normal fluctuation display game deriving a hit. The ordinary variable winning device 37 is a universal solenoid 3
It is in the closed state when 7b is off, and is in the open state when the normal electric solenoid 37b is on.
The normal electric solenoid 37b is controlled to be on in the period TB from timing t0 to timing t2 based on the fact that the normal figure fluctuation display game derives a hit, and is controlled to be turned off in the period TC from timing t2 to timing t3. .. The gaming machine 10 sets the period TA consisting of the period TB and the period TC as the hit period of one normal figure game, and waits for the timing t3 to enable the execution of the next normal figure variation display game.

The distribution solenoid 37c starts a predetermined operation when the normal figure fluctuation display game derives a hit. The distribution solenoid 37c has a period TA from timing t0 to timing t3.
Is one cycle. The period TA is the on-period TE from timing t0 to timing t01.
2 and the off period TF2 from timing t01 to timing t3 are included. The distribution solenoid 37c operates for one cycle in synchronization with the normal electric solenoid 37b during the hit period of the normal drawing game. The on-period TE2 is smaller than the off-period TF2. Also, the on-period TE2 is smaller than the period TB. Also, the on-period TE2 is smaller than the period TC. As a result, the fraction solenoid 37c makes it possible to provide a difference in the fraction ratio between the actuating port 1 and the actuating port 2. The difference in the distribution ratio between the operating port 1 and the operating port 2 can be set by the time ratio between the on period and the off period, the arrangement order of the on period and the off period, the period occupied by the on period of the normal electric solenoid 37b, and the period. It can also be set according to the relationship with the position (time). Although the distribution solenoid 37c is supposed to operate in synchronization with the normal electric solenoid 37b during the hit period of the normal drawing game, it may operate asynchronously.

In FIG. 102 (2), the actuating port 37e (actuating port 1) and the actuating port 37f (acting port 1) by the distribution device 37d are shown.
The fraction rate of the operating port 2) is shown. The distribution device 37d distributes the game balls that have won the ordinary variable winning device 37 to the operating port 37e at a rate of 25%, and the operating port 37 at a rate of 75%.
Allocate to f.

FIG. 102 (3) shows the expected number of operations of the special figure fluctuation display game (special figure game) and the second type game (type 2 game) in the normal electric support state when the number of times of normal electric support (time reduction number) is 25 times. Is shown. Since the gaming machine 10 has 25 times of time reduction, that is, the end condition of the normal electric support state is 25 times of variable display of the special figure game, the expected number of operations of the special figure game (expected number of times of variable display) is also 25 times. Become. The game ball that won the normal variable prize device 37 during the normal electric support state
Since the game is divided into the operating port 1 and the operating port 2 at a ratio of 25:75, the expected number of operations of the two-type game is 75 times. Since both the special game and the two types of games are chances to win,
The gaming machine 10 can provide a winning opportunity of 100 times with 25 times of time reduction.
Such a gaming machine 10 can produce a variety of achievements of the end condition of the general electric support control and can produce an unexpectedness.

The gaming machine 10 may have different values for the hits derived by the special figure game and the hits derived by the two-kind game. In addition to the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the hit, the value of the hit depends on the presence or absence of probability fluctuations, the end conditions when there are probability fluctuations, the presence or absence of Fuden support, the end conditions when there is Fuden support, etc. You can make a mistake. Such a gaming machine 10 can produce diversity and unexpectedness for achieving the end condition of the general electric support control, and can further improve the interest.

Next, the control of the distribution device 37d and the modified example 2 of the game property given by the control result of the distribution device 37d will be described with reference to FIG. 103. FIG. 103 is a diagram showing an example of the control of the distribution device provided in the normal electric power of the second modification of the fifth embodiment and the game-likeness given by the control result.

FIG. 103 (1) shows the control state of the normal electric solenoid 37b and the distribution solenoid 37c.
The normal fluctuation winning device 37 is changed from the closed state to the open state by the normal fluctuation display game deriving a hit. The ordinary variable winning device 37 is a universal solenoid 3
It is in the closed state when 7b is off, and is in the open state when the normal electric solenoid 37b is on.
The normal electric solenoid 37b is controlled to be on in the period TB from timing t0 to timing t2 based on the fact that the normal figure fluctuation display game derives a hit, and is controlled to be turned off in the period TC from timing t2 to timing t3. .. The gaming machine 10 sets the period TA consisting of the period TB and the period TC as the hit period of one normal figure game, and waits for the timing t3 to enable the execution of the next normal figure variation display game.

The distribution solenoid 37c starts a predetermined operation when the normal figure fluctuation display game derives a hit. The distribution solenoid 37c has a period TA from timing t0 to timing t3.
Is one cycle. The period TA is the on-period TE from timing t0 to timing t02.
3 and the off period TF3 from timing t02 to timing t3 are included. The distribution solenoid 37c operates for one cycle in synchronization with the normal electric solenoid 37b during the hit period of the normal drawing game. The on-period TE3 has almost the same size as the off-period TF3, but at the same time, the overlap period with the period TB in which the normal solenoid is on is large. Also, the on-period TE3 is smaller than the period TB. Also, the on-period TE3 is larger than the period TC. As a result, the fraction solenoid 37c makes it possible to provide a difference in the fraction ratio between the actuating port 1 and the actuating port 2. The difference in the distribution ratio between the operating port 1 and the operating port 2 can be set by the time ratio between the on period and the off period, the arrangement order of the on period and the off period, the period occupied by the on period of the normal electric solenoid 37b, and the period. It can also be set according to the relationship with the position (time). Although the distribution solenoid 37c is supposed to operate in synchronization with the normal electric solenoid 37b during the hit period of the normal drawing game, it may operate asynchronously.

In FIG. 103 (2), the operating port 37e (operating port 1) and the operating port 37f (acting port 1) by the distribution device 37d are shown.
The fraction rate of the operating port 2) is shown. The distribution device 37d distributes the game balls that have won the ordinary variable winning device 37 to the operating port 37e at a rate of 75%, and the operating port 37 at a rate of 25%.
Allocate to f.

FIG. 103 (3) shows the expected number of operations of the special figure fluctuation display game (special figure game) and the second type game (type 2 game) in the normal electric support state when the number of times of normal electric support (time reduction number) is 75 times. Is shown. Since the gaming machine 10 has 75 times of time reduction, that is, the end condition of the normal electric support state is 75 times of variable display of the special figure game, the expected number of operations of the special figure game (expected number of times of variable display) is also 75 times. Become. The game ball that won the normal variable prize device 37 during the normal electric support state
Since the game is divided into the operating port 1 and the operating port 2 at a ratio of 75:25, the expected number of operations of the two-type game is 25 times. Since both the special game and the two types of games are chances to win,
The gaming machine 10 can provide a winning opportunity of 100 times by reducing the number of time reductions to 75 times.
Such a gaming machine 10 can produce a variety of achievements of the end condition of the general electric support control and can produce an unexpectedness.

The gaming machine 10 may have different values for the hits derived by the special figure game and the hits derived by the two-kind game. In addition to the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the hit, the value of the hit depends on the presence or absence of probability fluctuations, the end conditions when there are probability fluctuations, the presence or absence of Fuden support, the end conditions when there is Fuden support, etc. You can make a mistake. Such a gaming machine 10 can produce diversity and unexpectedness for achieving the end condition of the general electric support control, and can further improve the interest.

Next, the control of the distribution device 37d and the modified example 3 of the game property given by the control result of the distribution device 37d will be described with reference to FIG. 104. FIG. 104 is a diagram showing an example of the control of the distribution device provided in the normal electric power of the third modification of the fifth embodiment and the game-likeness provided by the control result.

FIG. 104 shows the control state of the normal electric solenoid 37b and the distribution solenoid 37c. The normal fluctuation winning device 3 is a normal fluctuation winning device 3 by the normal fluctuation display game deriving a hit.
7 is changed from the closed state to the open state.

The normal electric solenoid 37b is controlled to be on in the period TB from timing t0 to timing t2 based on the fact that the normal figure fluctuation display game derives a hit, and is controlled to be turned off in the period TC from timing t2 to timing t3. .. The gaming machine 10 sets the period TA consisting of the period TB and the period TC as the hit period of one normal figure game, and waits for the timing t3 to enable the execution of the next normal figure variation display game.

Further, the normal electric solenoid 37b is controlled to be on in the period TB from the timing t10 to the timing t12 based on the fact that the normal figure fluctuation display game derives a hit, and the period TC from the timing t12 to the timing t13 is controlled to be off. Will be done. The gaming machine 10 has a period T.
The period TA consisting of B and the period TC is set as the hit period of one normal map game, and the next normal map fluctuation display game can be executed after waiting for the timing t13.

The distribution solenoid 37c performs a steady operation after the initialization process after the power is turned on. The distribution solenoid 37c has an on period TE4 up to the timing t4 and an off period TF4 from the timing t4.

That is, one cycle including the on period TE4 and the off period TF4 of the distribution solenoid 37c is larger than the hit operation period (period TA) of the normal electric solenoid 37b. This will result in
The gaming machine 10 can improve the predictability of distribution with respect to the opening timing of the ordinary variable winning device 37, and can improve the interest of the player.

Next, a modified example of the sorting device 37d will be described with reference to FIG. 105. FIG. 105 shows the fifth
It is a figure which shows an example of the distribution apparatus provided in the Fuden of the modification 4 of the embodiment.
The distribution device 540 shown in FIG. 105 (1) is a seesaw type and tilts left and right each time it receives a game ball. For example, when the distribution device 540 receives the game ball in a state of being tilted to the left, the distribution device 540 distributes the game ball to the operating port 37f and tilts to the right. Then, when the game ball is received in a state of being tilted to the right, the distribution device 540 distributes the game ball to the operating port 37e and tilts to the left. As a result, the distribution device 540 can alternately distribute the game balls to the operation port 37e and the operation port 37f without using an actuator such as a motor or a solenoid.

The distribution device 541 shown in FIG. 105 (2) is a 6-hole rotating body that is rotationally driven in one direction by a motor. The distribution device 541 makes it possible to accept game balls in each of the 6 holes, of which 3
The holes distribute the game ball to the operating port 37e, and the remaining three holes distribute the game ball to the operating port 37f. The distribution device 541 can arbitrarily set the number of holes, the acceptance rate of each hole, and the distribution destination of each hole according to the shape. Since the shape of the distribution device 541 can be perceived by the player,
Improve the interest in the distribution of game balls. Further, the distribution device 541 can arbitrarily set the driving mode of the motor. The motor of the distribution device 541 may rotate at a constant speed in one direction, or may repeat a predetermined rotation pattern. The predetermined rotation pattern can be set by a combination of switching the rotation speed, switching the rotation direction, pausing, and the like.

The distribution device 542 shown in FIG. 105 (3) is provided with three distribution holes in a dish on which the game ball can roll. The distribution device 542 makes it possible to accept the game ball in each of the three distribution holes, one of which distributes the game ball to the operating port 37e, and the other two holes distribute the game ball to the operating port 37f. The distribution device 542 can arbitrarily set the number of distribution holes, the acceptance rate of each distribution hole, and the distribution destination of each distribution hole. Since the shape of the distribution device 542 can be perceived by the player, the interest in the distribution of the game ball is improved.

Next, a modified example of the display screen (effect display screen) of the normal electric support state in the display device 41 will be described with reference to FIG. 106. FIG. 106 is a diagram showing an example of an effect display screen in the normal electric support state of the modification 5 of the fifth embodiment.

The display screen 545 is an effect display screen corresponding to the normal electric support state, and is an effect display screen when the variable display game and the two types of games are simultaneously executed. The display screen 545 includes a small symbol group 502, a special figure 1 hold number display 503, a special figure 2 hold number display 504, a hold display 505, a hold digestion display 506, an effect guide 531, and a launch direction guide 512. , Hit opportunity guide 54
6 is included in the display content. The gaming machine 10 has a large symbol group 5 displayed on the display screen 530.
Instead of 01, the winning opportunity guide 546 is displayed.

The winning opportunity guide 546 guides the winning opportunities acquired by the special figure game (number of times the special figure game is executed, the number of variable displays) and the winning opportunities acquired by the type 2 game (number of times the type 2 game is executed, the number of times the large winning opening 2 is opened). It is a display to be displayed. The winning opportunity guide 546 is always or temporarily displayed during the normal electric support state. For example, the winning opportunity guide 546 is displayed for each special figure game execution and for each type 2 game execution. Alternatively, the winning opportunity guide 546 may be displayed as an actual result during the Fuden support at the end of the Fuden support.

The winning opportunity guide 546 displays the number of times of time saving remaining, the number of times of time saving digestion, the number of times of executing two kinds of games, the number of large winning openings 2 and the number of winnings.
As a result, the gaming machine 10 can produce an unprecedented interest in the state of supporting electric power.

Although the second type game has been described as a non-variable display game in the fifth embodiment, it may be accompanied by a variable display. For example, the gaming machine 10 may use a variable display game to produce a prize in a specific area of the second-class game. More specifically
The gaming machine 10 executes a variable display game by detecting a prize in the large winning opening 2, derives a winning mode as a result of the variable display game by detecting a winning in a specific area, and displays a variable display by not detecting a winning in a specific area. As a result of the game, the outlier mode may be derived. In addition, the gaming machine 10 uses a variable display game to indicate the number of rounds after winning a prize in a specific area of the second-class game, the distribution of the number of public electric support, the presence or absence of probability fluctuations, the presence or absence of special effects, and the like. You may.

In the fifth embodiment, the gaming machine 10 is in a state in which the first special variable winning device (large winning opening 1) 38 is advantageous from a disadvantageous state to the player by winning a prize in a specific area of the second type game. However, the second special variable winning device (large winning opening 2) 93 may be converted from a state disadvantageous to the player to a state advantageous to the player.

In the fifth embodiment, the gaming machine 10 is a second special variable winning device (large winning opening 2).
Although 93 is easy to win from the right side game area 32R, it may be easy to win from the left side game area 32L, or it is easy to win from both the right side game area 32R and the left side game area 32L. May be good.

The gaming machine 10 of the fifth embodiment (including the modified example) described above has the following features on one side.
(1) The gaming machine (game machine 10) includes a first starting trigger detecting means (starting port 1, starting port 1 switch 36a) that gives a starting trigger of the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game). A second start trigger detection means (start port 2, start port 2 switch 91b) that gives a start trigger of the second fluctuation display game (special figure 2 fluctuation display game), and a third fluctuation display game (normal figure fluctuation display game). ) Third start trigger detection means (normal figure start gate 34, gate switch 34a)
And a fourth start trigger detection means (type 2 start port, start port 3 switch 92b) that gives a start trigger of a game (type 2 game, non-variable display game) aiming to win a prize in a specific area (specific area 93f).
), A specific area winning detection means (specific area switch 93d) for detecting a winning in a specific area, and a first variable winning means (large winning opening 1) that can be converted into a state advantageous and a state disadvantageous to the player. , 1st special variable winning device (electric accessory) 38) and 2nd variable winning means (ordinary variable winning device (electric accessory) 37) that can be converted into a state advantageous to the player and a state disadvantageous to the player. , A third variable winning means that can be converted into a state that is advantageous to the player and a state that is disadvantageous to the player (large winning opening 2, second special variable winning device (
(Electric accessory) 93) and a fourth variable winning means (variable winning device (non-electric accessory) 91) that can convert the start trigger detection of the second variable display game into an easy state and a difficult state. , A fifth variable winning means (variable winning device (variable winning device)) that can convert the detection of the game start trigger into an easy state and a difficult state.
It includes a non-electric accessory) 92), a first variable display game, a second variable display game, a third variable display game, and a control means (game control device 100) for controlling the game. The second variable winning means is to convert the fourth variable winning means from a difficult state to an easy state to detect the start trigger of the second variable display game at the time of operation (distribution to the operating port 37e). 1st operating means (operating port 37e) and 5th variable winning means at the time of operating (distribution to the operating port 37f) to convert the game start trigger detection from a difficult state to an easy state. Second actuating means (actuating port 3)
7f) and a first distribution means (distribution device 37d) for operating the first operating means or the second operating means according to the distribution of the winning game ball. The third variable winning means is a second sorting means (sorting device 93e) for sorting the winning game balls into the specific area (specific area 93f) and the non-specific area (non-specific area 93g) different from the specific area. Be prepared. The control means converts the second variable winning means from a state disadvantageous to the player into a favorable state based on the result of the third variable display game, and the third variable winning means is changed based on the starting opportunity of the game. Converting from a state unfavorable to the player to a state advantageous, the result of the first variable display game (derivation of a hit in the special figure 1 game,
The first hit route), the result of the second variable display game (special figure 2 derivation of the hit in the game,
(2nd hit route) or winning detection to a specific area (derivation of hit in the 2nd kind game,
The first variable winning means is converted from a state unfavorable to the player to a state advantageous to the player based on the third hit route). (See FIGS. 85 and 88)
(2) The fourth variable winning means of (1) converts the start trigger detection of the second variable display game from an easy state to a difficult state by winning a game ball, and the fifth variable winning means is , By winning a game ball, the game start trigger detection is changed from an easy state to a difficult state. (Fig. 85,
(See Fig. 88)
(3) The control means of (1) is the first variation in favor of the player from the predetermined trigger (end of hit) until the first variation display game or the second variation display game is executed a predetermined number of times. It is possible to control the display game or the second variable display game to a specific state (either a normal electric support state, a time saving state, a probability fluctuation state, or a combination thereof) in which the display game or the second variable display game can be executed. (Fig. 85
, See Figure 88)
The above processing function can be realized by a computer. In that case, a program describing the processing contents of the functions that the gaming machine of the embodiment should have is provided. By executing the program on a computer, the above processing function is realized on the computer. The program describing the processing content can be recorded on a computer-readable recording medium. Computer-readable recording media include magnetic storage devices,
There are optical disks, optical magnetic recording media, semiconductor memories, and the like. The magnetic storage device includes a hard disk device (HDD), a flexible disk (FD), a magnetic tape, and the like. Optical discs include DVD (Digital Versatile Disk), DVD-RAM, and CD (Compact Disk) -RO.
There are M / RW (ReWritable) and the like. MO (Magneto-Optical disk) is used as the magneto-optical recording medium.
And so on.

When distributing a program, for example, a DVD or C on which the program is recorded.
Portable recording media such as D-ROMs are sold. It is also possible to store the program in the storage device of the server computer and transfer the program from the server computer to another computer via the network.

The computer that executes the program stores, for example, the program recorded on the portable recording medium or the program transferred from the server computer in its own storage device. Then, the computer reads the program from its own storage device and executes the processing according to the program. The computer can also read the program directly from the portable recording medium and execute the processing according to the program. Further, the computer can sequentially execute the processing according to the received program each time the program is transferred from the server computer connected via the network.

Further, at least a part of the above processing functions is performed by DSP (Digital Signal Processor), A.
SIC (Application Specific Integrated Circuit), PLD (Programmable Logic De)
It can also be realized by an electronic circuit such as vice).

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the disclosed embodiment as a gaming machine, and is not limited to, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, and the like. It is applicable to all gaming machines that use the game balls of the above, and slot machines that are gaming machines that use medals.

It should also be considered that the disclosed embodiments are exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. Further, each configuration of the above-described embodiment and modification may be applied in combination. The scope of the invention is indicated by the claims rather than the description above.
It is intended to include all changes within the meaning and scope of the claims.

10 Game machine 41 Display device 100 Game control device 300 Production control device

Claims (1)

Display means and
A control means for displaying the customer waiting effect display in the customer waiting state and the setting change operation display in the reception state of the setting change operation related to the game on the display means.
Including
The control means is
The customer waiting effect display can be repeatedly displayed with a period including a first period for displaying the first information and a second period for displaying the second information as one cycle.
In the customer waiting effect display, while making the setting change operation acceptable.
In the first period, the setting change operation display is not displayed on the display means before the setting change operation is accepted, and the setting change operation display is displayed after the setting change operation is accepted. The first information is made difficult to see by superimposing it on the information of No. 1 and displayed on the display means.
In the second period, the setting change operation display is not displayed on the display means before the setting change operation is accepted, and the setting change operation display is displayed after the setting change operation is accepted. The second information is made difficult to see by superimposing on the information of 2, and is displayed on the display means.
The setting change operation display displayed in the first period can be displayed over the first period and the second period.
Pachinko machine.

Images